Furuno Fmd3200 Operators Manual
2015-08-11
: Furuno Furuno-Fmd3200-Operators-Manual-800523 furuno-fmd3200-operators-manual-800523 furuno pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 432
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
OPERATOR'S MANUAL ELECTRONIC CHART DISPLAY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM (ECDIS) Model FMD-3200 FMD-3200-BB FMD-3300 www.furuno.com The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free. ・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer 9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : APR . 2012 E1 : FEB . 09, 2015 Pub. No. OME-44730-E1 ( DAMI ) FMD-3200/3200BB/3300 0 0 0 1 7 6 1 2 5 1 4 IMPORTANT NOTICES General • This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users. • The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury. • Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO. • If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement. • The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice. • The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings. • Save this manual for future reference. • Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will cancel the warranty. • All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders. • “C-MAP” means “C-MAP by Jeppesen” in this manual. How to discard this product Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal. How to discard a used battery Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and - terminals of battery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit. In the European Union The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd In the USA The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws. Ni-Cd Pb In the other countries There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future. i SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The operator must read the safety instructions before attempting to operate the equipment. WARNING CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Warning, Caution Mandatory Action Prohibitive Action WARNING WARNING Do not open the equipment. Do not dissassemble or modify the equipment. This equipment uses high voltage that can cause electrical shock. Only qualified persons can work inside the equipment. Fire, electrical shock or bodily injury can result. Turn off power at switchboard if the something is dropped inside the equipment. Do not operate the equipment with wet hands. Fire or electrical shock can result. Fire or electrical shock can result if the power remains on. Keep the equipment away from areas where contact with water is likely. Turn off power at switchboard if the equipment is emitting smoke or fire. Fire or electrical shock can result if water gets into the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if the power remains on. Do not place liquid filled containers on the top of the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid spills into the equipment. Use the correct fuse. Warning Label Warning labels are attached to the Processor Unit. Do not remove any label. If a label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement. WARNING To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside. Name: Warning Label (2) Type: 03-129-1001-3 Code No.: 100-236-743-10 Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or damage the equipment. WARNING To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside. ii Name: Warning Label (1) Type: 86-003-1011-3 Code No.: 100-236-233-10 TABLE OF CONTENTS FOREWORD .................................................................................................................. xii SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ xiv 1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 2. System Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-1 Processor Unit EC-3000............................................................................................ 1-1 How to Turn the Power On/Off .................................................................................. 1-2 The Standby Mode .................................................................................................... 1-2 ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024.................................................................................... 1-3 1.5.1 Control description......................................................................................... 1-3 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 ................................................................................ 1-5 How to Select a Color Palette.................................................................................... 1-6 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance (FURUNO or Hatteland monitor)...................... 1-7 1.8.1 Manual brilliance adjustment ......................................................................... 1-7 How to Select Sensor Settings .................................................................................. 1-8 How to Enter Ship Speed .......................................................................................... 1-9 How to Enter Heading ............................................................................................. 1-11 How to Mark MOB Position ..................................................................................... 1-12 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time ........................................................... 1-13 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display ............................................................... 1-13 The Settings Menu .................................................................................................. 1-14 How to Manage User Profiles.................................................................................. 1-14 1.16.1 How to create a profile................................................................................. 1-14 1.16.2 How to disable a profile ............................................................................... 1-14 1.16.3 How to restore default settings to a profile .................................................. 1-14 1.16.4 How to activate a profile .............................................................................. 1-15 How to View ECDIS Software Version No., ECDIS System Information, and Operator's Manual ................................................................................................... 1-15 Split Screen ............................................................................................................. 1-16 1.18.1 How to activate, deactivate the split screen ................................................ 1-16 1.18.2 Function availability ..................................................................................... 1-17 1.18.3 Split screen usage characteristics ............................................................... 1-17 Tips.......................................................................................................................... 1-18 Printer Information ................................................................................................... 1-18 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................2-1 2.1 ECDIS Display........................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Electronic chart area...................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Status bar ...................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.3 InstantAccess bar .......................................................................................... 2-6 2.1.4 Sensor information box.................................................................................. 2-9 2.1.5 Own ship functions box ............................................................................... 2-10 2.1.6 Route information box ................................................................................. 2-11 2.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box ............................................................................... 2-12 2.1.8 Alert box ...................................................................................................... 2-12 2.1.9 Permanent warning box............................................................................... 2-12 2.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes ......................................................................................... 2-13 2.1.11 Context-sensitive menus ............................................................................. 2-13 2.1.12 How to enter alphanumeric data.................................................................. 2-14 2.2 How to Select the Operating Mode.......................................................................... 2-15 2.3 How to Select the ECDIS Operating Mode.............................................................. 2-16 2.4 How to Select the Chart Scale................................................................................. 2-16 iii TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 How to Select the Presentation Mode......................................................................2-17 Cursor Position Box .................................................................................................2-18 True Motion Reset....................................................................................................2-19 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage Navigation and Voyage Planning Modes ..........................................................................................2-20 2.9 How to Use the VRM and EBL.................................................................................2-21 2.9.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM ..................................................................2-21 2.9.2 How to measure the range and bearing.......................................................2-21 2.9.3 How to select bearing reference ..................................................................2-21 2.9.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu...................2-22 2.10 Datum....................................................................................................................... 2-23 2.10.1 General ........................................................................................................2-23 2.10.2 Paper charts.................................................................................................2-23 2.10.3 Electronic sea charts....................................................................................2-23 2.10.4 Positioning devices and datum ....................................................................2-23 2.10.5 ECDIS and datum ........................................................................................2-23 2.11 Set up Before Departure ..........................................................................................2-24 2.11.1 Updates before departure ............................................................................2-24 2.11.2 Create or update a route ..............................................................................2-24 2.11.3 How to check and prepare route to monitor .................................................2-26 2.11.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors ..................................................2-28 2.11.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter..........................................................2-29 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS ............................................................................... 3-1 3.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts ................................................................3-1 3.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts .........................................................................3-2 3.2.1 How to install an ENC license ........................................................................3-2 3.2.2 How to install ENC charts ..............................................................................3-3 3.3 How to Install ARCS Licenses, Charts.......................................................................3-5 3.3.1 How to install an ARCS license......................................................................3-5 3.3.2 How to install ARCS charts ...........................................................................3-6 3.4 How to Delete ENC, ARCS Licenses.........................................................................3-8 3.5 How to Read ENC Judgment Information ..................................................................3-8 3.6 How to Install C-MAP Charts .....................................................................................3-9 3.6.1 How to register the eToken ............................................................................3-9 3.6.2 How to install the C-MAP database and licenses ..........................................3-9 3.6.3 How to generate, order and apply an update file .........................................3-12 3.7 How to Delete a C-MAP Database...........................................................................3-13 3.8 How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing) Charts ............................................3-13 3.8.1 How to generate, order and apply an update file .........................................3-13 3.8.2 How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL ....................................................3-14 3.9 How to Export a List of Charts .................................................................................3-14 3.10 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses ................................................................3-15 3.11 How to Show the ENC Permit, ARCS License.........................................................3-15 3.12 How to Backup, Restore Licenses ...........................................................................3-15 3.13 How to View Permit Expiration Date ........................................................................3-16 3.14 How to Display Install/Update History ......................................................................3-17 3.15 Catalog of Chart Cells ..............................................................................................3-18 3.15.1 How to group chart cells...............................................................................3-20 3.15.2 How to view status of chart cells ..................................................................3-21 3.16 How to Open Charts.................................................................................................3-22 3.17 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List ...................................................................3-22 3.17.1 How to print the chart list..............................................................................3-22 3.17.2 How to print the cell status list......................................................................3-23 3.18 How to Delete Charts ...............................................................................................3-24 3.19 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts ......................................................3-24 iv TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.20 How to Find the Chart Type..................................................................................... 3-25 3.21 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually........................................................ 3-25 3.21.1 How to insert update symbols ..................................................................... 3-26 3.21.2 How to delete update symbols .................................................................... 3-27 3.21.3 How to modify existing update symbols ...................................................... 3-27 3.22 How to Synchronize Chart Data .............................................................................. 3-28 3.22.1 How to select the units to synchronize ........................................................ 3-28 3.22.2 How to check synchronization status .......................................................... 3-29 3.22.3 Manual updates and synchronization .......................................................... 3-30 3.23 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts ........................................................................ 3-30 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS ..............................................................4-1 4.1 How to Browse Your Charts ...................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects.................................................................. 4-1 4.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour.................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2.2 Basic Setting menu........................................................................................ 4-3 4.2.3 Chart Display menu ....................................................................................... 4-4 4.2.4 Display base .................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features.......................................................... 4-5 4.3.1 General page................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3.2 Tracking page................................................................................................ 4-7 4.3.3 Route page .................................................................................................... 4-8 4.3.4 Mariner page ................................................................................................. 4-8 4.3.5 Targets page ................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Settings .................................................. 4-10 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS.......................................................................................5-1 5.1 Introduction to S57 Charts......................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.1 Definitions of terms........................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.2 Chart legend for S57 charts........................................................................... 5-2 5.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts .............................................................. 5-3 5.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the S57 Chart ................................ 5-4 5.2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.2 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates.......................................... 5-4 5.2.3 How to set Display date and Approved until dates ........................................ 5-5 5.2.4 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard ................................ 5-5 5.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts................................................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features ........................................... 5-6 5.4 How to Find Information about S57 Chart Objects .................................................... 5-6 5.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO).......................................................................... 5-8 5.5.1 Installation ..................................................................................................... 5-8 5.5.2 How to display the AIO .................................................................................. 5-8 5.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells....................................................................................... 5-9 5.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information ..................................................... 5-10 5.5.5 How to select the information to display ...................................................... 5-11 6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS ...................................................................................6-1 6.1 ARCS Charts ............................................................................................................. 6-1 6.1.1 Chart legend of ARCS chart .......................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Datum and ARCS Charts .......................................................................................... 6-5 6.3 Permanent Warnings of ARCS.................................................................................. 6-5 6.4 ARCS Subscriptions .................................................................................................. 6-6 6.4.1 ARCS Navigator ............................................................................................ 6-6 6.4.2 ARCS license information.............................................................................. 6-6 v TABLE OF CONTENTS 7. C-MAP CHARTS ................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 C-MAP Cartographic Service .....................................................................................7-1 How to Register the System at C-MAP Norway.........................................................7-1 How to Order Charts ..................................................................................................7-1 How to Apply for Licenses..........................................................................................7-1 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................7-2 Chart Subscription Services.......................................................................................7-2 7.6.1 C-MAP Dynamic Licensing (DL) service ........................................................7-2 7.6.2 What is ENC delivery? ...................................................................................7-2 7.7 Chart Display..............................................................................................................7-3 7.7.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................7-3 7.8 Permanent Warnings .................................................................................................7-4 8. CHART ALERTS................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Chart Alerts ................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.1 How to set safety contour...............................................................................8-2 8.1.2 How to select objects used in chart alerts......................................................8-3 8.2 How to Activate Own Ship Check ..............................................................................8-4 8.3 Route Planning...........................................................................................................8-5 8.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning........................................................................8-5 8.4 Route Monitoring........................................................................................................8-7 9. ROUTES................................................................................................................ 9-1 9.1 Route Planning Overview...........................................................................................9-1 9.2 Main Menu for Route Planning...................................................................................9-2 9.3 How to Create a New Route ......................................................................................9-2 9.3.1 How to use the Waypoints page ....................................................................9-4 9.3.2 How to use the User Chart page....................................................................9-5 9.3.3 How to use the Optimize page .......................................................................9-6 9.3.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page ..........................................................9-7 9.3.5 How to use the Check Results page ..............................................................9-8 9.4 How to Modify an Existing Route ...............................................................................9-9 9.4.1 How to change waypoint position...................................................................9-9 9.4.2 How to change other waypoint data...............................................................9-9 9.4.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route ..........................................9-9 9.4.4 How insert a waypoint .................................................................................9-10 9.4.5 How to delete a waypoint .............................................................................9-10 9.4.6 Geometry check of route..............................................................................9-10 9.5 SAR Operations .......................................................................................................9-11 9.6 Route Bank ..............................................................................................................9-14 9.7 Route Optimization...................................................................................................9-15 9.7.1 Available route optimization strategies.........................................................9-15 9.7.2 How to optimize a route ...............................................................................9-16 9.7.3 How to plan a speed profile..........................................................................9-17 9.8 How to Import Routes ..............................................................................................9-18 9.8.1 How to import FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 route data ..........................................9-18 9.8.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data ............................................................9-18 9.8.3 How to import csv, ASCII format route data.................................................9-19 9.9 How to Export Route Data .......................................................................................9-19 9.9.1 How to export FMD-3xx0 route data ............................................................9-19 9.9.2 How to export route data in FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII format ...........................9-20 9.10 How to Delete Routes ..............................................................................................9-20 9.11 Reports..................................................................................................................... 9-21 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS 10. USER CHARTS ...................................................................................................10-1 10.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................. 10-1 10.1.1 Objects of user charts.................................................................................. 10-1 10.2 How to Create a User Chart .................................................................................... 10-2 10.3 How to Import a User Chart Created with ECDIS FEA-2x07................................... 10-6 10.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart....................................................................... 10-7 10.4.1 How to edit objects on the chart area .......................................................... 10-7 10.4.2 How to edit objects from the User Chart dialog box .................................... 10-7 10.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart ............................................................... 10-8 10.6 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display ................................................... 10-8 10.7 How to Delete User Charts...................................................................................... 10-9 10.8 User Chart Reports.................................................................................................. 10-9 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES.............................................................................11-1 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 How to Start Route Monitoring ................................................................................ 11-1 How to Stop Monitoring a Route (Manual, Automatic) ............................................ 11-3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display ..................................................... 11-3 How to View Waypoint Information.......................................................................... 11-4 How to View User Chart Information ....................................................................... 11-5 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned Route ............................................... 11-5 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate from Monitored Route ............... 11-6 11.7.1 Safe off track mode ..................................................................................... 11-6 11.7.2 Back to track mode...................................................................................... 11-7 11.7.3 Instant track messages................................................................................ 11-9 11.7.4 Instant track details.................................................................................... 11-10 11.7.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route ............................. 11-10 11.7.6 How to return to a monitored route when following an instant track route (safe off track mode only)................................................................. 11-12 11.7.7 Button label and equipment state .............................................................. 11-13 11.8 How to Share Route During Route Monitoring ...................................................... 11-14 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS .........................................................................................12-1 12.1 How to Access the Nav Tools in the Overlay/NAV Tools Box ................................. 12-1 12.2 Parallel Index (PI) Lines .......................................................................................... 12-2 12.2.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines............................................................. 12-2 12.2.2 PI line bearing reference ............................................................................. 12-2 12.2.3 Number of PI lines to display....................................................................... 12-2 12.2.4 PI line mode................................................................................................. 12-2 12.2.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval ......................................... 12-3 12.2.6 How to reset the PI lines.............................................................................. 12-3 12.2.7 How to adjust PI line length ......................................................................... 12-4 12.3 Check Area.............................................................................................................. 12-5 12.4 Ring ......................................................................................................................... 12-5 12.5 Predictor .................................................................................................................. 12-6 12.6 Anchor Watch .......................................................................................................... 12-7 12.7 UKC (Under Keel Clearance) .................................................................................. 12-8 12.7.1 UKC overview.............................................................................................. 12-8 12.7.2 How to set UKC ........................................................................................... 12-8 12.7.3 UKC window ................................................................................................ 12-9 12.8 Divider ................................................................................................................... 12-10 12.8.1 How to use the divider ............................................................................... 12-10 12.8.2 Usage characteristics, limitations .............................................................. 12-11 12.8.3 How to deactivate and erase the divider ................................................... 12-11 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS.............................................................. 13-1 13.1 How to Show, Hide TT .............................................................................................13-1 13.2 TT Symbols and TT Attributes .................................................................................13-2 13.2.1 TT symbols...................................................................................................13-2 13.2.2 TT symbol color and size .............................................................................13-2 13.3 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm ...............................................................................................13-3 13.3.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits, enable, disable the alarm.................13-3 13.4 Lost TT Alarm...........................................................................................................13-3 13.4.1 How to enable, disable the lost TT alarm.....................................................13-3 13.4.2 How to set the lost TT alarm filter ................................................................13-4 13.5 How to Set Vector Length and Vector Motion ..........................................................13-4 13.6 How to Display TT Data ...........................................................................................13-6 13.6.1 How to display target data for individual TT .................................................13-6 13.7 Displaying Past Positions of TT ...............................................................................13-7 13.7.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position reference.........................................................................................13-7 13.7.2 Past position point attributes ........................................................................13-7 13.8 TT Source ................................................................................................................13-8 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 14-1 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 Introduction ..............................................................................................................14-1 AIS Symbols.............................................................................................................14-2 Voyage Data ............................................................................................................14-4 How to Show, Hide AIS Targets...............................................................................14-5 How to Filter AIS Targets .........................................................................................14-6 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm ..............................................................................................14-6 Automatic Activation of Sleeping Targets ................................................................14-8 14.7.1 Enabling, disabling automatic activation of sleeping targets........................14-8 14.7.2 Conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets................................14-8 14.8 How to Sleep All Activated Targets..........................................................................14-9 14.9 AIS Lost Target Alarm..............................................................................................14-9 14.9.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alarm .........................................14-9 14.9.2 How to set the AIS lost target alarm filter...................................................14-10 14.10Vector Length, Vector Stabilization in True Motion Mode .....................................14-10 14.11How to Display AIS Target Data............................................................................14-11 14.12How to Display AIS Target Past Positions.............................................................14-13 14.12.1How to enable/disable the past position display, set past position reference.......................................................................................14-13 14.13How to Display Own Ship Data .............................................................................14-13 15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES.................................................................. 15-1 15.1 AIS Safety Messages...............................................................................................15-1 15.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message ...........................................................15-1 15.1.2 How to manage received and sent AIS safety messages............................15-2 15.2 Navtex Messages.....................................................................................................15-3 15.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages................................................................15-4 15.2.2 How to manage received Navtex messages................................................15-5 16. RADAR OVERLAY ............................................................................................. 16-1 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 viii Introduction ..............................................................................................................16-1 How to Setup the Radar Overlay .............................................................................16-2 Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart ..........................................................16-3 Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT Mismatch ..........................................16-4 TABLE OF CONTENTS 17. WEATHER OVERLAY .........................................................................................17-1 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 What is the Weather Overlay?................................................................................. 17-1 How to Activate, Deactivate the Weather Overlay................................................... 17-1 How to Select, Playback a Weather Data File......................................................... 17-2 How to Set up the Weather Overlay ........................................................................ 17-3 Weather Overlay Examples..................................................................................... 17-5 17.5.1 Wind display ................................................................................................ 17-5 17.5.2 Temperature display.................................................................................... 17-6 17.5.3 Cloud coverage display ............................................................................... 17-6 17.5.4 Precipitation rate display ............................................................................. 17-6 17.5.5 Waves display ............................................................................................. 17-7 17.5.6 Ocean current display.................................................................................. 17-7 17.6 Weather Spot Information........................................................................................ 17-8 17.7 Summary of Weather Overlay Viewability, Operability and Operating Mode .......... 17-8 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS ....................................................................................18-1 18.1 CCRS ...................................................................................................................... 18-1 18.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors .......................................................................... 18-2 18.2.1 Sensors menu description ........................................................................... 18-2 18.3 Source of Position ................................................................................................... 18-5 18.4 CCRP, System, Primary, Secondary and Pivot Positions of Own Ship................... 18-6 18.5 Source of Navigation Data....................................................................................... 18-7 18.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication ......................................................................... 18-9 18.7 Filter Status ............................................................................................................. 18-9 18.8 Position Alignment................................................................................................. 18-11 18.8.1 How to align position ................................................................................. 18-11 18.8.2 How to cancel position alignment .............................................................. 18-11 18.9 Wind Sensor .......................................................................................................... 18-12 18.10Depth Sensor ........................................................................................................ 18-13 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS............................................................19-1 19.1 How to Record User, Position Events ..................................................................... 19-1 19.1.1 User events ................................................................................................. 19-1 19.1.2 Position events ............................................................................................ 19-2 19.2 Details Log............................................................................................................... 19-5 19.3 Voyage Log ............................................................................................................. 19-6 19.3.1 How to set conditions for voyage logging .................................................... 19-7 19.4 Chart Usage Log ..................................................................................................... 19-8 19.5 Danger Targets Log................................................................................................. 19-9 19.5.1 How to set the conditions for logging danger targets ................................ 19-10 19.6 How to Playback the Log....................................................................................... 19-11 20. ALERTS ...............................................................................................................20-1 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 What is an Alert? ..................................................................................................... 20-1 Alert Box .................................................................................................................. 20-2 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an Alarm or Warning ........................... 20-5 How to Acknowledge an Alarm or Warning ............................................................. 20-5 Alert List................................................................................................................... 20-6 Alert Log .................................................................................................................. 20-8 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors ............................................................... 20-8 List of Alerts............................................................................................................. 20-9 21. PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................21-1 21.1 Ship and Route Parameters .................................................................................... 21-1 21.2 Forwarding Distances.............................................................................................. 21-2 ix TABLE OF CONTENTS 21.3 Cost Parameters ......................................................................................................21-3 21.4 Instant Track Parameters.........................................................................................21-4 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS ..................................................... 22-1 22.1 Conning Display .......................................................................................................22-1 22.2 Mini Conning Display ...............................................................................................22-9 23. SETTINGS MENU ............................................................................................... 23-1 23.1 How to Access the Settings Menu ...........................................................................23-1 23.2 File Export ................................................................................................................23-2 23.3 File Import ................................................................................................................23-3 23.4 File Maintenance......................................................................................................23-4 23.5 Self Test ................................................................................................................... 23-5 23.6 Data Sharing ............................................................................................................23-6 23.7 Customize ................................................................................................................23-7 23.8 Display Test .............................................................................................................23-8 23.9 Keyboard Test..........................................................................................................23-9 23.10Screenshots...........................................................................................................23-11 23.10.1How to export screenshots.........................................................................23-12 23.10.2How to delete screenshots.........................................................................23-12 23.11User Default...........................................................................................................23-13 23.12CCRP ....................................................................................................................23-14 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................... 24-1 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 24.6 24.7 Maintenance.............................................................................................................24-1 How to Replace the Fuse.........................................................................................24-2 Trackball Maintenance .............................................................................................24-3 How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit ..........................................................24-3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................24-4 Consumable Parts....................................................................................................24-5 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts .................................................................24-6 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) ....................................................... 25-1 25.1 What is an Alert Management System (AMS)?........................................................25-1 25.2 System Configuration...............................................................................................25-1 25.3 Alert Definition, Priority and Category of Alerts........................................................25-1 25.4 Alert Category and Alert acknowledgement From Connected Equipment, AMS .....25-3 25.5 How to Acknowledge an Alert, Stop the Buzzer From the AMS ..............................25-3 25.6 About the ALR and ACK Sentences ........................................................................25-3 25.7 How an Alert is Transferred to the BNWAS .............................................................25-5 25.8 Change of Priority for Unacknowledged Warning ...................................................25-6 25.9 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer ...................................................................25-6 25.10Buzzer Patterns .......................................................................................................25-6 25.11Alert Priority, Alert State ..........................................................................................25-7 25.12Alert Icons................................................................................................................25-8 25.13AMS Mode Operations ............................................................................................25-9 25.13.1How to select the AMS mode.......................................................................25-9 25.13.2AMS mode windows...................................................................................25-10 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS ............................................................................... 26-1 26.1 Configuration............................................................................................................26-1 26.2 Controls.................................................................................................................... 26-2 26.2.1 EMRI FAP-2000 ...........................................................................................26-2 26.2.2 EMRI FAP-3000 ...........................................................................................26-4 26.2.3 TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 ...............................................................................26-5 26.2.4 YOKOGAWA PT-500A.................................................................................26-9 x TABLE OF CONTENTS 26.3 Steering Modes ..................................................................................................... 26-10 26.3.1 EMRI FAP-2000, FAP-3000 ...................................................................... 26-10 26.3.2 TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000, YOKOGAWA PT-500A ...................................... 26-11 26.3.3 Summary of steering modes...................................................................... 26-13 26.4 Autopilot Functions at the ECDIS .......................................................................... 26-14 26.5 How to Select the ECDIS to Control the Autopilot................................................. 26-15 26.6 How to Activate, Deactivate the Track Control System (TCS) from the ECDIS .... 26-16 26.6.1 How to activate the TCS............................................................................ 26-16 26.6.2 How to deactivate the TCS........................................................................ 26-16 26.7 Route Steering Related Indications, Alerts and Messages Generated by ECDIS 26-17 26.7.1 Route steering related information in Route Information box .................... 26-17 26.7.2 Alerts and messages when precondition for route steering are not complete .............................................................................................. 26-18 26.7.3 Alerts given when approaching a waypoint ............................................... 26-20 26.7.4 Other route steering indications and alerts................................................ 26-22 26.8 Route Steering Operations .................................................................................... 26-23 26.8.1 How to stop or change a pre-enabled turn in route steering ..................... 26-23 26.8.2 Collision avoidance maneuver in route steering........................................ 26-24 26.9 Steering Performance............................................................................................ 26-24 26.9.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead....................................... 26-24 26.9.2 Expected steering performance for turns .................................................. 26-25 26.9.3 Expected steering performance under critical failure ................................ 26-26 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS...........................................................AP-5 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE ......................................................................AP-18 APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING........................................................AP-31 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST ......................................................................................AP-33 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1 INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1 xi FOREWORD Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System) FMD-3200, FMD-3200-BB, FMD-3300. We are confident you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability. Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers. This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation and maintenance. Features The FMD-3000 series ECDIS is the product of FURUNO’s extensive experience in computer technology and marine electronics. The ECDIS displays electronic charts, nav lines, TT data, AIS targets and other navigation data on a high-resolution 19-inch (FMD-3200) or 23.1-inch display (FMD-3300). The FMD-3200-BB is supplied without a monitor, permitting use of the commercial monitor of your choice. The main features of this ECDIS series are • Complies with IMO MSC.232(82), IMO A.694(17), IEC 61174 Ed. 3, IEC 61162-1 Ed. 4 2010-11, IEC 61162-2 Ed. 1, IEC 62288, IEC 60945 Ed. 4. • Continuous monitoring of ship’s position through multi-sensor Kalman filter processing using GPS, DGPS, SDME. • Route planning and route monitoring facilities. • Radar image can be overlaid on electronic charts. (Requires FURUNO FAR-2xx7 or FCR-2xx9 series radar.) • Grounding warnings, safe depth contours. • Chart database loaded and updated using DVD ROMs or CD ROMs. • Target data from TT (Tracked Target) and AIS transponder to aid in collision avoidance. Standards Used in this Manual • The keys and controls of the ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 are shown in bold face; for example, the ENTER key. • The buttons on the InstantAccess bar and Status bar and menu items are shown in brackets; for example, the [PLAN] button. • Context-sensitive menus are available with many buttons and boxes and objects within the display area. Right-click those items to display the related context-sensitive menu. • Unless noted otherwise, "click" means to push the left button on a trackball module (in order to do a function). • There are two types of Control Units: ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 (alphabet keyboard, controls, trackball module) and Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (trackball module only). Unless noted otherwise, "Control Unit" refers to the RCU-024. • "Keyboard" refers to the alphabet keyboard of the ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024. • The system can be operated with the controls of the ECDIS Control Unit or a trackball module. The descriptions in this manual use the trackball module. • The color mentioned in this manual are the default colors. Your colors may vary. xii FOREWORD Program No. ECDIS: 2450074-01.xx, Conning: 2450079-01.xx (xx is version no.) Data protection scheme Product FMD-3xx0 Software Version 01.xx Testing Std. Elec. Nav. Chart (ENC) IEC 61174 S-57 Ed. 3.1, Ed.3 S-57 Ed. 3.1.1, and S57 Maint. Doc. (Cumulative) No. 8 Raster Nav. Chart (RNC) S-61 Ed.1.0 ECDIS Presentation Library S-52 PresLib Ed.3.4 Data Protection Scheme S-63 Ed.1.1.1 Virus Prevention The ECDIS is not equipped with a virus checker. The ECDIS operates in real time; therefore, having a virus checker that periodically checks the equipment for viruses would increase the processing load, which can affect operation. However, you can avoid viruses by following the instructions in this section. When you update a chart The PC and medium (USB flash memory, etc.) used to download and store an update for an existing chart or a new chart may be infected with a virus. Check the PC and the medium for viruses with a commercial virus checker - BEFORE you connect them to the ECDIS. Be sure the virus checker contains the latest virus definition files. Network connection The ECDIS receives and displays information from various navigation equipment and radar via a LAN. A PC and other equipment connected to a network can carry viruses. To prevent the introduction of a virus to the LAN, DO NOT connect the ECDIS or HUB to an external network, including other shipboard LAN. Do not install 3rd party programs in the ECDIS Do not install any 3rd party software. Open source software This product includes software to be licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), BSD, Apache, MIT and others. The program(s) is/are free software(s), and you can copy it and/or redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GPL or LGPL as published by the Free Software Foundation. Please access to the following URL if you need source codes: https://www.furuno.co.jp/cgi/cnt_oss_e01.cgi. This product uses the software module that was developed by the Independent JPEG Group. Reverse engineering Reverse engineering (reverse assemble, reverse compiler) of the software of this equipment is strictly prohibited. xiii SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Single workstation Main Monitor Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 HD26T21-MMD-MA4-FAGA Sub Monitor Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Category of units All units protected from the weather. Dashed lines indicate optional or local supply equipment. ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (Max. 2) IF Signal: - Serial Interface x2 (IEC 61162-1/2) - Serial Interface x6 (IEC 61162-1) - Digital Out x6 (power fail/system fail/ NO x2, NC x2) - Digital In (ack in) Note: The following monitors are available with the FMD-3200-BB: Model MU-190 MU-231 MU-201CE MU-231CE JH19T14FUD JH20T17FUD Maker FURUNO FURUNO FURUNO FURUNO Hatteland Hatteland Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 Switching Hub HUB-100 EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT Sensor Adapter MC-3000S Serial interface Sensor Adapter MC-3010A Analog interface Sensor Adapter MC-3020D Digital IN interface Sensor Adapter MC-3030D Digital OUT interface Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 Gateway network equipment (radar, ECDIS, etc.) 100-115/ 220-230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz Monitor viewing distance (m): Model Maker JH23T12FUD JH23T14FUD HD24T21MMD JH26T11MMD HD26T21MMD Hatteland Hatteland Hatteland Hatteland Hatteland For information about a Hatteland monitor, see its Operator’s Manual. xiv Conning Monitor Model MU-190 MU-231 MU-201CE MU-231CE JH19T14FUD JH20T17FUD Viewing Dist. 1.0138 1.0138 1.0759 1.0138 1.0138 0.8793 Model JH23T12FUD JH23T14FUD HD24T21MMD JH26T11MMD HD26T21MMD Viewing Dist. 1.0138 1.0138 0.9517 0.9879 0.9879 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Multiple workstation Main Monitor Sub Monitor Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 HD26T21-MMD-MA4-FAGA Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 Conning Monitor Conning Monitor Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 Main Monitor Sub Monitor Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 Monitor Unit MU-190 MU-231 HD26T21-MMD-MA4-FAGA ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (Max. 2) ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (Max. 2) Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT Gateway network equipment (radar, ECDIS, etc.) EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT IF Signal: - Serial Interface x2 (IEC 61162-1/2) - Serial Interface x6 (IEC 61162-1) - Digital Out x6 (power fail/system fail/ 100-115/ NO x2, NC x2) - Digital In220-230 (ack in) VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz Category of units All units protected from the weather. IF Signal: (Same as left.) Switching Hub HUB-100 100-115/ 220-230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz Dashed lines indicate optional or local supply equipment. Sensor Adapter MC-3000S Sensor Adapter MC-3010A Sensor Adapter MC-3020D Sensor Adapter MC-3030D Serial interface Analog interface Digital IN interface Digital OUT interface Note: The following monitors are available with the FMD-3200-BB: Model MU-190 MU-231 MU-201CE MU-231CE JH19T14FUD JH20T17FUD Maker FURUNO FURUNO FURUNO FURUNO Hatteland Hatteland 100-115/ 220-230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz * Monitor viewing distance (m): Model Maker JH23T12FUD JH23T14FUD HD24T21MMD JH26T11MMD HD26T21MMD Hatteland Hatteland Hatteland Hatteland Hatteland Model MU-190 MU-231 MU-201CE MU-231CE JH19T14FUD JH20T17FUD Viewing Dist. 1.0138 1.0138 1.0759 1.0138 1.0138 0.8793 Model JH23T12FUD JH23T14FUD HD24T21MMD JH26T11MMD HD26T21MMD Viewing Dist. 1.0138 1.0138 0.9517 0.9879 0.9879 For information about a Hatteland monitor, see its Operator’s Manual. xv SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This page is intentionally left blank. xvi 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 System Configuration This ECDIS series is comprised of the components shown in the illustration on the System Configuration page. The Processor Unit is connected to various sensors, and performs navigation calculations, route planning and route monitoring. The Sensor Adapters interface between the Processor Unit and external equipment. The operator controls the ECDIS with the ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 or the Trackball Control Unit RCU-026. Both units are equipped with a trackball module (trackball, right and left mouse buttons and a scrollwheel). The RCU-024 is additionally equipped with an alphabet keyboard. All functions of the ECDIS can be accessed from the trackball module. 1.2 Processor Unit EC-3000 The Processor Unit is the heart of the ECDIS system, and is mainly responsible for the chart management, route planning and route navigation. The Processor Unit has two power switches. The Mains switch controls the power from the switchboard, and the Power switch controls the power to the ECDIS system. DVD drive Mains switch Power switch Note 1: Do not operate the system with a medium inserted in the DVD drive when its use is not required, to prevent damage to the drive and medium. After use of a medium is completed, remove the medium from the drive and store it in its case. Note 2: To keep the system stable, restart the unit at least once every two weeks. Note 3: Close the lid of the DVD drive when the drive is not in use. Note 4: The DVD ROM provided with this equipment contains the ECDIS program. Store the DVD in a place where the temperature and humidity are moderate. The recommended storage temperature is -10°C(50°F) to 40°C(104°F). 1-1 1. INTRODUCTION 1.3 How to Turn the Power On/Off Normally, leave the power switches at the front of the Processor Unit on and control the power with the power key on a Control Unit (RCU-024, RCU-026). The Monitor Unit is powered independently. How to power the system Push the Mains switch on the Processor Unit for the "I" position. Turn on the power switch on the Processor Unit or the power key on the Control Unit. The start-up display appears on the monitor. Note: If the ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F) when the power is applied, nothing appears on the display. This is because the heater is warming the Processor Unit. The display appears after the Processor Unit becomes warm, in approx. two minutes. How to power off the system Press the power switch on the Processor Unit or the power key on the Control Unit. Then, push the Mains switch for the "O" position. 1.4 The Standby Mode The standby mode, which requires a password to activate, deactivates the audio alarms from the ECDIS. Use this mode when the ECDIS is not required, like in a harbor. To go to the standby mode, first click the [OTHERS] button on the Status bar then click [STANDBY]. Have the holder of the password enter the password then click the [OK] button. Click OTHERS, STANDBY. Playback Enter password; click OK button. Click to return to normal operation. To return to normal operation, click [Back to Normal Mode]. 1-2 1. INTRODUCTION 1.5 ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 The RCU-024 consists of controls, keys, alphabet keyboard and trackball module (trackball, scrollwheel and left and right mouse buttons). The trackball module functions like a PC mouse. The operator rolls the trackball and operates the left and right mouse buttons and the scrollwheel to do various functions. Status LED Rotary encoder for EBL InstantAccess knob 1.5.1 Rotary encoder for VRM Keyboard USB port POWER key Trackball module Control description Key Description POWER key Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor unit, the monitor is also turned on or off with this key.) Status LED The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status. Green, lighting: Normal operation status; no alerts generated. Red, lighting: Acknowledged alert (but not rectified) or SYSTEM FAIL. SYSTEM FAIL occurs when there is trouble in the Processor Unit or communication failure between the Processor Unit and an ECDIS Control Unit. Each Control Unit detects trouble and its lamp flashes in red and the buzzer sounds. If this condition occurs at the No. 1 ECDIS Control Unit, the SYSTEM FAIL signal is output. Red, flashing rapidly: Alert not acknowledged nor rectified. Red, flashing slowly: Alert not acknowledged but rectified. OFF: The heater on the CPU board is on, because the ambient temperature is not at least 0°C. The heater takes about two minutes to warm the equipment. The LED lights green after the heater goes off. EBL rotary encoder Adjusts active EBL. EBL 1 Activates or deactivates EBL 1. 1-3 1. INTRODUCTION Key 1-4 Description EBL 2 Activates or deactivates EBL 2. ALARM ACK Alert acknowledgement for alerts generated by chart, navigation, etc. InstantAccess knob, ESC key Selects and processes the functions on the InstantAccess bar. Rotate: Selects item. Push: Confirms selection. ESC key: Goes back one step in the current operating sequence on the InstantAccess bar. BRILL Rotate: Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor. Push: Selects a color palette. A/C RAIN No use. A/C SEA No use. GAIN No use. Alphabet keyboard Enter alphanumeric data. The CTRL key has no function. VRM rotary encoder Adjusts active VRM. MFD Switches between the ECDIS and CONNING modes. VRM 1 Activates or deactivates VRM1. VRM 2 Activates or deactivates VRM2. UNDO Undo the last operation, when creating a route or user chart. VIEW/HIDE Shows or hides the Instant Access bar, [Route Information] box, VRMs, EBLs, [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. RANGE Selects the display scale. ACQ/ACT Activates cursor-selected sleeping AIS target. TARGET DATA Displays detailed target data for selected TT, AIS target. TARGET CANCEL Sleeps cursor-selected activated AIS target. USB port For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format only). Do not connect a USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD drive (Maker: TEAC, Type: PU-DRV10) is for chart updates. Trackball module See the description in section 1.6. 1. INTRODUCTION 1.6 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 The RCU-026 has a power key, a trackball module (trackball, scrollwheel and left and right mouse buttons), a status LED, and a USB port. The trackball module functions like a PC mouse; the user rolls the trackball and operates the left and right buttons and the scrollwheel to do various functions. Power key Left Scrollwheel button USB port Status LED Right button Trackball Control Description Power key Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor unit, the monitor is also turned on/off with this key.) Status LED The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status. See the LED status description on page 1-3. Left button • Does the operation related to the object selected. • Confirms the operation done for the object selected. Scrollwheel • Select options. • Selects chart scale. • Sets numeric data. The scrollwheel does not have a “push” function. Right button • Displays context-sensitive menu when cursor is put in the display area. • Cancels operation done on the object selected. Trackball • Moves the cursor. • Selects an object. USB port For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Do not connect a USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD drive (Maker: TEAC, Type: PU-DRV10) is for chart updates. 1-5 1. INTRODUCTION 1.7 How to Select a Color Palette The system provides three sets of color and brilliance sets (palette), day, dusk and night, to match any ambient lighting condition. The default specifications of each set are as shown in the table below. The panel dimmer setting is automatically changed, and the number of steps depends on the color palette selected. Palette Brilliance Panel dimmer (step) Text color Background color 120 cd/m2 15 White Gray 110 cd/m2 120 cd/m2 15 White Blue Dusk-gray 50 cd/m2 50 cd/m2 7 Light gray Dark gray Dusk-blue 50 cd/m2 50 cd/m2 7 Light gray Dark blue Night-gray 5 cd/m2 5 cd/m2 3 Orange Dark gray Night-blue 5 cd/m2 5 cd/m2 3 Light gray Dark blue 19” display unit 23” display unit Day-gray 110 cd/m2 Day-blue To select a palette, do the following: 1. Click the [Palette] button. [Palette] button 2. Select [Day], [Dusk] or [Night] as appropriate. For example, select [Day] to show its options. 3. Click the palette desired. Note 1: A palette can also be selected by pushing the BRILL control on the Control Unit. Note 2: If the display cannot be seen when switching from a Night to Day palette, push and hold the right button (approx. 2 seconds) to switch to the dusk-gray mode. Note 3: The color palette setting may not get synchronized among ECDIS units selected for synchronization if a unit is being booted during the selection of the color palette. If this occurs, wait until all ECDIS units selected for synchronization have booted then reselect required color palette. 1-6 1. INTRODUCTION 1.8 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance (FURUNO or Hatteland monitor) The brilliance setting is defined according to the color palette setting. However, manual adjustment of the brilliance is also possible. Note 1: The brilliance of only the FURUNO or Hatteland monitor can be adjusted from the Control Unit. Use a serial cable for brilliance adjustment to make the connection between the Processor Unit and the Control Unit. Note 2: For how to adjust display brilliance from the Hatteland monitor, see its operator’s manual. Note 3: Improper brilliance may affect the visibility of information, especially on the night display. 1.8.1 Manual brilliance adjustment Manual adjustment with the BRILL control on the ECDIS control unit Operate the BRILL control to adjust brilliance. Turn it clockwise to increase the brilliance; counterclockwise to decrease the brilliance. Watch the brilliance level indication on the [BRILL] button (see the illustration below) to see the current brilliance level. Manual adjustment with the InstantAccess knob 1. Push the InstantAccess knob. 2. Rotate the knob to select the [BRILL] button then push the knob to show the brilliance adjustment window. Current brilliance level [BRILL] button [CALIB] button Calibration state (CALIB or UNCALIB) 3. Push the knob, rotate the knob to set the brilliance then push the knob to confirm the setting. The calibration state indication changes to "UNCALIB". 4. Rotate the knob to select the [CALIB] button then push the knob to calibrate the brilliance. The calibration state indication changes to "CALIB". 1-7 1. INTRODUCTION Manual adjustment with the trackball module 1. Click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the brilliance adjustment window. 2. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor on a location within the slider bar area then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor on the end of the slider bar and roll the trackball while holding down the left button. 3. Release the left button to confirm setting. The calibration state indication changes to "UNCALIB". 4. Click the [CALIB] button to calibrate the brilliance. The calibration state indication changes to "CALIB". 1.9 How to Select Sensor Settings This ECDIS system accepts navigation data input two ways: System or Local. System shares sensor data among multiple ECDIS in network. Sensor priority is also commonly shared among the ECDIS. Local selects a sensor outside the network. 1. Right-click anywhere in the [Sensor information] box to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Local] or [System] as applicable. Note: Sensor system can also be selected from the menu. Open the menu and click [System/Local Select] on the [Sensor] menu. Click the circle next to [System Sensor] or [Local Sensor] as appropriate then click the [Save] button. 1-8 Open MENU 1. INTRODUCTION 1.10 How to Enter Ship Speed The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu. Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-150 provides both COG and SOG. Speed data is checked for integrity (see section 18.7 for details), and the data is judged as Passed, Doubtful or Failed. The results of the check appear on the [SPD] page, shown below. (The results do not appear when the TCS is engaged.) Passed (green): Data is available for comparison and data is normal. Doubtful (yellow): Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal. Failed (red): Data may or may not be available for comparison, and data is abnormal. 1. Right-click anywhere in the [Own ship information] box to show the context-sensitive menu. Open MENU 2. Click [Open MENU]. 3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System Settings] as applicable. 4. Click the [SPD] tab. Fill circle for automatic speed input Speed sensor list Stablilization mode SPD: Integrity: Passed LOG/GPS selection Integrity check result Set course and speed of drift Check to use radar as source for speed and course Fill circle for manual speed input SPD page, local sensor 1-9 1. INTRODUCTION Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list Stablilization mode SPD: Integrity: Passed LOG/GPS selection Integrity check result Check for manual speed input SPD page, system sensor 5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step 6. 1) Check [Sensors]. 2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle on the Priority1 line to select the sensor to be the Priority1 sensor. Do the same for the Priority2. Only one sensor can be Priority1; all others are priority 2. If a speed sensor is changed from Priority2 to Priority1, then that sensor previously selected to Priority1 is then automatically selected to Priority2 state. 3) Check [LOG] or [GPS] at [Sensor Type] as appropriate. 4) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode]. Select [Bottom] if GPS is the source of speed data, or [Water] if a speed log is the source of speed data. 5) Go to step 7. 6. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual]. Enter the speed, using the scrollwheel or software keyboard. Note: For set and drift, see page 18-3. 7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the menu. Notes on speed input • Be sure not to select a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the log signal is lost, the GPS sensor is used. In the event of GPS loss, the SPD is shown as "**.* kn". • The SPD is shown as "**.* kn", and the label "LOG" is erased if no log signal is present for a certain amount of time. The timeout varies according to ship. • If SOG is changed to STW, the label "LOG" (in orange) appears. If log signal is lost "LOG" is colored yellow. • A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the leeway direction. 1-10 1. INTRODUCTION 1.11 How to Enter Heading Heading can be entered manually or automatically. Heading data is checked for integrity (see section 18.7 for details), and the data is judged as [Passed], [Doubtful] or [Failed]. The integrity check results appear on the [HDG] page, shown below. (The results do not appears when the TCS is engaged.) Passed (green): Data is available for comparison and data is normal. Doubtful (yellow): Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal. Failed (red): Data may or may not be available for comparison, and data is abnormal. Note: If there is only one gyro connected to the ECDIS, heading data is compared to COG from GPS. When the speed is five knots or less, and COG is unstable when it is compared to heading data, the message “Doubtful” appears for heading data. When the ship’s speed becomes greater than 10 knots and COG stabilizes, the message disappears after a short while. 1. Right-click anywhere in the [Own ship information] box to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Open MENU]. 3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System Settings] as applicable. 4. Click the [HDG] tab. Open MENU Fill circle for automatic heading input Sensor list GYRO1 Doubtful GYO001 GYO002 Fill circle for manual heading Fill circle for gyro correction Integrity check result Second shows Integrity as “Not available” when only one gyrocompass is connected. Local sensor settings GYRO1 Doubtful GYO001 GYO002 System sensor settings 1-11 1. INTRODUCTION 5. For automatic input follow the procedure below. For manual input go to step 6. 1) Check [Sensors]. 2) For local system settings, set the priority for each sensor connected, referring to section 1.10. 3) Go to step 7. Note: For the local sensor, an offset can be applied to the gyro reading if it is wrong. Check [Gyro Correction], then spin the scrollwheel to set the offset. 6. For manual input, check [Manual]. Enter heading by spinning the scrollwheel or entering numeric data with the keyboard on the Control Unit. 7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the menu. 1.12 How to Mark MOB Position Use the MOB (man overboard) feature to mark the position of man overboard on the display screen. Access the [MOB] button (in any mode) on the InstantAccess bar. [MOB] button The MOB mark (orange) instantly appears at the system position when the button is operated. Up to 100 MOB marks can be saved. When the capacity for MOB marks is reached, the oldest mark is automatically erased to make room for the latest. To hide an MOB mark, get into the Navigation voyage mode (NAVI) or Voyage planning mode (PLAN), right-click the mark to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Hide MOB]. Exercise caution when using this feature in strong tide or current. The person will not be at the MOB position for a very long time. 1-12 1. INTRODUCTION 1.13 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time A GPS navigator feeds time and date data (ZDA sentence) to the ECDIS and they appear on the Status bar. Neither the time nor the date can be adjusted, however you can select between UTC time (default) and local time. You can switch between the local time and the UTC time by left-clicking the Current time format indication. Note: The date and time are yellow when the ZDA sentence is lost. Current time format Left click: Switch between local and UTC times Right click: Adjust local time Time To set the local time, enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC time as shown below. 1. Right-click the Current time format indication to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Adjust Local Time] to display the [Local Time Adjust] dialog box. 2. Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC time, in hours and minutes. Use the button on the left to select the time offset direction. Select "+" if the local time is ahead of the UTC time, or "-" if it is behind the UTC time. 1.14 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display Click the [Capture] button on the InstantAccess bar to take a screenshot and save it to the SSD (Solid State Drive). You can save a maximum of 100 screenshots. When the memory for screenshots becomes full, you cannot take any more screenshots. In this case, delete unnecessary screenshots. You cannot take a screenshot when a menu or a dialog box is open. Screenshots can be copied to a USB flash memory. For how to process screenshots, see section 23.10. [Capture] button 1-13 1. INTRODUCTION 1.15 The Settings Menu The [Settings] button gives you access to the user profiles and the [Settings] menu. The [Settings] menu has facilities for screenshot management, file management, diagnostic tests and customizing. See chapter 23. [Settings] button 1.16 How to Manage User Profiles Ten sets of [Chart Display], [Symbol Display] and [Chart Alert] menu settings can be stored in user profiles for later retrieval. 1.16.1 How to create a profile 1. Set the [Chart Display], [Symbol Display] and [Chart Alert] menus as desired. 2. Click [ file]. ] on the Status bar then click [Manage Pro- 3. Select a profile number from the “Profile” drop-down list. Note: Profiles 06-10 are disabled in the default setting. To enable a disabled profile, select the profile to enable from the “Profile” drop-down list then uncheck [Disable this profile]. 4. Click [Save Current Settings]. 1.16.2 How to disable a profile Select the profile to disable from the “Profile” drop-down list then check [Disable this profile]. Profile 01 cannot be disabled. 1.16.3 How to restore default settings to a profile Select the applicable profile from the “Profile” drop-down list then click [Restore Default Settings]. 1-14 1. INTRODUCTION 1.16.4 How to activate a profile Click [ ] on the Status bar then click the profile number to activate. Profiles (enabled) 1.17 How to View ECDIS Software Version No., ECDIS System Information, and Operator's Manual You can show ECDIS program no., ECDIS system information, and the operator's manual. Click the [?] button on the Status bar then select [Manual] to show the operator's manual, or [About] to show ECDIS and system related information. On the [About] screen, click the [Version] tab to show the ECDIS software version no., conning software version no., S52 presentation library version, ENC user permit no., and C-MAP SDK software version no. Click the [System 1] tab to show ECDIS system information: CPU type, RAM capacity, SSD free/SSD capacity, Equipment ID and dongle information. [Function] shows the system’s capabilities. The [System 2] tab shows the startup time of the current session. The information shown may be different than what appears on your display. * ecdis,conning,ams * Actual number appears. Version and ID nos. subject to change. 1-15 1. INTRODUCTION 1.18 Split Screen You can split the screen in two, horizontally or vertically, in the Voyage navigation mode. 1.18.1 How to activate, deactivate the split screen To activate the split screen or return to the full screen, click the [DISP] and [TWO DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the choices for screen division. Click the screen division desired. Full screen Vertical split screen Horizontal split screen The example below shows the vertical split screen. The active display can be switched by clicking an [ACTIVE] button at the top of the display. The dividing line between the main and sub views cannot be moved. Click ACTIVE button to switch active display. MAIN VIEW SUB VIEW Dividing line 1-16 1. INTRODUCTION 1.18.2 Function availability Item 1.18.3 Viewable Operable Main Sub Main Sub AIS target Yes Yes Yes Yes Anchor watch Yes Yes Yes No Chart display Yes Yes Yes No Danger highlight Yes Yes Yes No Divider Yes Yes Yes No EBL, VRM Yes Yes Yes Yes Parallel index lines Yes Yes Yes Yes Radar overlay Yes No Yes - Range rings Yes Yes Yes No TT Yes Yes Yes Yes Weather overlay Yes No Yes - Split screen usage characteristics • If the sub view is not displayed correctly, restore the full screen display then try to activate the split screen again. • The display may not be updated when switching to the Voyage planning mode. If this occurs, switch to the Voyage navigation mode, restore the split screen display then return to the Voyage planning mode. • The own ship mark may not appear at the screen center when releasing the split screen display. If this occurs, click the indication "TM/CU Reset" at the top right position on the screen to show the own ship mark at the screen center. • The TM reset feature only works on the active display. To return the own ship mark to the screen center, click the indication [TM/CU Reset] at the top right position on the screen. • The sub view can use a location and chart scale different from the main view. • The chart scale related messages (overscale, larger ENC available, etc.), which appear beneath the chart scale indication, show only on the main view. CAUTION Changes to settings, including safety features such as safety contour, are only reflected on the main view when the split screen is in use. For that reason use caution when observing the sub view. 1-17 1. INTRODUCTION 1.19 Tips This ECDIS provides operational tips for the display area and the InstantAccess bar. To get a tip, simply put the cursor on an object. The tip appears to the right of the object. For example, put the cursor on the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar. The tip "Adjust brilliance" appears. Tip 1.20 Printer Information A Hewlett Packard (HP) printer may be connected to the system to print ENC Publisher's Notes, reports, logs, etc. The available HP printers are Officejet Pro 8000, Officejet Pro 8100 and Officejet 100 Mobile. No other makes or models are permitted. 1-18 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1 ECDIS Display The ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information Systems) screen is divided into several areas, as illustrated below. (The illustration shows the layout for the FURUNOmonitor. The layout may be slightly different with the Hatteland monitor.) Status bar Cursor position box Instant Track Sensor information box Chart scale/presentation mode box Electronic chart area Own ship functions box TC: TC: MANUAL Instant Access bar Route information box Overlay/ NAV Tools box Alert box EBL1 box, EBL2 box Permanent warning box VRM1 box, VRM2 box • The Status bar provides for selection of operating mode, chart format, IMO chart display; one-click restoration of IMO standard display, etc. • The Sensor information box displays ship's speed, course and position and selects sensors. • The Own ship functions box applies offset to the chart; changes geodetic data system, and provides true motion reset. • The Route information box shows route and waypoint data, when a route is selected for navigation. • The Overlay/NAV Tools box provides for setup of the radar overlay and navigation-related functions. • The Alert box shows operational and system alert messages. • The VRM boxes measure the range to an object. • The Permanent warning box displays chart-related warning messages. • The EBL boxes measure the bearing to an object. • The InstantAccess bar provides quick access to functions such as brilliance adjustment, display palette and the menu. The contents change according to the ECDIS mode selected. • The Chart scale/presentation mode box selects the chart scale and presentation mode. • The Cursor position box shows the latitude and longitude position of the cursor and the TTG to the cursor. • The Electronic chart area shows the ECDIS chart. 2-1 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.1 Electronic chart area The ECDIS can use the following types of charts: • S-57 (IHO) • S-63 (IHO) (S-63 encrypted) • ARCS (UKHO) • CM-ENC (C-MAP by Jeppesen) • CM-93/3 (C-MAP by Jeppesen) The following information can also be displayed: • Cursor (moved by trackball) • Planned route • EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) and VRM (Variable Range Marker) • Radar image • Own ship symbol with speed vector • TT (Tracked Target, acquired from radar) • AIS target Electronic charts in ECDIS The electronic navigational charts are displayed in the electronic chart area. There are two kinds of electronic navigational charts available for use in the ECDIS: • S57ed3 ENC or CM-93 (vector format) • ARCS (raster format) The ECDIS combines chart and navigational information. It should be noted that modern navigation systems (e.g., differential GPS) may offer more accurate positioning than what was used to position some of the surveys from which the electronic navigational chart was derived. S57 vector format ECDIS is compatible with S57 Ed.3 ENC format charts. ENC charts are converted to SENC for use with ECDIS. The details for the chart are displayed in the electronic chart area and these can be modified. You can change the chart scale with the ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT functions, and the scale range is 1:1,000 - 1:70,000,000. 2-2 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW CM-93 vector format The CM-93 charts require a contract with applicable provider. These charts are from a private source and they cannot be used as a substitute for paper charts under any condition. To emphasize this point these charts are called "Non-ENC" charts in this manual. Note that some eToken dongles from the FEA-2xx7 can be used. These are labeled “JeT FURUNO XXXXX”. This ECDIS accepts the following C-MAP chart types: CM-ENC, Professional, Professional+ and Jeppesen Primary ECDIS Service. C-MAP produced official ENC chart that complies with the IHO's (International Hydrographic Organization's) S-57 Edition 3 product specification. When used in an ECDIS, the ENC data improves the safety of navigation at sea. ARCS raster format ARCS charts are digital reproductions of British Admiralty (BA) paper charts. They retain the same standards of accuracy, reliability and clarity as paper charts. Zooming into the ARCS chart can be useful for magnifying a complex detail, however this decreases the density of the data displayed, and can give a false impression of the distance from danger. 2-3 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.2 Status bar The Status bar mainly provides for selection of operating mode, chart type and IMO chart display setting. NAVI No. 1 Button Operating mode 10 Description Selects the operating mode, ECDIS or conning. (If the conning display is fed to a separate monitor, only ECDIS is available; the button is inoperative.) Selects the Voyage navigation mode. Goes to the Chart maintenance mode. Selects the Voyage planning mode. • Sets system in standby. • Plays back log data (AMS connection must be off). Shows only the chart, when the left button is pressed and held down. Restores the IMO standard display instantly. Selects chart priority when both vector or raster are available. Selects the pre-defined presentations of ENC content: IMO BASE, IMO STD or IMO ALL. CUSTOM appears when the symbols selected or deselected on the [Chart Display] menu do not match the preset conditions for IMO BASE, IMO STD or IMO ALL. Displays the operator's manual, ECDIS program no. and system info. 2 3 4 5 NAVI CHARTS PLAN OTHERS 6 7 8 9 CHART ONLY STD DISP Chart priority Chart database 11 Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu. 12 Date 13 14 Time 2-4 • Displays the date. • Selects the time to use, local or UTC. • Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use local time). Shows the time, UTC or local. Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is not spinning the system is not working. Shortly after it stops spinning the buzzer sounds. Reset the power to restore normal operation. 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW How to operate the buttons on the Status bar There are two types of buttons on the Status bar: Toggle button and Drop-down list button. You operate the buttons with the trackball module. Button type Toggle button A toggle button alternately selects one of two functions assigned to a button. The background color of a toggle button is light-blue when the button’s function is enabled; gray (default color) when disabled. The [NAVI] button is an example of a toggle button. Drop-down list button A drop-down list button provides a drop-down list from which to select an option related to the label on the button. The [Chart Database] button is an example of a dropdown list button. See the right figure. A drop-down list button has a list status indicator whose position changes according to list status. List closed Operating procedure OFF (gray) Click button. ON (light-blue) Click button. List opened 2-5 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.3 InstantAccess bar The InstantAccess bar contains all the operating functions related to the selected ECDIS mode (Voyage planning, Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance). The bar is divided into two sections, upper and lower. The buttons in the upper section change according to the mode selected. The buttons in the lower section are static in all modes. A button with a triangle mark at its bottom right corner indicates a button with multiple functions. [NAVI] button activated [PLAN] button activated [CHARTS] button activated Instant Track Voyage navigation mode bar 2-6 Chart maintenance mode bar Voyage planning mode bar 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Button Description Voyage navigation mode bar Minimizes the InstantAccess bar. To restore the maximized bar, click anywhere on the minimized bar. Click arrow Click anywhere on the minimized bar Route Manual Update Mini Conning Route functions: select route, deselect route, move route to plan, monitor route. Processes AIS Safety and Navtex messages. If you have unS N read Navtex or Safety messages, the icon changes as shown right; “S” for unread Safety, “N” for unread Navtex, “S/N” for unread Safety and Navtex. Shows the menu for manual update of chart objects. Shows, hides the mini conning display. Activates or deactivates the weather overlay. Instant Track Creates a temporary track to return to or make a temporary detour from the monitored course. TCS Controls for use with specific Autopilots (see chapter 26). TCS Setting* has two buttons for selection of steering mode, Go AW and Go SEA. TCS State shows or hides the [Track Control Status] window. *Not shown with Autopilot FAP-2000. Chart maintenance mode bar Minimizes the InstantAccess bar. AUTO Load Automatically loads and installs ENC charts. Manage Charts Deletes charts; installs charts manually. Cell Status Finds cell status. License Enters license information. Public Key Shows the current public key. The public key changes each time a new one is installed. System Functions for chart synchronization. Sync Config selects the ECDIS units to synchronize. Sync Status checks synchronization status. Reconvert reconverts outdated SENC charts to the corresponding current ones. Voyage planning mode bar Minimizes the InstantAccess bar. Planning Creates routes and user charts. Report Displays route and user chart reports. Guide Box Shows or hides the guide box, which provides range and bearing measurement between waypoints when creating a route. Manage Manages routes and user charts. Route imports, exports, deletes routes. User Data Chart deletes user charts. Data Import imports routes and user charts. 2-7 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Button Common bar Chart INFO DISP Record Description Provides chart information. Chart Legend shows chart legend, in the Voyage planning and Voyage navigation modes. Viewing Dates sets Display date and Approved until dates. Chart 1 displays an overview of the ECDIS chart symbols. SET shows the [Basic Setting] dialog box, [Chart Display] menu, [Symbol Display] menu, [Chart Alert] dialog box. TWO DISP splits the screen in two, vertically or horizontally, in the Voyage navigation mode. AIO shows, hides the AIO overlay. Keyboard shows, hides the software keyboard. Displays Chart log (ENC, ARCS, C-MAP), Event log (user event, POSN event)*, NAV log (Voyage, Details, Chart Usage), Target log (Danger Target). *Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes Selects a color palette, day, dusk or night. Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor unit. MOB Inscribes the MOB (ManOverBoard) mark. Takes a screenshot. Restores the previous condition in route and user chart creation. How to operate the buttons on the InstantAccess bar The InstantAccess bar has four types of buttons: toggle button, drop-down list button, slider bar button, and specialty button. (The MOB, Capture and Undo buttons are specialty buttons that provide a single-action function.) The buttons can be operated with the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This section shows you how to operate the buttons with the InstantAccess knob. Toggle button Drop-down list button Slider bar button [Palette] button OFF (gray) ON (light-blue) Palette choices 1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar. 2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the button selected is light blue. 3. Do one of the following depending on button type. 1) Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting. 2) Drop-down list button or slider bar: Rotate the knob to select an item or adjust the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection or setting. Note 1: You can use the ESC key to go back one step in the current operating sequence. Note 2: The InstantAccess knob only adjusts the slider bar on the InstantAccess bar. 2-8 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.4 Sensor information box The sensor information box displays ship's heading, speed, course over the ground, speed over the ground and position. When the user-selected sensor fails, the system automatically selects another sensor. When this occurs, the color of the sensor name changes from green to yellow. See the table below. The digital indications and sensor names are colored according to sensor state. See the table below. • HDG: Heading and its source. • SPD: Longitudinal speed and its source. The direction of transverse speed is indicated with arrows, , Starboard, , Port. • COG: Course over ground and its source. • SOG: Speed over ground and its source. • POSN: Latitude and longitude position of own ship and its source. Note: The position source shall meet the requirements of IMO MSC.112(73). Color of nav data indications and sensor name The color of the nav data indications and sensor name change according to the state of the sensor data. The table shown below provides basic information. For detailed information, see Appendix 4. When no sensor data is received, the sensor source indication is blank. Nav data indication Color of nav data indication Color of sensor name Green White Yellow White Red Red Green, data shown with asterisks (***.*) No display Yellow Yellow State Sensor is normal. Validity of data is low or offset is applied. Validity of data is critically low. Data is not being received. Data is input manually (dead reckoning). 2-9 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.5 Own ship functions box The own ship functions box shows information about own ship, enables offset, and does TM reset. Offset button WGS84 button RNC info appears here. ENC info appears here. TM/CU status • [Offset] button: See section 18.8.1. This button is only operative in the Voyage navigation mode. • [WGS84] button: Convert position data between datum; go to selected position on the current chart. Click the button to show the dialog box below. To convert a position from one datum to another, select the datum source at the [Source] pulldown list and enter position. Select the datum to convert to at the [Converted] pull-down list then click the button. The position on the chart selected is shown below the [Converted] pull-down list. To go to a position, click a [Go To] button. • ENC info: ENC chart info appears here. No indication: ENC chart is currently displayed. "ENC data available": Currently, RNC chart is shown, but ENC chart is available. "Non-ENC data": Non-official ENC material, in yellow characters. See section 3.20. • RNC info: "RNC data" appears (in yellow) when raster chart is in use. • TM/CU status: "TM/CU Reset": True motion reset is active. (Chart is stationary and own ship moves on the chart.) "TM Reset off": When dragging the chart; true motion is OFF. To restart true motion, click the indication, "Ship off screen": Ship is out of the display area. 2-10 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.6 Route information box Asterisks appear in data locations when no route is selected for navigation. • Route: Name of monitored route • Plan Speed: Planned speed to approach "To WPT". • Plan Course: Planned course between previous WPT and "To WPT". • Course to Steer: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route, including off track, drift and gyro error compensations. • CH Limit: Planned width of channel to approach "To WPT". • Off Track: Perpendicular distance the ship is from the intended track. • TC: Track Control System status. No indication if TCS is disengaged from the ECDIS. • To WPT: The waypoint that the ship is approaching. • DIST to WOP (Wheel Over Point): Distance to the point where rudder order for course change at "To WPT" is given. • Time to Go: Time to go to WOP (hh:mm:ss). • Turn RAD: Planned turning radius at "To WPT". • Turn Rate: Calculated rate of turn that is based on current speed and planned turning radius. • Next WPT: The WPT following the "To WPT". • Next Course: Next course (in degrees). Minimize button TC: MANUAL Course to steer WOL WOL Course to steer: 110° Planned course: 90° Course to steer: 120° Planned course: 90° Current No current Current present 2-11 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box The Overlay/NAV Tools box sets up the following: • TT/AIS • Echo (radar overlay) • Parallel index lines • Range rings • Predictor (predicts ship’s future movements) • Under the keel clearance graphic • Anchor watch • Check area See chapter 13 and 14 for TT/AIS descriptions. Refer to section 16.2 for the radar overlay. 2.1.8 Page name Minimize button Page selection buttons Alert box The [Alert] box shows operational and system alert messages, with alert ID no. and alert message. See chapter 20. 2.1.9 Permanent warning box The permanent warning box displays chart-related warning messages. The box cannot be closed or minimized. 2-12 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes The EBL measures the bearing to an object, and the VRM measures the range to an object. See section 2.9. 2.1.11 Context-sensitive menus Context-sensitive menus are available at the locations shown below. Right-click the applicable area then select the appropriate item from the menu. The availability of the context-sensitive menu depends on the mode in use, as shown in the table below. Cursor info display Sensor selection Chart scale Instant Track Electronic chart area TC: TC: Route selection, route information MANUAL ROT: TT/AIS page EBL reference Item Chart scale Cursor info display Sensor selection Route selection, route information TT, AIS page Alert list, Alert log VRM reference EBL reference Electronic chart area VRM reference Functions Drop-down list of chart scales. Switch cursor displays. Select sensors. Select route; unselect route; move route to plan; show route info. Access TT, AIS functions. Open alert list, alert log. Select VRM reference; offset (heading or north). Select EBL reference; offset (heading or north). Ship offcenter; object info; radar info erase; chart legend; manual update*; divider, hide MOB, weather info** Alert list, Alert log Mode and availability NAVI CHART PLAN Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes *NAVI only **Available when weather overlay is active. 2-13 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.1.12 How to enter alphanumeric data On some screens it is necessary to enter alphanumeric data. The data can be input three ways: keyboard of the Control Unit, software keyboard or trackball. Alphanumeric data entry from the keyboard of the Control Unit 1. Click the input box. Cursor Input box example 2. Press appropriate keys and press the ENTER key. Key TAB CAPS LOCK SHIFT BS ENTER , ,, Spacebar CTRL Function Move the selection cursor. Switch between upper case and lower case alphabet. Turn caps lock on and off with the CAPS LOCK key. Erase the character left of the cursor. Terminate keyboard input; insert line feed. Move cursor in direction of arrow. Insert a space No use. Keyboard Space bar Alphanumeric data entry from the software keyboard A software keyboard is also available for entry of alphanumeric data. Do as follows to use the software keyboard. Display the keyboard before opening menus. 1. On the InstantAccess bar, press the [DISP], [ ] and [ON] buttons to show the software keyboard. The [BS], [Enter], [], [],[ ], [] and [Spacebar] on the keyboard function the same as those keys on the keyboard of the Control Unit. Space bar 2-14 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2. To switch between the alphabet keyboard and symbols keyboard, click the [!$&] key. Alphabet keyboard Symbols keyboard 3. Click the input box. 4. Click appropriate keys and finally click the [Enter] key. To erase the software keyboard, click the X button at the top right corner of the keyboard. Alphanumeric data entry with the trackball module The trackball module can also be used to enter alphanumeric data. 1. Put the cursor in the input box. Up and down arrows appear at the right side of the box. 2. Enter data by one of the methods shown below. • Spin the scrollwheel to set data. Upward to decrease the value; downward to increase the value. Note: The incrementing direction can be changed with [Wheel rotation] in the [Customize] menu of the [Settings] menu. • Click to increase the value; to decrease the value. How to enter latitude and longitude data with the trackball module The trackball module can also be used to enter latitude and longitude data. 1. Put the cursor in the input box. A selection cursor (lightblue) appears. Selection cursor 2. Enter data by spinning the scrollwheel. 3. To switch coordinate between N and S and vice versa, put the cursor at the right edge of the input box. Dual arrows appear 4. Click to switch the coordinates. The method to switch E to W and vice versa is the same. 2.2 How to Select the Operating Mode [Display Mode] button Click the [Display Mode] button at the far left side of the Status bar to select the operating mode, [ECDIS], [CONNING] or AMS (option). [ECDIS] displays electronic charts. [CONNING] display provides comprehensive navigation displays such as wind direction and rudder angle, in analog and digital formats. (Note that this button is inoperative if the conning display is fed to another monitor.) See section 22.1. [AMS] opens the Alert Management System. See Chapter 25. 2-15 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.3 How to Select the ECDIS Operating Mode The ECDIS has three operating modes: Voyage navigation, Chart maintenance, and Voyage planning. Select the mode from the Status bar with the [PLAN], [CHARTS] and [NAVI] buttons. The background of the button of the active mode is blue. For Voyage navigation For Voyage planning mode mode ECDIS For Chart maintenance mode Note 1: When switching between the Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance modes it may take several minutes to read the chart database when using C-MAP charts or there are many charts installed. Note 2: If the equipment accepts no key operation after switching to the Chart maintenance mode, reset the power. 2.4 How to Select the Chart Scale When you open a chart it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation scale. To change the chart scale, do one of the procedures shown below. The scale range is 1:1,000 to 1:70,000,000. • Click the chart scale selection buttons in the Chart scale/presentation mode box. • Right-click anywhere inside the Chart scale/presentation mode to show a dropdown list of chart scales. • Put the cursor anywhere on the chart and spin the scrollwheel. Chart scale indication Chart related message Chart scale selection buttons Note: When the radar overlay is active the chart scale is shown in nautical miles (NM). The table below lists the chart related messages and their meanings. Message Display date is not current Non-ENC data Large scale ENC available Overscale 2-16 Meaning Displayed date is not the current date. ENC non-compatible chart in use. Larger scale available at current position (TM reset ON) or cursor location (TM reset OFF). Scale too large. Remarks 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Message RNC data Larger RNC available Underscale ENC data available WGS shift undefined RM(OFF) 2.5 Meaning RNC chart in use. Larger RNC is available. Scale too small. ENC data available for current area. WGS shift is not defined. Relative motion off. Remarks ARCS only ARCS only ARCS only ARCS only ARCS only How to Select the Presentation Mode The presentation mode is available in North-up TM, North-up RM, Course-up TM, Course-up RM, Route-up RM and Head-up RM. To select a presentation mode, click the presentation mode indication to cycle through the presentation mode choices, or click the triangle to show the drop-down list of presentation modes. Click to show drop-down list of presentation mode choices Presentation mode 2-17 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.6 Cursor Position Box The Cursor position box shows • Cursor position in latitude and longitude • Time to go to the cursor position • The bearing (True or Relative) and range to the cursor position, or x-y coordinates of cursor position. Click the bearing and range or x-y coordinates indication to switch the display, in the sequence shown below. Cursor position, Time to go to cursor position Bearing(T) and range to cursor position Bearing(R) and range to cursor position x-y coordinates of cursor position 2-18 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.7 True Motion Reset In the true motion mode, the chart is stationary and own ship moves on the screen. With TM reset active, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline(s), then the chart is redrawn and own ship jumps back to an opposite position on screen based on its course. (This resetting can also be done manually by clicking the [TM/CU Reset] button.) When the TM reset function is active, "TM/CU Reset" appears at the right side of the display. TM reset borderline setting (Ring does not appear on the display.) OWN SHIP TM Reset OWN SHIP How to enable, disable automatic TM reset To enable automatic TM reset, click the [TM Reset off] indication at the right side of the display to show [TM/CU Reset]. Click When the TM reset is disabled, change the chart scale with the scrollwheel and scroll the chart by drag and drop. The own ship information box shows [TM Reset off]. When own ship moves off the screen the box shows [Ship off screen]. How to set the true motion reset borderline You can set the limit for TM reset (in percentage) on the [Basic Setting] page. See section 4.2.2. 2-19 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.8 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage Navigation and Voyage Planning Modes Click for Voyage navigation mode Functions in Voyage navigation mode Click for Voyage planning mode Functions in Voyage planning mode Click the appropriate chart mode button [PLAN] or [NAVI] at the top of the display to go to respective mode. For the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] button then click the button corresponding to the action to take. For the Voyage planning mode, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route] button to select a route, or [User Chart] button to select a user chart. Voyage navigation mode functions Voyage planning mode functions Select: Selects the route to use in the Voy- Route: Shows the [Route Plan] dialog box age navigation mode. to create or edit a route. Unselect: Deselects active route. Move to Plan: Moves active route to Voyage planning mode. Route INFO: Shows the [Route Information] dialog box. 2-20 User Chart: Shows the [User Chart] dialog box to create or edit a user chart. 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.9 How to Use the VRM and EBL The VRM measures the range to an object and the EBL measures the bearing to an object. There are two each of VRMs and EBLs. The lengths of the dashes on the EBL2 and VRM2 are longer than those of the EBL1 and VRM1 to distinguish them. The color of the VRMs and EBLs is orange. VRM1 EBL2 VRM2 EBL1 T T EBL On/Off EBL no. 240.8° VRM On/Off T EBL bearing EBL reference 2.9.1 VRM no. VRM range How to hide/show an EBL, VRM Control Unit: Push EBL or VRM key to hide or show respective marker. Trackball: Click the arrow on an EBL or VRM box to hide the respective marker. To redisplay the marker, click the minimized box. 2.9.2 How to measure the range and bearing Range: Put the cursor on the VRM then drag the cursor until the VRM is on the inner edge of the object. Bearing: Put the cursor on the EBL then drag the cursor until the EBL bisects the object. 2.9.3 How to select bearing reference The EBL bearing reference can be true or relative. Click the EBL reference indication to display T (True) or R (Relative). 2-21 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.9.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu The EBLs and VRMs have additional functions that are accessed from the contextsensitive menu. Right-click any VRM or EBL box to show the context-sensitive menu. Function Description Centered Centers the origin of the EBL and VRM on the current position. Ground Anchors the EBL and VRM to ground; neither the EBL or VRM move with ship's movement. Offset HDG Select [Offset HDG]. Drag and drop EBL, VRM on desired location. When vessel changes course, the EBL, VRM move so that the angle (D) to their centers stays fixed. Offset North Select [Offset North]. Drag and drop EBL, VRM on desired location. 2-22 The EBL, VRM move to keep the angle from North to the center of the EBL, VRM, even if the vessel changes course. The distance to the center of the EBL, VRM is fixed. 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.10 Datum 2.10.1 General Datum is a mathematical model of the earth based on which a sea chart is produced. If the datum of a position sensor and that of a sea chart are different, a transformation has to be made somewhere in the system. Not doing so can result in errors of several sea miles. The difference between two datum is never constant, but depends on position. This means that the difference between WGS-84 and local datum, generally used in paper charts, is not generally valid with electronic sea charts. 2.10.2 Paper charts Datum used in paper charts have been traditionally national datum for historical reasons. Many paper charts do not have a marked datum, therefore compatibility with electronic charts may be complicated. In some paper charts, the correction terms are printed in lieu of datum, for correction of the WGS-84 system satellite locations. The correction terms are usable but only with the paper chart in question. 2.10.3 Electronic sea charts • The ENC vector material has to be produced by a National Hydrographic Office in the WGS-84 datum. • The ARCS (raster) material includes polynomials for each chart, making it possible for the ECS system to solve the difference between the WGS-84 datum and the local datum with an accuracy sufficient for authority responsibility. In some charts, the mentioned difference is not known with sufficient accuracy, resulting in displaying a message in the Cursor position box when displayed in ARCS compatible systems. 2.10.4 Positioning devices and datum In early days of electronic positioning devices, datum received little attention because the commonly used systems utilized special charts (like Decca charts). Later on, data output was added to these systems, but still no attention was paid to datum and the position errors were considered as an inaccuracy of the system. With the spread of the GPS, however, datum has become better known. An accurate position is of no value if co-ordinates are in a wrong datum. GPS satellites utilize the WGS-84 datum. 2.10.5 ECDIS and datum The ECDIS uses ENC material, produced to standards using WGS-84 datum. Positioning devices connected to the ECDIS must work in the WGS-84 datum. IMO requires that the ECDIS must give an alert if the datum of a positioning device is not the WGS-84. 2-23 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.11 Set up Before Departure 2.11.1 Updates before departure Update chart material Update your chart material before embarking on a new voyage. See section 3.21. Display and approve dates for charts and manual updates Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Approve dates for charts as the current date. There may be features that require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in charts. Accordingly, if you have not set Display and Approve dates as the current date there is a possibility that you can get a wrong presentation or some feature may be absent. See section 5.2. Create or update user chart, Notes If necessary, create a new user chart and Notes or modify existing ones. See chapter 10. Chart alert calculation Set chart alert areas suitable for your coming voyage, on the [Check Area] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. See section 8.2. 2.11.2 Create or update a route Create a new route or modify an existing one. See chapter 9. Check your route against chart alerts Before you sail your route, you should always check your route against chart alerts. This is important because your S57 charts and manual updates may contain chart viewing dates information. You can check chart alerts from the [Check Results] page on the [Route Plan] dialog box. The following information is stored with the monitoring route plan: 2-24 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Conditions for chart alerts during route monitoring, which includes safety contour and other chart alerts, on the [Alert Parameters] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box. Route Bank Name of the user chart to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route, on the [User Chart] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box. Name of the Notes to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route, on the [User Chart] dialog box. Check in Notes column indicates Notes is used with route monitoring and planned route 2-25 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Recalculate timetable and ETA values Timetable and ETA values can be recalculated from the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box. Minimally set ETD to equal departure time, and set optimization values. Route Bank 2.11.3 How to check and prepare route to monitor Select a route for the voyage: In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] button followed by the [Select] button, or right-click the route indication in the [Route Information] box (right edge of screen) then select [Select Route]. See chapter 11. Note: A route cannot be opened if its planned settings are different from its navigation settings. The reason is given on the [Select Route] dialog box. In this case, open the route in the Voyage planning mode and click the [Check Route] button, on the [Alert Parameters] page. Adjust the route as necessary. The To WPT can be selected, however WPT 01 cannot be selected. 2-26 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Select confirm conditions of the route plan Check the setting on the [Chart Alert] dialog box; click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons to show that dialog box. Planned user chart, Notes To check what planned user chart is selected, open the [Route Information] dialog box and click the [User Chart] tab. The name of the user chart(s) to be used is in the [Linked User Chart] window. 2-27 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2.11.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors You can check the configuration of your navigation sensors in the [System Sensor Settings] page and [Local System Settings] page in the [Sensor] menu. Check speed settings ([SPD] page) Open the menu and click the [SPD] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local System Settings] page. The user can select navigation sensors for use in navigation and view their current values. SPD: Integrity: Passed SPD page, local sensor SPD: Integrity: Passed SPD page, system sensor If there is no value shown for a sensor, this means that the sensor is not valid. Note that the content of these pages depends on the sensors that are in use on the ship. The content of the display changes with sensor. Note that manual speed should only be used in an emergency, when no other speed reference is available. Remember that position sensors are also available as speed sources. 2-28 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Check position sensors (POSN page) Open the menu and click the [POSN] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local System Settings] page. The [Prim] and [Second] labels indicate the type of the position sensor. (In the figure below the [Prim] label shows FILT). [Prim] and [Second] indicate sensor status and priority. FILT LAT: 35°15.743’N LON: 139°50.064’E Integrity: Passed LAT: LON: Integrity: Not Available Second shows Integrity as “Not available” when only one position-fixing equipment is connected. Only one sensor can be Primary1 while the others are Primary2 or off position. After a sensor is turned off, its status is changed to Primary2 state. When a position sensor state is changed to Primary1 and another sensor was Primary1, the sensor formerly primary1 becomes Primary2. Select the Primary1 navigation sensor as the sensor that is considered to be most accurate and reliable. Set all other navigation sensors as Primary2. 2.11.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter To reset the odometer and/or trip meter do as follows: 1. Open the menu and select the [Voyage] menu from the [NAVI Log] menu. 2. Click one of the following buttons as appropriate. Reset Trip: Reset the trip distance (ground and water). Reset All: Reset both the odometer and the trip meter (ground and water). 3. Click the [Close] button to finish. 2-29 2. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW This page is intentionally left blank. 2-30 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS This chapter mainly shows you how to install the public keys, licenses and charts, manually update chart objects, and synchronize charts. All chart-related operations begin from the Chart maintenance mode, which you access by clicking the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar. Note 1: Charts, routes and user charts are shared with other FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 and FAR-3x00 units, via LAN. Data is shared automatically; no operation is required. Note 2: Chart processing (installation, deletion, etc.) may take several minutes depending on the number of charts to be processed. Note 3: If, when attempting to install charts, nothing appears on the display at the start of the procedure, reset the power and try again. Note 4: If installation of AVCS charts stops, the message "Chart installation has stopped. Run the installation again. Installation will continue from the chart not yet installed." appears. This does not indicate completion of the installation. Restart the installation. The installation resumes from the chart not yet installed. This message may also appear when installing CM-ENC, C-MAP Professional and C-MAP Professional+ charts if the user does not confirm completion of the installation within approx. one hour. (Installation window remains on the screen.) However, this is not an indication of failed installation. Note 5: When installing the AVCS LargeMedia, the message "No connection to dongle" may appear in the [Error/Warning Guidance] window at the completion of the installation. If this occurs, reinstall the media. 3.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts Public keys authenticate the source and integrity of the ENC chart materials used in this chart system. Before you install a new ENC chart, confirm that the corresponding public key is installed. 1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the public key. (The IHO public key is preinstalled.) 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Public Key] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [Load New Key] button to show the [Open File] dialog box. 4. Find the .pub file then click the [Open] button. The [Public Key] dialog box reappears. 3-1 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 5. Click the [Display Content] button on the [Public Key] dialog box to show the display contents. Public Key content //BIG p FCA6 82SE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF7 110E 526D B078 B05E DECB CD1E B4A2 08F3 AE16 17AE 01F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 C5E1 2ED0 8998 CD13 2ACD 50D9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3579 2E17 //BIG q FCA6 82SE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF7 110E 526D B078 B05E DECB CD1E B4A2 08F3 AE16 17AE 01F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 C5E1 2ED0 8998 CD13 2ACD 50D9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3579 2E17 6. To accept the contents, click the [Activate] button on the [Public Key] dialog box. 3.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts Install your ENC licenses and charts, in that order. 3.2.1 How to install an ENC license Automatic installation 1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the ENC license. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 3. Click the [Install Licenses] button. 4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button. 3-2 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 5. Find the license (permit.txt) then click the [OK] button to install the license. The [Licenses] dialog box then shows cell name, date of expiration, data server name and subscription type of the license. 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 6. Click the [Close] button to finish. Manual installation If you do not have the medium which has your ENC license, you can enter the license number manually. 1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box. 3. Select the type [ENC/ARCS] at the bottom of the screen. 4. Enter the license number(s) then click the [OK] button. 3.2.2 How to install ENC charts When you install charts from a medium, the system first loads a catalog, which stores certain information into your SSD such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number, from the install medium. Then, the system asks which charts you want to install from the chosen medium. After building the catalog, you can view the contents of it by clicking the [Cell Status] button. Note: Do not cancel the installation (with the [Cancel] button) while it is in progress. Cancellation automatically resets the power, stopping the installation. If the power is reset, try to install the charts again. If the installation fails, reset the power and try again. 1. Set the medium that contains the ENC charts. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the InstantAccess bar. A prompt informs you that it may take a while to do the installation and are you sure to continue. Click the [OK] button to continue. A message 3-3 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS informs you that the system is searching the medium (in the figure below the medium is a DVD) for chart data. The results of the search are displayed, an example of which is shown below. To cancel the installation, click the [Cancel] button. 3. Click the [OK] button to install the charts. The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications. To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button. To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button. 3-4 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 4. When the installation is completed, information about the installation appears in the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish. 100% 5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium and repeat steps 2-4 to install the next charts. Note 1: When many charts are installed, the ECDIS checks for error in the installed chart data at the next power up. This is not an indication of malfunction. Note 2: Previous versions of charts cannot be displayed if installed after installing the latest versions. 3.3 How to Install ARCS Licenses, Charts 3.3.1 How to install an ARCS license An ARCS license can be installed automatically or manually. The procedure which follows is for automatic installation. For manual installation, see "Manual installation" on page 3-3. Note: Do not cancel the installation (with the [Cancel] button) while it is in progress. Cancellation automatically resets the power, stopping the installation. If the power is reset, try to install the charts again. If the installation fails, reset the power and try again. 1. Insert the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the ARCS license. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 3-5 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3. Click the [Install Licenses] button. 4. Find the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button. 5. Click the [OK] button to install the license. 4937 3249 4937 1473 2376 4173 31 Mar 2015 31 Mar 2015 31 Mar 2015 31 Mar 2015 31 Mar 2015 31 Mar 2015 N N N N N N ARCS License Delete Licenses Export List 6. Click the [Close] button to finish. 3.3.2 How to install ARCS charts When you install charts from a medium, the system first loads a catalog, which stores certain information into your SSD such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number, from the install medium. Then, the system asks which charts you want to install from the chosen medium. After building the catalog, you can view the contents of it by clicking the [Cell Status] button. Note: Do not cancel the installation (with the [Cancel] button) of a chart while it is in progress. Cancellation will automatically reset the power, stopping the installation. If this occurs, try to install the chart again. If the installation fails, reset the power and try again. 1. Set the medium that contains the ARCS charts. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the InstantAccess bar. A prompt informs you that it may take a while to do the installation and are you sure to continue. Click the [OK] button. A message informs you 3-6 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS that the system is searching the medium (in the figure below the medium is a DVD) for chart data. The results of the search are displayed, an example of which is shown below. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. 3. Click the [OK] button to install the charts. The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications. To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button. To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button. 3-7 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 4. When the installation is completed, information about the installation appears in the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish. 5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium then repeat steps 2-4 to install the next charts. Note 1: When many charts are installed, the ECDIS checks for error in the installed data at the next power up. This is not an indication of malfunction. Note 2: If, after installation, no ARCS chart appears, delete all ARCS charts and then reinstall them. 3-8 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.4 How to Delete ENC, ARCS Licenses 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. 2. Click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [ENC] or [ARCS] tab as appropriate to show a list of licenses. 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 31 Sep 2015 4. Put a checkmark next to the license(s) to delete. 5. Click the [Delete Licenses] button to delete the license(s) selected. 3.5 How to Read ENC Judgment Information You can find out if your installed ENC charts are official or unofficial, with the [Producer Code] button in the [Licenses] dialog box. The following functions use this feature. • [Filter] window (see section 3.15) can show or hide official or unofficial charts. Official: Official Unofficial • .Chart judgment is shown for unofficial charts on the [Check Results] of the [Route Plan] dialog box (see section 9.3.5) if the corresponding alert check is active. 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [License] button to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 2. Click the [ENC] tab. 3. Click the [Producer Code] button. 4. Select the judgment information file then click the [Open] button. 3-9 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.6 How to Install C-MAP Charts Synchronize chart data before you install C-MAP charts, grouping the ECDIS units to synchronize, otherwise the chart data cannot be shared. See the procedure in section 3.22.1 for how to synchronize chart data. If C-MAP charts are not synchronized after installation, delete all C-MAP charts, and do the above procedure again. 3.6.1 How to register the eToken The eToken is a hardware mechanism (installed inside the PCU) used for password authentication. Registration of the eToken is required only once, before you install the C-MAP database. 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to the show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. E-mail size 1MB▼ 3. Click the [C-MAP Setup] button. 4. You are asked if you are sure to continue; click the [OK] button to continue and register the eToken. Note 1: "CMAP: No connection to eToken" disappears from the Permanent warning box after completion of the registration. Note 2: You can show your CMAP system ID by clicking the [C-MAP System ID] button on the [Licenses] dialog box for CMAP. 3.6.2 C-MAP system ID appears here. How to install the C-MAP database and licenses When you install the C-MAP database from a medium, all data is saved to the SSD. Note 1: If several ECDIS units are installed, synchronize C-MAP charts among the units after you have installed the database. Note 2: The installation of a chart cannot be cancelled while it is in progress. If you get an error message, try to install the charts again. Note 3: Disable the Chart Alert function at the [Check Area] page of the [NAV Tools] box (see section 8.2) before removing any C-MAP charts. Note 4: The C-MAP database in the units selected for synchronization are synchronized upon the successful completion of the database installation. 3-10 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS How to install the C-MAP database 1. Insert the medium that contains the C-MAP database. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the InstantAccess bar. The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indication. To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button. To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button. 3. When the installation is completed, information about the chart database installed appears in the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish. 4. If applicable, set the next sequential medium and repeat steps 2-3 to install the next databases. Note 1: If, after installation, C-MAP Pro+ charts do not appear, delete all corresponding charts and then reinstall them. 3-11 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS Note 2: Synchronization is not done for charts which could not be installed successfully. Reinstall failed charts. How to install C-MAP licenses A C-MAP license file is normally installed automatically. Manual installation is also available. Automatic installation: 1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the C-MAP license. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [Install Licenses] button. 4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button. 5. Click the [OK] button to install the license. 6. Click the [Close] button to finish. Manual installation: 1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box. 3. Select the type [C-MAP] at the bottom of the window. 4. Enter the [Database name] and [Collection name] information as shown in the table below. Enter the names exactly as shown to ensure correct installation. Database name Chart type Professional: Professional+: CM-ENC: JeppesenPRIMAR: Name to enter World Professional+ ENC JeppesenPRIMAR Collection name Enter the contracted zone number according to chart type as follows: Professional/Professional+: Enter “Zone *” (without quotations) Ex. Zone 0 CM-ENC/JeppesenPRIMAR: Enter “Zone * ENC” (without quotations) Ex. Zone 0 ENC *=Zone no. 5. Enter the license (max. 16 characters) in the bottommost window. 6. Click the [OK] button to finish. 3-12 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.6.3 How to generate, order and apply an update file How to generate and order an update file To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to generate an update file, and e-mail the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display on your chart radar. 1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. From the [E-mail Size] drop-down list, select the size of the update file. The choices are [100KB], [200KB], [300KB], [400KB], [500KB], [750KB], [1MB], [2MB], [3MB], [4MB], [10MB], [Unlimited]. This is the size of the data file in an e-mail. The file may be sent in pieces depending of the size selected. 5. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord. 6. Select the USB flash memory. 7. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory. 8. Send the order file to updates@c-map.no. Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as shown in the next section. How to apply the update file 1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. Click the [Update from File] button. 5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button. 3-13 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.7 How to Delete a C-MAP Database 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 3. Select the database to delete with the [Database] pull-down list. 4. Click the [Delete Database] button. 3.8 How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing) Charts Register the eToken if it has not already been registered. See section 3.6.1. 3.8.1 How to generate, order and apply an update file How to generate and order an update file To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to create an update file, and e-mail the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display on your ECDIS. 1. Insert a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord. 5. Select the USB flash memory. 6. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory. 7. Send the order file to updates@c-map.no. Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as shown in the next section. How to apply the update file 1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. Click the [Update from File] button. 5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button. Note: If the .ans file does not update the status of all shared C-MAP DL charts, reset the power of all Processor Units. 3-14 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.8.2 How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [C-MAP DL] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP DL. C1210011 ENC 01 Jun 2012 Unissued 3. Check [Enable Dynamic License] to enable the dynamic licensing. You now have access to all the charts contained within the selected subscription zones - both already licensed charts and new charts. Settings, indications on the Licenses dialog box for C-MAP DL • Set your annual credit limit with [Credit Limit]. A permanent warning is given if your credit goes below this value. A new chart cannot be enabled if it causes the credit to go below this value. • [Credit Rest] shows the amount of credit remaining and is updated each time you receive a confirmation answer for your request via e-mail. • [Next Report Date] is the date when the next report should be sent to Jeppesen. If charts are not reported before the mandatory report date, access to all non-reported charts is discontinued and can be resumed only after the confirmation answer allowing use of the charts is received via e-mail. • [Confirmation Date] is the date when you receive the confirmation answer for your request via e-mail. • [Confirm before open new chart], if checked, a confirmation window asks for confirmation before opening charts that require issuing a new license. A chart denied is added to the list of protected charts, so the confirmation request will not be repeated for that chart. Those charts cannot be opened until they are removed from the list of protected charts. • [Protected], if checked, shows the protected charts in the cell list. To remove a chart from protection, select it then click the [Release] button. Then, when an attempt is made to open that chart, the confirmation window appears. Note that multiple confirmation windows open when releasing multiple charts from protection. 3.9 How to Export a List of Charts Get into the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. Check the charts to add to the list. Click the [Export List] button to export the checked charts to a USB flash memory, in .txt format. 3-15 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.10 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses You can export a list of your ENC, ARCS or C-MAP (excluding C-MAP DL) licenses to a USB flash memory, in .txt format. 1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button. 3. Click the [ENC], [ARCS] or [C-MAP] tab. 4. Click the [Export List] button. 5. Change the file name at [File Name] if desired. 6. Select the USB flash memory then click the [Save] button. 7. Click the [OK] button to finish. 3.11 How to Show the ENC Permit, ARCS License 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button. 2. Click the [ENC] or [ARCS] tab as applicable. 3. Click the [ENC User Permit] or [ARCS Licenses] button as applicable to show permit or license. 4. Click the [OK] button to finish. 3.12 How to Backup, Restore Licenses You can make backup copies of your ENC, ARCS and AVCS (AIO) licenses and save them to a USB flash memory. If re-installation of the licenses becomes necessary, you can reinstall them from the USB flash memory. The backup and restore functions are not available with C-MAP charts. To backup licenses: 1. Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 3. Click the [Backup Licenses] button. 4. Select the USB flash memory then click the [OK] button to save the licenses. 3-16 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS To restore licenses: 1. Insert the USB flash memory that has the licenses into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 3. Click the [Restore Licenses] button. 4. Select the licenses from the USB flash memory then click the [OK] button. 3.13 How to View Permit Expiration Date Permits are used to control the right to use chart data in the ECDIS. A permit is connected to the edition of a chart. Permits are issued in two different types: • Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 3, 6, 9 or 12 months. • One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of the permit. The expiry date of a permit controls the loading of Base charts and their updates to the chart. The system will warn you when you are installing charts or updates that are issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a permit. If a permit has expired, it is impossible to install a chart or its update that was issued after the expiration date of the permit. The user has a right to view a chart forever, except C-MAP charts that have viewing periods which end two months after the expiry date of the license. If the charts are not updated regularly it will not complete the requirements for having up-todate charts. To view the permit status of a chart, click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar and then click the applicable "chart" tab ([ENC], [ARCS], [C-MAP] or [C-MAP DL]). The example below shows the status of ENC charts. The expiration date of each cell appears in the [Expires] window. Subscription warnings for RENC If you have at least one subscription-type permit, the system will automatically warn you about the expiration date of your subscription license, in the Permanent warning box. Note: If you change service provider for some reason, it is recommended that you remove all the charts from the ECDIS before installing new charts of new service provider. 3-17 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.14 How to Display Install/Update History You can see a history of chart installations and updates. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Record] and [Chart Log] buttons followed by the [ENC], [ARCS] or [C-MAP] button. The example below shows the install/update history for ENC charts. You can filter the log with [Period Covered (UTC)]. Enter the period to display then click the [Set Period] button. Click the [Clear Period] button to display all entries. The [Refresh] button updates the list. [Print Text] prints hard copy of the history. The [Find] button searches required text string as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. Input box Find Enter text in box and [Find] button appears. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. 3-18 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.15 Catalog of Chart Cells A catalog is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your SSD, available in a named "medium". Available charts are displayed using their limits of charts. Note that sometimes the real coverage of the charts may be considerably less than the declared limits of it. To display the catalog, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar. The [Filter] window lets you choose what to display. Check or uncheck items as appropriate. Filter window Not up-to-date 10 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 1) Chart Type ENC: Display ENC charts. ARCS: Display ARCS charts. C-MAP: Display C-MAP charts. 2) Availability Display available or unavailable charts. 3-19 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3) License Valid: Cell with valid license. Missing/Expired: Cell with missing or expired license. Valid + Missing/Expired: Display cell regardless of license. Uncheck both: Hide all cells. 4) Dynamic License Display DL or non-DL C-MAP charts. 5) C-MAP Collections A collection is a pre-defined dataset, the contents of which can be defined by zone, individual chart or any of those combinations. Applicable to C-MAP charts also. 6) Official Display official or unofficial charts. 7) Up-to-date Display charts which are or are not up to date. 8) Purpose Display chart according to its purpose - Overview, General, Coastal, AIO, Approach, Harbor, Berthing. 9) Group See the next section for how to group charts. 10) Route Show or hide chart area with route. 11) Chart boundary boxes Define the area covered by a chart and are color-coded according license and permit status. 12) Line color legend The line color legend provides information about license validity. Color Green Yellow Orange Magenta Red Blue 3-20 Message License ok, chart is up-to-date DL issued, not reported License ok, chart is not up-to-date License available, chart not installed Not available or expired Canceled chart 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.15.1 How to group chart cells You can define groups of like-format chart cells. This means you can collect related charts, for example, all cells that cover a route from Liverpool to New York or all cells available from a National Hydrographic Office. You can make a group and define charts from the [Edit Group] dialog box. How to make a new group of chart cells 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Edit] button in the [Filter] window to show the [Edit Group] dialog box. Group Name: 3. Click the [New] button. 4. In the [Outside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want to add to the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with "Select all" and "Deselect all" functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left of [Name], in either window.) 5. After you have selected the cells to add to the group, click the << button to move the names of the selected cells to the [Inside Group] window. If you want to remove a chart from the group, select it then click the >> button. 6. Click the [Save] button. 7. Enter a name for the group, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software keyboard, then click the [OK] button. 8. Click the [Close] button to finish. How to edit a group of chart cells You can edit a group of chart cells from a group as follows: 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window. 2. Click the [Edit] button. 3. At the item [Group Name], select the name of the group with the pull-down list. 4. In the [Inside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want to remove from the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with "Select all" and "Deselect all" functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left of [Name].) 5. After you have selected the charts to remove to the group, click the >> button to remove the selected charts cells from the group. 6. Click the [Save] button to finish. 3-21 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS How to delete a group of chart cells You can delete group of chart cells as follows: 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window. 2. Click the [Edit] button. 3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name]. 4. Click the [Remove] button. 5. Click the [OK] button. 6. Click the [Close] button. How to select the group to view In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window. Check [Group] then select the group to view from the pull-down list at [Group]. 3.15.2 How to view status of chart cells The [Cell Status] dialog box shows the status of the chart cells stored in the system. To show this dialog box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar. • Type: Type of chart cell, ENC, C-MAP or ARCS. • Chart Name: Chart name • Data Server: The name of the data server where the chart was downloaded from. • Edition/Issued Date: Edition no. and issued date of the chart cell. • Update: Num/Date: No. and date of the update of the chart cell. • Updated: [yes] is shown if the cell is up-to-date, [no] if the cell is not up-to-date. 3-22 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.16 How to Open Charts In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to display the dialog box shown below. Select the chart to open then click the [Open Chart] button. 3.17 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List 3.17.1 How to print the chart list 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. 2. Check the charts to print. 3. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print. 4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the message "The number of pages is 1. Do you want to continue?." appears. Click the [OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.) 3-23 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS Description of chart list printout Item Ship Name IMO Number Call Sign MMSI Printing Date Data Location Filter Status Summary 3.17.2 Description Name of ship Ship’s IMO number Ship’s call sign Ship’s MMSI number Date list printed Location of charts; normally “Internal”. Settings of the items in the [Filter] window. [yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts [no]: charts with no status/total number of charts How to print the cell status list 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Cell Status] dialog box. 2. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print. 3. Check the charts to print on the [Cell Status] dialog box. 4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the message "The number of pages is 1 Do you want to continue?." appears. Click the [OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.) Description of cell status printout Item Ship Name IMO Number Call Sign MMSI Printing Date Filter Status Summary 3-24 Description Name of ship Ship’s IMO number Ship’s call sign Ship’s MMSI number Date list printed Settings of the items in the [Filter] window. [yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts [no]: charts with no status/total number of charts 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.18 How to Delete Charts Click the [Manage Charts] button to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. Click the block to the left of the chart to remove to show a checkmark. A context-sensitive menu with "Select all" and "Deselect all" functions is available by right-clicking the block to the left of "Type". Click the [Delete Charts] button to delete the charts selected. 3.19 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts You should read the text file associated with each catalog, which you can view when installing a chart from a medium. Click the [Note] button in the [Manage Charts] dialog box. You can print a hard copy with the [Print Text] button. 3-25 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.20 How to Find the Chart Type The electronic chart system can display more than one ENC chart cell at a time. This feature is called multi-cell display. If one ENC chart cell does not cover the whole display, the system opens more ENC chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The Own ship functions box shows information about ENC chart cells displayed on the electronic chart display area. When automatic TM reset is active, the information is displayed with reference to your ship's position. If TM reset is OFF, the information is displayed with reference to current cursor position. ENC info appears here. Chart type indication No indication (Official ENC chart) “Non-ENC data” (Unofficial ENC chart, indication in yellow) “ENC data available” (Currently, RNC chart is in use, but ENC material is available. Indication shown in yellow.) 3.21 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually Manual update may include deleting an already existing object, modifying a position or other characteristics of an already existing object or inserting of a new object. In this system, manual updates are stored in a common database. Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display. If a mariner needs to make obsolete any of the official objects he “deletes” them. Then, in practice, the deleted objects are still visible, but a diagonal line on the object indicates it is a deleted object. However, a mariner can remove objects that he has inserted himself. Note that the manual updates have no automatic connection to any automatic update received later for charts. If a manual update itself became obsolete, because the official chart has been updated to include the update defined as a manual update, the mariner must himself delete the obsolete manual update in question. The system records complete usage of manual updates. All deletions, modifications and insertions are recorded and time stamped. If the mariner wishes to see what kind of manual updates he had in the past, for example, two weeks ago, he uses Update History to specify the relevant date range. For information on how to set Display date and Approved until dates, see section 5.2.3. Note: Do not manually update charts while charts are being synchronized. Wait until synchronization is completed. 3-26 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.21.1 How to insert update symbols An update symbol can be added as shown in the procedure below. Note 1: If the system freezes when updating the drawing type [area], reset the power. Note 2: An update symbol that straddles the international date line cannot be edited. In this case, insert the same symbol on each side of the line. 1. Go to the Voyage navigation mode. 2. Click the [Manual Update] button on the InstantAccess bar to open the [Manual Update] dialog box. 3. Click the [Planning] tab. 4. Click the [Add] button. Note: This window can also be shown from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Manual Update] and [Add New]. 5. Use the [Drawing Type] pull-down list to select drawing type: point, line or area. 6. Click desired object. 7. Put the cursor on the location where to insert the symbol then left click. The [Manual Update] dialog box shows: - Object - Drawing type - Display until date* * Set as desired; default setting is three months from date of entry. 8. You can add a comment related to a manual update object in the [Description] box. 3-27 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 9. To add textual information to an attribute, select the attribute from the [Attributes] window then add text in the [Edit Attribute’s Value] window. 10. Click the [Commit] button to add all selected objects to the chart. Note: A manual update object is displayed until the Display until date entered for it has passed. If the object remains on the screen after the Display Until date has passed, do some operation on the screen to refresh the screen to erase the object. 3.21.2 How to delete update symbols Manually entered update symbols cannot be deleted until the “Display Until” date arrives or is changed. However, you can mark the symbol to indicate that it can be ignored. 1. Put the cursor on the symbol then right click to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Manual Update] and [Delete]. The symbol is marked with a diagonal line. Note: A symbol can also be deleted from the [Manual Update] dialog box. Follow steps 1 and 2 in section 3.21.1, click the [List] tab, select the symbol to delete then click the [Delete] button. 3.21.3 How to modify existing update symbols The position, Display until date and description of an update symbol can be modified. A symbol that is marked as “deleted” cannot be modified. 1. Follow steps 1-2 in section 3.21.1 to display the [Manual Update] dialog box. 2. Click the [List] tab. 3. Select the object to modify then click the [Modify] button. The [Planning] dialog box appears. 4. Modify the object referring to steps 8 and 9 in section 3.21.1. 5. Click the [Commit] button. 3-28 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3.22 How to Synchronize Chart Data This section shows you how to synchronize chart data between FMD-3xx0 and FCR2xx9 units, so that all units share the same chart data. Synchronization can be done automatically or manually (see section 3.22.2), however all units selected for synchronization must be powered to complete the synchronization. Synchronization includes the following actions: • Synchronize public keys • Synchronize chart permits and licenses • Synchronize chart data • Synchronize manual updates Note 1: Before synchronizing chart data, confirm that all units selected for synchronization are powered. (Do not turn off a unit during synchronizing.) If a unit is turned off during the synchronizing, do the following on the unit which contains the medium: • Open the [Sync Status] dialog box then click the [Disable Sync] button to disable synchronization. Power all units registered for synchronization, then click the [Urge Sync] button on the [Sync Status] dialog box on the unit containing the media to forcibly synchronize. • Make a group of all the units currently powered, referring to section 3.22.1, and register the group with [Grouped with This Unit]. Reset the power on all units selected for synchronization. Note 2: C-MAP charts are not automatically synchronized. C-MAP charts are only synchronized immediately after installing or updating the C-MAP database. If the system has several FMDs, make a group of associated units before you install C-MAP charts. 3.22.1 How to select the units to synchronize Do as follows to select the units to synchronize. 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar, click [System] followed by [Sync Config] to show the [Sync Config] dialog box. [Grouped with This Unit]: This window shows the units currently selected for synchronization. [Not Synchronize with This Unit]: This windows shows the units not selected for synchronization. 3-29 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 2. To select a unit for synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s name in the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window then click the << button. That unit’s name is moved to the [Grouped with This Unit] window. To deselect a unit from synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s name in the [Grouped with This Unit] window then click the >> button. That unit’s name is moved to the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window. To deselect all units, click the [Reset All] button. 3. Click the [Save] button to finish. 4. Restart the power on applicable units to apply synchronization configuration changes. 3.22.2 How to check synchronization status You can check chart synchronization status on the [Sync Status] dialog box. Chart synchronization operations also are available from this dialog box. Normally, chart synchronization is done automatically, according to the sync settings on the [Sync Config] dialog box. Use the [Sync Status] dialog box to manually synchronize chart data when there is network failure, for example. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar, click [System] followed by [Sync Status] to show the [Sync Status] dialog box. [Current Status]: Displays current synchronization status. The table below shows all the synchronization status messages. Sync status disabled must receive must send none Meaning Synchronization is disabled. This ECDIS will receive chart data from another FMD-3xx0 or FCR-2xx9 series. This ECDIS will send chart data to another FMD-3xx0 or FCR-2xx9 series. No synchronization task ready. [Update] button: Click this button to update [Current Status]. [Enable Sync] button: Enables synchronization. You are asked, "Do you want to enable sync?" Click the [OK] button to enable synchronization. Synchronization is always enabled when ECDIS starts. A progress bar indicates progress in synchronization. The bar is erased within five minutes after completion of synchronization. [Disable Sync] button: Disables synchronization function temporarily. Use this feature to enable chart administration in case of network failure, for example. You are asked, "Do you want to disable sync?" Click the [OK] button to temporarily disable synchronization. 3-30 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS Note 1: In normal operation do not disable synchronization. If you accidentally disable synchronization, try to synchronize by clicking the [Enable Sync] button. If that does not work, reset the power of all units selected for synchronization then click the [Urge Sync] button to synchronize. Note 2: With synchronization disabled, the message "Synchronization disabled" may appear twice when installing a license. This does not affect installation of a license. [Urge Sync] button: Does immediate synchronization. You are asked, "Chart data in other units will be overwritten by this unit. Do you wish to continue?" Click the [OK] button to synchronize. If synchronization is not successful, restart applicable units and try again. [Reset Status] button: Reset synchronization status to recover from synchronization status conflict. You are asked, "Do you want to reset sync status? This unit may be synchronized from the other unit." Click the [OK] button to reset. 3.22.3 Manual updates and synchronization If you are synchronizing multiple FMD-3xx0 units while manual updating is being done on one of the units, the message “File not found” may appear, meaning the manual update data was deleted. if this occurs, follow the procedure below to synchronize the FMD-3xx0 units. The procedure uses ECD001 and ECD002 as an example. 1. At the ECD001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click [System] and [Sync Config] on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Add ECD002 to [Grouped with This Unit] then click the [Save] button. 3. Reset the power on the ECD001 and ECD002. 4. At the ECD001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [System] and [Sync Status] buttons on InstantAccess bar to show the [Sync Status] dialog box. 5. Click the [Urge Sync] button to synchronize charts between ECD001 and ECD002. 6. To confirm synchronization, do as follows: 1) At the ECD001, get into the Voyage navigation mode then click the Manual Update button on the Instant Access bar. 2) Click the [Planning] tab followed by the [Add] button. 3) Insert an object at the ECD001. 4) At the ECD002, move the cursor or change the chart scale. Confirm that the chart is updated. 3.23 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts If you unintentionally installed outdated SENC charts, you can reconvert those charts to the latest SENC charts. Get into the Chart maintenance mode, click the [System] and [Reconvert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to reconvert all your SENC charts. Note: All manual updates are removed in the reconversion. 3-31 3. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS This page is intentionally left blank. 3-32 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS This chapter provides the information necessary for controlling chart features. 4.1 How to Browse Your Charts You can view your charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools for browsing charts are the RANGE key, chart offcenter, and scroll. RANGE - and RANGE + change the chart scale. (The scrollwheel also can change the chart scale. Spin to change.) If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position of your ship with respect to the display. If true motion reset is off, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display. The system automatically chooses next larger or smaller scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at your current viewing position, the message "Larger Scale ENC Available" appears. The own ship position can be easily relocated to the screen center in the Navigation voyage and Navigation planning modes. Further, in the Navigation voyage mode, the own ship position can be put at the cursor position. To move the own ship mark to the screen center, put the cursor in the chart area and right click [Ship on center]. To move the own ship mark to a location, right-click the position on the chart where to put the own ship mark then right click [Ship off center]. ([Ship off center] is not available in the Voyage planning mode.) To scroll your chart, simply drag and drop. 4.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects The [Chart Display] menu has several pages of chart features that you may show or hide as appropriate. To display this menu, click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] menu on the InstantAccess bar. 4.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour You can set values for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour, on the [Chart Alert] dialog box (sequence: [DISP], [SET], [Chart Alert]). Colors used for depth presentation on the electronic chart are controlled by setting values for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour. Soundings on the electronic chart, which are equal to or less than the value of Safety Depth, are highlighted. See the illustrations on the next page for multi-color presentation and two-color presentation. Selection of multi- and two-color presentations can be done by selecting from the list box of "Depths" on the [Chart] page of [Basic Setting] menu. Note: The shallow contour cannot be set higher than the safety contour. 4-1 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS MULTI-COLOR presentation Chart zero Shallow contour Safety contour (input value) Safety contour (exisiting in ENC) Deep contour Non-navigable area Navigable area In the multi-color presentation four colors are used for depths. If the value entered as the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour as the safety contour. For example, the input value is 8 m, but there is no 8 m depth contour in the electronic chart. Then, the system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour (10 m) as the safety contour. The depth contour value of 10 m is used as the safety contour in the electronic chart. The shallow contour shows visual color change inside an unsafe water area. An unsafe water area is all areas shallower than the "safety contour". Set the value for the shallow contour less than the value of the safety contour. TWO-COLOR presentation Chart zero Shallow contour Safety contour (input value) Safety contour (exisiting in ENC) Deep contour Non-navigable area Navigable area In the two-color presentation, unsafe water is shown in blue and safe water is shown in white. The safety contour is used to qualify unsafe water (depth shallower than safety contour) and safe water (depths deeper than safety contour). If the value entered as the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically selects the next deeper available depth contour as the safety contour, the same as with the multi-color presentation. 4-2 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 4.2.2 Basic Setting menu To display this menu, click [DISP], [SET] and [Basic Setting] on the InstantAccess bar. Symbols: Select how to display chart symbols. The options are [Simplified] and [Paper Chart]. Simplified: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark symbols are filled in a color. Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts. Depths: Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display. Boundaries: Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. The options are [Plain] and [Symbolized]. Plain: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed lines. Symbolized: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a line. Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts. Depths: Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display. The choices are [Two Color] or [Multi Color]. Two Color uses only two colors, deeper than safety contour and shallower than safety contour. Multi Color uses four different colors for contours: (1) Deeper than user-chosen deep contour, (2) Between deep contour and user-chosen safety contour, (3) Between safety contour and user-chosen shallow water contour, and (4) Between shallow water contour and coastline. Light Sectors: Set how to display light sectors. The options are [Limited] and[ Full]. Limited: The length of a light sector is fixed at 25 mm independently of the displayed scale. Full: The length of a light sector represents its nominal range as defined by the chart producer. Light Popup: Show or hide light sectors information. [ON] provides light sector information (including length of arc of visibility) when the cursor is put on a light or light sector. Light sector center Light house info Shallow Pattern: Set how to display shallow water area. The options are: [None] and [Diamond]. None: Shallow water areas are not shown. Diamond: Provided to distinguish shallow water at night. 4-3 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS Shallow Hazard: Show or hide the shallow hazard symbols ( ). TM Reset: In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline (set here), and then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen based on its course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage). For example, “80” resets the position when the own ship marker is at a location which is 80% of the range. 4.2.3 Chart Display menu To access this menu and its pages, click [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] on the InstantAccess bar then open the [Standard], [Other] or [AIO] page as appropriate. The [Standard] page contains chart features defined by IMO that comprise a standard display. You can recall the standard display at any time in a single action; click the [STD DISP] button on the Status bar to get the standard display. The [Other] page contains chart features for which you can control visibility and that are not part of IMO-defined standard display. The [AIO] page controls what to display on the Admiralty Information Overlay. AIO Note: To use the Info request feature, which provides information for cursor-chosen chart feature, the associated chart feature must be turned on from the [Standard], [Other] or [AIO] page. 4-4 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 4.2.4 Display base A subset of chart features is called the “display base”. As required by IMO, these features cannot be made invisible. To get the display base, uncheck all items on the [Standard] and [Other] pages in the [Chart Display] menu. The display base consists of the following chart features: • Coastline (high water) • Own ship's safety contour, which is chosen by the user • Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour that lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour • Indication of isolated dangers that lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges, overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation. • Traffic routine systems • Scale, range, orientation and display mode • Units of depth and height 4.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features Control of symbols and features is divided into five pages in the [Symbol Display] menu, which you can access by clicking the [DISP], [SET] and [Symb DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. [General] page: Controls own ship and target related items. [Tracking] page: Controls past tracks and some other features. [Route] page: Controls planned and monitored route. [Mariner] page: Controls user charts. [Targets] page: Controls TT and AIS targets. The user can define settings for chart details that are displayed over the chart area. 4.3.1 General page Ship, AIS Outlines Ship Outlines: Select OFF or ON to show minimized or scaled symbol, respectively. AIS Outlines: Select OFF or ON to show AIS targets in same size or scaled symbol, respectively. 4-5 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS True outlines shown if: If the length or width of the own ship mark is greater than 6 mm, the own ship mark is shown with the true scale symbol. Select [Length] or [Width]. The right illustration in the figure below shows own ship mark and AIS targets with scaled symbols. The left illustrations shows own ship mark and AIS targets with point symbols. AIS targets are displayed as true scale symbol if the displayed chart scale is larger than set with "Outlines" limit (length>7.5 mm) on the [General] page in the [Symbol Display] menu and your own ship are displayed as true symbol scale if the size of the true scale symbol is larger than 6 mm on the chart display. Velocity Vectors Ship Vectors: Show or hide own ship vector. Target Vectors: Show or hide target vectors. Style: Select the vector style. The [std ECDIS] vector is a speed-referenced vector symbol. [Conventional] is a simplified symbol. Time Increments: Check to show ticks of velocity vector. This controls both own ship and targets ticks. If ticks are too tightly spaced, they will be automatically removed from the display, until spacing between ticks is sufficient to distinguish them separately. This depends on display scale and speed of vessel and target. Path Predictor: Check to show the path predictor. The path predictor is a single dashed line originating at the CCRP and drawn at a length to represent the distance and path own ship will travel over the ground in the user-selected time interval for own ship speed vector. Radar Antenna: Check to mark position of radar antenna (with "x”). 4-6 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 4.3.2 Tracking page Own ship past tracks CCRP: Check to plot own ship’s track with CCRP position as reference. Primary: Check to plot own ship's track with position fed from sensor with highest priority. Secondary: Check to plot own ship's track with position fed from sensor with 2nd highest priority. Pivot: Check to plot own ship's track with own ship’s pivot position as reference. Style: Select time stamp position for past track (indicated by Tick or Point). Length: Select length of past track. Labels: Select label interval. Events Events marks are based on the [Voyage] log records. User Events: Display event symbols on the chart. User events are recorded by clicking [Record], [Event Log] and [User Event] on the InstantAccess bar. Auto Events: Display automatically entered event symbols, where the system has recorded an event based on conditions you have set. Positions: Display the latitude and longitude of an event, recorded by clicking [Record], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] on the InstantAccess bar. Note 1: A MOB event is visible always. Note 2: You can choose the period of time to display events, from the [Show] list box. [Newer than 12 hours], [Newer than 24 hours], [Newer than 1 week], [Newer than 2 weeks], [Newer than 1 month], [Newer than 3 months], or [All]. 4-7 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 4.3.3 Route page The [Route] page selects the route parts of the monitored and planned routes to show on the ECDIS. Channel Limit: The distance from the centerline to one side of the nav lane. Safety Margin: The distance from one side of the channel limit to the safety margin distance. Leg Mark: Indications of waypoint no. and range and bearing to next waypoint. (True: Reference to North; Relative: Reference to heading) Wheel Over Line: The location where the ship turns toward new course. WPT1 124.8° 0.8NM Safety margin Channel limit Wheel over line WPT2 87.9° 1.2NM 4.3.4 WPT3 Leg mark Mariner page User chart Labels: Check to show labels on user charts. Lines: Check to show lines on user charts. Clearing Lines: Check to show clearing lines (for marking dangerous areas) on user charts. 4-8 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS Tidals: Check to show tidal symbols and tidal data on user charts. Areas: Check to show areas on the user charts. Circles: Check to show circles on user charts. Density: Set the degree of transparency for the user chart objects. Color fill for the areas can be chosen as transparent from 0%, 25%, 50% or 75%. Select [0%] to show only boundary lines. NAVTEX: Check to put the Navtex symbol ( ) at the position of the ship from which you have received a Navtex message. (Navtex receiver must be enabled during installation.) 4.3.5 Targets page Color: Select color of target (TT and AIS, common) from the list box. TT Size: Select symbol size for tracked targets, Standard or Small. AIS ROT TAG Limit: Show target turning direction. TT Label: Show or hide the TT label (target no.). AIS Label: Show or hide the AIS label (ship’s name). TT Pop-up INFO: Show or hide the TT pop-up, which is shown by right-clicking a TT. AIS Pop-up INFO: Show or hide the AIS pop-up, which is shown by right-clicking an AIS target. TT(04) COG: 235.0°T SOG: 6.1kn CPA: 0.23NM TCPA: -10:18 NAME VOYA... COG: 324.0°T SOG: 8.1kn CPA: 0.12NM TCPA: -19:18 TT pop-up info AIS pop-up info Past position TT Points: Select the number of TT past position points to display. AIS Points: Select the number of AIS past position points to display. Style: Select style of presentation of target's past position. 4-9 4. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 4.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Settings There are three sets of predefined chart display settings that can be used to display charts with certain chart features. The predefined chart display settings are • IMO BASE • IMO STD(STANDARD) • IMO ALL You can change the chart display setting in use with the [Chart database] button on the Status bar. [Chart database] button 4-10 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as a vector chart. Vectorcoded charts are coded using a variety of techniques. One technique is called S57ed3 and it has been chosen by IMO as the only alternative for SOLAS compliant electronic charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a government-authorized Hydrographic Office, then it is called "ENC". You can read more about ENC and related legal issues in this chapter. Hereafter, all references to vector chart material are referred to as "S57 charts" regardless of their source. Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your S57 charts. This is called "manual updates". Also, manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales from the same area. 5.1 Introduction to S57 Charts An ENC chart is encrypted to prevent unauthorized use so the user needs a permit to view the ENC. This permit could be entered manually from the Control Unit, loaded from a USB flash memory. Any new ENC must be loaded into the system. Some parts of the charts may be date dependent, i.e., they are visible after a set date or they are visible only for a limited period, etc. In the electronic chart system, you control all date-dependent objects with Display date and Approved until dates. In the paper chart world, the Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mariners represent the date dependency described above for S57 charts. An important part of ENCs are the updates. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds of updates: 1. Incremental updates, which are small additions to original base cells. 2. Reissues and new editions, which are complete replacements of previous base cells and their updates. All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. You control usage of updates in the electronic chart system from Display date and Approved until dates. Using Display date and Approved until dates, you can view your charts correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future. Chart material is stored in media such as DVD ROM, CD ROMs and USB flash memory or electronically through from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could have arrived in DVD ROMs, CD ROMs or USB memories. Such material can contain only basic cells, cells and updates or only updates. The electronic chart system contains as standard the software required to access a medium. Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures, besides the chart itself. Typically additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important sailing directions, tidal tables and other traditional paper chart features that do not have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. This system copies these textual descriptions and pictures into its SSD so the user may cursor-pick them for viewing purposes. 5-1 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.1.1 5.1.2 Definitions of terms Cell A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data and it is the smallest division of ENC data. Each cell has a separate unique name. Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish. S57 chart A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with this system without any authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Office. ENC A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with this system on the authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Offices. The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing directions) that may be considered necessary for safe navigation. The name of the coding standard for ENC is S57ed3. SENC A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by the system for appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by the system for display and other navigational functions. The SENC may also contain information from other sources. Chart legend for S57 charts The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find info for current position, turn on TM reset, then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button, in the Voyage planning mode or Voyage navigation mode. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. The figure below shows the Chart Legend display for a specific location. Click the Close button to close the display. This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is called the multi-chart display. If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts displayed on the electronic chart display area. Name: Name of chart. Source: Source of chart. Edition: Edition number of the chart. Edition Date: Date the edition was published. Update Number: Update number 5-2 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS Update Date: Date of update Compilation Scale: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here. Projection: Projection of current chart. Horizontal Datum: Horizontal datum used with current chart. Sounding Datum: Datum used to create sounding data. Vertical Datum: Vertical datum used with current chart. Units of Depth: Unit of depth used with current chart. Units of Height: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea level. Magnetic Variation: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction. Quality Indication: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer. 5.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts Permanent warnings help you keep the S57 charts up-to-date and these are shown at the bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date. Message Meaning, Remedy Display date is not current Display date is not the current date. Set Display date and Approved until date to the current date. ENC: permits have expired You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. ENC: Product list not up to date The product list is not up to date. Appears 30 days after the issued date of the chart. Get the latest chart. ENC: AIO product list not up to date The AIO data is not up to date. Appears 30 days after the issued date of the AIO data. Get the latest AIO data. No connection to dongle The dongle is not inserted or not recognized. Check that the dongle is inserted to the EC-3000. Not up to date (SSE 27): XXXXXXXX (Chart name appears at location of Xs.) At least one chart is not up to date. Load updated material. Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX (Chart name appears at location of Xs.) You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. For charts that have been loaded from sources other than an RENC, the system is unable to know the exact up-to-date situation. 5-3 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the S57 Chart 5.2.1 Introduction S57 charts contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues, new editions and updates, creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date dependency, some features of the S57 charts create additional date dependency. These features include "Date Start", "Date End", "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal date end". Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners, as their paper chart equivalent updates are called. "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal date end" are used for seasonal chart features such as summer-only sea marks, seasonal yacht race areas, etc. You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency in order to use the valid data for any given date applicable for your navigation or planning purposes. For example, you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before they became valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart upto-date and valid for your intended use. Normally you should set Display date and Approved until once per week to keep your chart up-to-date. 5.2.2 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates Before you approve updates, you can display (highlight) updates that are included into S57 charts. Normally you have selected for automatic after the SENC conversion. In this case, after all the SENC conversions have been finished, all updates are automatically highlighted and you can view and approve them after viewing. See the next section for how to set Display date and Approved until dates. If you want to review updates after the initial approval of the updates do the following: 1. Use [Approved until] to set the begin date for the update highlight. See the next section. 2. Use [Display date] to set the end date for the update highlight. See the next section. 3. Review the changes. Added features are highlighted with orange circles. Removed features are highlighted with orange slashes. Changed features are highlighted with both orange circles and slashes. 4. After reviewing, set [Approved until] and [Display date] back to the current system date. 5-4 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.2.3 How to set Display date and Approved until dates Click the [Chart INFO] and [Viewing Dates] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Viewing Date] dialog box. Set desired dates then click the [Close] button. 5.2.4 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard How the issue date of updates changes the visibility of the changes Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date. Update 3 Update 2 Update 1 Base cell 1 2 3 4 Date The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Display/Approved date settings by user. Actions 1 to 4 areas as follows: 1. Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display date is set as current date of the system. Approve date has to be set to current date. 2. The date in which update 1 was issued. Display and Approved dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1. 3. The date in which update 2 was issued. Display and Approved dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1 and update 2. 4. The date in which update 3 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3. Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning, always use planned date of each waypoint to check your plan. 5-5 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO Chart 1, which is included in this system. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your selections. See section 4.2. 1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show to the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu, shown below. 2. Click a chart feature to show detailed information about the feature. Click [Overview] to show a compilation of all features, shown below. ECDIS Chart 1 menu 5.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features The system uses the official IHO presentation library to draw S57 charts. When this manual was published the official presentation library was "pslb03_4.dai", known as "Official IHO presentation library for system Ed 3 revision 1, Edition: 3.4". 5.4 How to Find Information about S57 Chart Objects The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an important function of the system. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the interface panel all the information available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and barely intelligible attribute information. 5-6 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 1. Get into the Voyage navigation mode or Voyage planning mode then rIght-click an object to show the context-sensitive menu. (The menu shown below appears in the Voyage navigation mode.) Ship off center Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update New Divider 2. Click [Object INFO] to show the [Select Object] dialog box. 3. Click the object for which you want to know its details then click the [OK] button. Note: If another window is active, the preview window may be partially obscured by that window. Move the window to display the entire preview. 4. To print the chart object information, click the [Print Text] button. Below is a sample chart object printout. 5-7 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) The Admiralty Information Overlay includes all Admiralty Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners (T&P NMs) and provides additional navigationally significant information from UKHO's ENC validation programme. The AIO is displayed as a single layer on top of the basic ENC and is available free of charge as part of the Admiralty S57 Chart Service and within Admiralty Value Added Resellers' services. The AIO has been developed to ensure mariners can simply view the information they need - in addition to the standard chart - to navigate safely and compliantly. By clearly showing where important Temporary or Preliminary changes may impact a voyage, the Admiralty Information Overlay will give seafarers the same consistent picture of the maritime environment on their charts as they have always had. The AIO license is free of charge for AVCS license holders. 5.5.1 Installation Installation is the same as that for the ENC chart. See section 3.2. 5.5.2 How to display the AIO Click the [DISP], [AIO] and [ALL] buttons to show the AIO. To hide the AIO, click the [DISP], [AIO] and [OFF] buttons. The area(s) that contain temporary or preliminary changes are marked with a hatched red rectangle. 5-8 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells A catalog of AIO cells is maintained in the [Manage Charts] dialog box. To show this box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar. The AIO cell is GB800001. yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 5-9 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information Do the following to find chart object information contained in the AIO. 1. Right click a red hatched area in the chart area, then select [Object INFO] to show the [Select Object] dialog box. 2. Click [Preliminary Notice] in the dialog box to show the [Chart object] dialog box. The [Chart object] dialog box shows the following information: • Cell (name) • Drawing type (Preliminary Notice, Temporary Notice) • Category (AIO) • The preview box provides a scaled-down image of the area selected. Click the image to enlarge it. • The [Attribute] window shows the attributes for the AIO area selected. To find information about an attribute, click it to show its information in the [Description] box. Information: Description of area (for example, danger area). Object name: Object name (number) Pictorial representation: Associated diagram when applicable. ENC affected: ENC affected by the NM Textual description: Full text of the Notice to Mariners (NM) appears below [ENC Affected]. To print the chart object information, click the [Print Text] button. 5-10 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 5.5.5 How to select the information to display Select what type of notices to display as follows: 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [AIO] tab. 3. Check or uncheck items as appropriate. 4. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the menu. 5-11 5. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS This page is intentionally left blank. 5-12 6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS 6.1 ARCS Charts Approximately 2,700 ARCS charts are available on 11 chart CD-ROMs, covering the world's major trading routes and ports. Regionally based chart CD-ROMs RC1 to RC10 contain standard BA navigation charts, while RC11 contains ocean charts at scales of 1:3,500,000 and smaller. ARCS charts are facsimile copies of BA paper charts, and as such share a common numbering system. New editions and new charts for ARCS and BA paper charts are issued simultaneously. They are supplied on each Weekly Update CD-ROM until incorporated into the chart CD-ROMs at the next issue. Occasionally, it is necessary to issue new charts in advance of their intended date of validity, for example a change in regulations commencing on a future date. In such cases the current chart will co-exist with the new chart until the date of implementation, the earlier chart having the suffix "X" after the chart number. The system will allow access to both charts for the period of overlap by issue of new chart permits. Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your ARCS charts. In this system this is called Manual Updates. Manual updates are valid for both ARCS and S57 charts so that you need to define them only once. Further, manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales from the same area. 6.1.1 Chart legend of ARCS chart The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find info for current position, turn on RM reset, then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button, in the Voyage planing mode or Voyage navigation mode. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. Click the Close button to close the display. Chart Legend Name: Name of the chart. Title: Title of the chart. Source: Source of the chart. Edition Date: Date when the chart was issued. Update Date: Issue date of Update CD-ROM used to update the system Latest NM: Date of the latest Notice to Mariners included in the chart. Compilation Scale: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here. 6-1 6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS Projection: Projection of current chart. Horizontal Datum: Horizontal datum used with current chart. WGS 84 Shift: Datum shift between local datum and WGS-84 datum is known (=Defined), unknown, operator defined (=Undefined) or shift is known only some parts of chart (=Partially defined). Sounding Datum: Datum used to create sounding data. Height Datum: Vertical datum for objects located above sea. Units of Depth: Unit of depth used with current chart. Units of Height: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea level. [T&P Notice], [Details] and [Warnings] buttons: See the descriptions below. T&P notice T&P Notices are also known as Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners and they provide chart information that does not warrant permanent chart correction. To show the T&P Notices, click the [T&P Notice] button on the [Chart Legend] dialog box. Details Click the [Details] button on the [Chart Legend] dialog box to show detailed information about current chart. Panels: Selects desired inset (Panel) from the combo box. This works in conjunction with [Notes]. Notes: Select desired Notes from drop-down list then click the [Show Notes] button to display the Notes. 6-2 6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS Warnings There could be warnings not included in Notices to Mariners. British Admiralty may release textual warnings for any chart and they are available here. Click the [Warnings] button to display the [Warnings] window. How to set preference for inset (panel) If there are the different insets with the same position, the operator can select preferred inset, which displays your ship's position. 1. In the Voyage navigation mode or the Voyage planning mode, put the cursor at the desired location in the chart area, then right click to select [Chart Legend] to show the [Chart Legend] dialog box. If the own ship mark is at the screen center, the Chart Legend dialog box may be displayed by clicking [Chart INFO] and [Chart Legend] on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Details] button. 3. Select desired inset from the [Panels] drop-down list. 6-3 6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS How to display notes of ARCS chart The operator can select a desired item from the combo box in the [ARCS Details] dialog box in order to view notes for that item. Select an item on the [Notes] combo box then click the [Show Notes] button to show the notes for the selected item. Source Data Diagram (SDD) A Source Data Diagram (SDD) consists of two parts: a graphic showing the areas covered by each type of source material from which the chart was compiled, and a tabulation, keyed to a graphic, giving details of source dates and scales. The layout of the graphic corresponds to the layout of the chart, and the borders of the diagram equate to the limits of the chart panels. You can show the SDD by selecting [Source] from the [Notes] drop-down list and clicking the [Show Notes] button. 6-4 6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS 6.2 Datum and ARCS Charts The difference between ARCS chart local datum and WGS 84 datum is known as WGS 84 shift. This difference is known and the system does the conversion automatically. If the WGS shift for a chart is defined, the amount of shift is indicated. If the WGS shift is not defined, "Undefined" is displayed. For no WGS shift, the indication 0.00’N, 0.00’E appears. To find the WGS shift of the current chart, in the Voyage navigation or Voyage planning mode. right click the desired area on the chart to show the [Chart Legend] dialog box. WGS 84 shift indication (0.00’N, 0.00’E means no shift) 6.3 Permanent Warnings of ARCS The system can help you to keep your ARCS charts up-to-date for the charts that you have received from ARCS. Producers of ARCS charts store up-to-date status on an ARCS Weekly Update CD-ROM (system files). This information is loaded into the ECDIS when you update, either by permits or by active group. Based on this information, ARCS permanent messages are displayed to help you keep your ARCS charts up-todate. Message Meaning, Remedy ARCS: permits have expired You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. ARCS: Product list not up to date The product list is not up to date. Update the product list. No connection to dongle Dongle not inserted. Insert dongle. 6-5 6. RASTER (ARCS) CHARTS 6.4 ARCS Subscriptions ARCS customers can subscribe to one of two service levels, ARCS Navigator or ARCS Skipper. Note: If you receive an ARCS chart permit on a floppy disk, copy the contents of the disk to a USB flash memory and then install the permit files. 6.4.1 ARCS Navigator ARCS Navigator operators receive a comprehensive weekly updating service on a CD-ROM that mirrors the Admiralty Notices to Mariners (NMs) used to correct Admiralty paper charts. The update information is cumulative, ensuring that only the most recent Update CD-ROM is necessary. ARCS Navigator license is valid for 12 months. During this period, weekly updates will be delivered on Weekly Update CD-ROMs. ARCS Navigator is intended for SOLAS class operators who require that their charts are up-to-date. Content of ARCS Navigator pack: • One (1) or more Chart CD-ROMs (RC1-RC11) containing ARCS charts • One (1) Update CD-ROM containing the latest ARCS chart corrections 6.4.2 ARCS license information Licensee information, which is transferred between participants, is as shown below. Manufacturer Dongle+User permit+PIN (Personal Identification No.) Chart Permit+Chart CD+Update CD User Chart agent User Permit+PIN+List of Charts 6-6 7. C-MAP CHARTS The descriptions in this chapter apply to the CM-93/3 charts. (This system does not support CM-93/2 charts.) 7.1 C-MAP Cartographic Service Your chart system has the capability of using and displaying the latest C-MAP worldwide vector chart database. These charts are fully compliant with the latest IHO S-57 3.1 specifications. In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MAP database, there are a number of things that must be done. 7.2 How to Register the System at C-MAP Norway Your system has the capability to use the C-MAP database. To do so an Aladdin eToken (supplied by C-MAP) must be connected to the system. The eToken provides the system with a unique System ID that enables C-MAP to issue correct licenses. The actual System ID can be found on the eToken itself, on the installation medium or on a sticker placed on the equipment. This ID must be provided on all chart orders, by email (license@C-MAP.no). 7.3 How to Order Charts A chart order may be sent together with system registration as described above. It is essential that the required information be sent to C-MAP when ordering charts for a system. C-MAP issues order forms specifying the information that is required, and contains vital information that will allows C-MAP to monitor and maintain your licenses throughout the lifetime of the system. Charts can be ordered by Zone, Area or Cell and these can be seen on the C-MAP web site or by downloading the Chart Product catalog also available on the web site. Price quotations can be obtained via your chart dealer or direct from your local C-MAP office. Once the license order has been prepared it should be emailed to license@C-MAP.no. 7.4 How to Apply for Licenses Once the order has been received at C-MAP, a license will be generated and transmitted back to the operator. This may be in the form of a single alphanumerical string (16 characters), or in the form of a file called PASSWORD.USR. Once this license has been received it should be input using the License Administrator software designed and supplied by the chart manufacturer. There are two types of licenses, purchase and subscription. Purchase licenses are valid indefinitely while subscription licenses need to be renewed every 12 months from the start of the subscription. Failure to renew a subscription will result in the charts becoming unavailable. 7-1 7. C-MAP CHARTS 7.5 Troubleshooting If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the following before contacting C-MAP: • Check that the charts are available, with the chart management function. • Check that the license is correctly installed, with the license function Contact Information: For information or help please call you're nearest C-MAP Office (details can be found on the reverse side of the C-MAP chart CO box) or contact CMAP Norway. E-mail: technical@C-MAP.no 7.6 Chart Subscription Services 7.6.1 C-MAP Dynamic Licensing (DL) service The C-MAP DL service is an ENC service available on DVD or online, in C-MAP SENC format. The C-MAP DL ensures immediate access to ENC licenses whenever they are needed. ENC licenses available in seconds automatically via online C-MAP service providers. Cost is controlled via pre-set budgets and spending limits, giving shipowners a true "pay-as-you-go" service. For further details about C-MAP DL, contact a CMAP provider. Note 1: CM-ENC is available. If you change CD-ROM service to DVD service, you need to also have a new license for the DVD service. Contact your chart agent or CMAP for details. Note 2: PC and internet connection with e-mail are required. Further it is necessary to access Jeppesen approx. once every two weeks. 7.6.2 What is ENC delivery? ENCs can be distributed as ENC delivery or SENC delivery. Both deliveries can be used in this system. In ENC delivery, charts are distributed directly from source like PRIMAR, IC-ENC, JHA, etc. They are delivered onboard in ENC format (using S-57 and S-63) then the charts are installed into the system. In SENC delivery, charts are converted from ENC to SENC before delivery to onboard and then installed into the system. A CM-ENC delivery is SENC delivery. Important notices • If you are using both services (ENC and SENC deliveries) having the same chart name installed into the system through both deliveries, priority of displaying the chart is in ENC delivery. • Chart updates for ENC delivery are only for charts of ENC delivery and chart updates for SENC delivery is only for charts of SENC delivery. You have to keep charts up-to-date separately. • If you change from ENC delivery to SENC delivery, remove old charts from the system before installing charts from new delivery. 7-2 7. C-MAP CHARTS 7.7 Chart Display 7.7.1 Introduction C-MAP charts are S57 charts displayed together with ENC (S57) and CM93/3 charts. These charts have the priority order shown below. 1. CM- ENC 2. C-MAP 93/3 Prof and C-MAP 93/3 Prof+ If the same navigational purpose charts are available over an area, priority is as shown above. Areas where ENC is not available CM-ENC charts are shown. Where C-MAP Prof or CM93 Prof+ are available, CM 93/3 charts are displayed. The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find info for current position, click the [TM/CU Reset] button then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. Click the Close button to close the display. This system is capable of showing more than one chart at a time. This feature is called the multi-chart display. If one chart does not cover the whole display, the system will open more chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about charts displayed on the electronic chart display area. Chart Legend Name: Name of chart. Source: Source of chart. Edition: Edition number of the chart. Edition Date: Date the edition was published. Update Number: Update number Update Date: Date of update Compilation Scale: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here. Projection: Projection of current chart. Horizontal Datum: Horizontal datum used with current chart. Sounding Datum: Datum used to create sounding data. Vertical Datum: Vertical datum used with current chart. Units of Depth: Unit of depth used with current chart. Units of Height: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea level. 7-3 7. C-MAP CHARTS Magnetic Variation: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction. Quality Indication: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer. 7.8 Permanent Warnings Permanent warnings help you keep the C-MAP up-to-date and these are shown at the bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date. Message CMAP: Database not up to date Meaning, Remedy Database is not up to date. Update the data base. CMAP: Dynamic license reporting overdue The time for the “Next Report Date” has passed. This occurs once every 12 hours if the condition continues. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button. Click the [C-MAP] tab then the [Order Update File] button. 7-4 CMAP: Dynamic licensing credit limit You have exceeded the allotted credit limit. Raise credit limit. CMAP: No connection to eToken eToken is not connected (inside the Processor Unit). CMAP: permits have expired You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. No connection to dongle The dongle is not inserted or not recognized. Check that the dongle is inserted to the EC-3000. Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX (Chart name replaces Xs.) You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. 8. CHART ALERTS The ECDIS can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or detect an area where a specified condition exists. If prediction of own ship movement goes across a safety contour or an area where a specified condition exists, the system does the following: • Highlights in red alarms and chart objects specified as alarm or warning category (planned route, navigation route). • Shows alarms and chart objects specified as alarm, warning or caution category in the [Alert] box (route navigation). • Sounds an aural alarm for alarms and chart objects specified as alarm or warning category (route navigation). Chart object set for Alarm or Warning category is highlighted in red. For this function, the ECDIS utilizes the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the SSD in SENC format. Note that the ECDIS calculates dangerous areas using the largest scale chart available, which may not be the visualized chart. You can choose objects that are included for calculation of danger area (for example, restricted areas). A dialog box lists the various areas that activate danger warnings. You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. The system can utilize these areas when calculating chart alerts. The ECDIS can check the following for you: • Predicted movement area of own ship • Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas The ECDIS will highlight the following for you • Dangerous areas inside predicted movement area of the own ship • Dangerous areas inside your monitored route • Dangerous areas inside your planned route 8-1 8. CHART ALERTS 8.1 Chart Alerts Official S57 chart material contains depth contours that can be used for calculation of chart alerts. A chart database also includes different types of objects that the operator can use for chart alerts. The procedure for setting chart alerts is outlined below. 1. Choose suitable safety contour for your own ship. See the next section for how to set the safety contour. 2. In the Voyage planning mode, define a new route or choose an existing one. Make a chart alert calculation of the route if there are indications of danger areas in the route. Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alert calculation again. To modify an existing route see section 9.4. 3. Choose route as monitored route. 4. Set check area for your own ship. The system is now ready for chart alert calculation of monitored route and estimated own ship position. 8.1.1 How to set safety contour Select safety contour suitable for the own ship. 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Chart Alert] page. 2. Enter desired depth at [Safety Contour] then click the [Save] button. A depth contour is created on the chart according to the safety contour value entered. Note: If the chart does not contain chosen depth contour, the system will automatically choose next deeper contour. 8-2 8. CHART ALERTS 8.1.2 How to select objects used in chart alerts You can also include calculation areas that have to be noted when sailing (for example, restricted areas). To include these areas in chart alerts, do the following: 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Chart Alert] page. 2. Click a circle to select the type of alert to receive for the given chart object. [Safety Contours] is fixed to “red”. Orange: Visual and aural alerts Yellow: Visual alert only In the example above, [Safety Contour] provides an [Alarm], [Areas to be Avoided] provides a [Caution] and all other items are set for [Warning]. 3. Click the [Save] button to finish. Note: C-MAP Pro+ charts may take several minutes to identify danger areas. List of areas There are the areas that the ECDIS detects and provides the audible alert and/or visual alert if estimated own ship position or planned or monitored route crosses the area defined on the [Chart Alert] page. You can choose from the following areas: • • • • • • Safety Contour Areas to be Avoided User Chart Danger Traffic Separation Zone Inshore Traffic Zone Restricted Area • • • • • • Caution Area Offshore Production Area Military Practice Area Seaplane Landing Area Submarine Transit Lane Anchorage Area • • • • • • • Marine Farm/Aqua Culture PSSA Area Non-official ENC No Vector Chart Not Up-to-date Permit Expired UKC Limit 8-3 8. CHART ALERTS 8.2 How to Activate Own Ship Check Calculation of own ship predicted movement area is done using a check area about own ship position. Set the check area as follows: 1. Select the [Check Area] page from the [Overlay/ NAV Tools] box. Note: The [ON] button may not be shown depending on installation setting. 2. Set the ahead time or distance and ahead width, referring to the figure below. Also, set the "Around" figures: port, starboard, bow and stern check distance. The reference point is the conning position (CCRP). Width Ahead Distance Bow Stern Port Starboard 3. To select the objects to use in chart alerts, click the [Chart Alert] button and see section 8.1.2. 4. To show or hide the chart alert area figure, click the [Chart Alert] button to show [ON] or [OFF]. Any Alarm or Warning chart object in the chart area is highlighted in red. Chart objects assigned Alarm status additionally give the aural alarm. 5. Click the [Apply] button to affect changes. Note: When the button to the right of the [Chart Alert] button is not displayed, this means that the own ship check is active always. When an object having a Warning setting enters the Check Area, the object is highlighted in red and the aural alarm sounds. 8-4 8. CHART ALERTS Object selected for Chart Alert Highlight (red) 8.3 Chart alert area Route Planning The system will calculate chart alerts using user-defined channel limit for routes. Danger areas are shown highlighted if safety contour or user-chosen chart alert areas are crossed by the planned route. For more information on route planning, see chapter 9. Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier than it is to take place, use the Display date and Approved until dates corresponding to the dates you are going to sail. 8.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning You can generate a list of chart alerts that cross by the planned route. This can be done as follows: 1. Enter safety contour you want to use. 2. Plan a route; define waypoints and other necessary information. See chapter 9 for route planning. 3. Choose dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring, on the [Alert Parameters] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box, shown below. a) Click the [PLAN], [Planning] and [Route] buttons. b) Click the [Alert Parameters] tab. c) Click the alert to process. Show an orange circle for visual and aural alerts, or yellow circle for only the visual alert. Note that the safety contour is always shown in red. 8-5 8. CHART ALERTS Route Bank 4. Click the [Check Route] button to generate a list of chart alerts. The results appear on the [Check Results] page. Route Bank The figure above shows the alerts to be monitored. If there are alerts included in the planned route, check alerts leg by leg, or check alerts by using category of alert. 8-6 8. CHART ALERTS 8.4 Route Monitoring • When the ship enters a check area, a visual alert (caution level) is generated. Neither objects or routes are highlighted. • When the ship enters a check area, a visual alert (alarm, warning level) is generated. Objects and routes in the area are highlighted. • A red box indicates an area having several highlighted objects. The system has a route monitor that facilitates safe use of routes. You can check your route plan for safe water and you can attach a user chart and Notes that you intend to use together with a route plan. To show the [Route Information] dialog box, get into the Voyage navigation mode, then click the [Route] and [Route Information] buttons. Click the [Waypoints] tab. 8-7 8. CHART ALERTS This page is intentionally left blank. 8-8 9. ROUTES 9.1 Route Planning Overview A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The plan includes: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Route name Name, latitude and longitude of each waypoint Radius of turn circle at each waypoint Safe channel limits Chart alarm calculation based on channel limits against chart database and user chart danger UKC calculation Deadband width, nominal deadband width used for operating modes with moderate accuracy and economical sailing behavior Minimum and maximum speed for each leg The navigation method (rhumb line, great circle) Fuel saving ETD for the first waypoint ETA for the last waypoint Ship and environmental condition affecting the ship speed calculation Name of the user chart to use during route navigation together with the planned route Name of the Notes to use during route navigation together with this planned route, in the user chart dialog box. Using the above-mentioned data, the system calculates speed, course and length for each leg, ETAs for each waypoint, fuel consumption and WOP. It also calculates safe water areas based on user-defined channel limits. The calculated data is displayed in tabular form, which can be printed as a documented route plan and also stored in a file for later use. Main functions of route planning are: • Define waypoints • Define turnings for each waypoint • Define channel limits for each leg (a leg is the line connected between two waypoints). The channel limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are planning or monitoring your route. • Define the speed for each leg • Calculation for ETD and ETA • Calculation for most economical sailing Note 1: Limitation of displayed route If you have small scale chart(s) on display having the whole eastern/western (0-180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there is a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/western hemisphere is not on the display. A maximum of five routes can be edited simultaneously. Note 2: If a planned route's Safety Margin or Channel Limit contains excessive land masses, the ECDIS may freeze during a route check.When this happens, reset the ECDIS, then adjust the Channel Limit and Safety Margin settings in the Route Plan dialog box's Waypoints so that land mass is not included in the route. 9-1 9. ROUTES 9.2 Main Menu for Route Planning The main parameters for the route planning are: • Latitude and longitude of the waypoint • Channel limits to the waypoint • Turning radius of the waypoint • Maximum speed limit and planned speed for each leg There are two phases for a route: Route Plan and Route Monitor. Route plan is used for planning the route and route monitor is used to control a route for monitoring. To complete route planning, do the following. 1. Create a new route or choose an existing one. See section 9.3. 2. Modify your route if necessary. See section 9.4. 3. Make chart alert (safe water) calculation. See section 9.3.5. 4. Optimize your route. See section 9.7. 9.3 How to Create a New Route To make a complete route for a voyage, do the following: 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to activate the Voyage planning mode. 2. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route] button to open the [Route Plan] dialog box. 3. Click the [New] button. 4. Use the cursor to select a position for the first waypoint then push the left mouse button. A waypoint mark appears on the position selected, and the latitude and longitude of the position, etc. are entered into the [Route Plan] dialog box. After entering a waypoint, edit Name, Steering mode, Radius, Channel limit, Plan SPD, SPD Max and Margin as appropriate in the [Route Plan] dialog box, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software keyboard. To change the settings of items other than L/L position: Put the cursor on an item to show up and down arrows then click required arrow. To change L/L position: Put the cursor on the digit to change and roll the scrollwheel. 9-2 9. ROUTES Note: A guide box that shows the range and bearing between waypoints as you drag the cursor is available. You can show or hide the box with the [Guide Box] button on the InstantAccess bar. Click the button to show its background color in light-blue to display the guide box. Guide box 5. Repeat step 4 to enter other waypoints. 6. After you enter the final waypoint, right-click the display area to show the contextsensitive menu then select [Finish]. 7. Click the [Save] button. Enter a name (max. 63 characters) for the route, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software keyboard. Click the [OK] button to finish. 8. Use the [Alert Parameters] page to define the safety contour and other specified conditions for checking the route. Click a "block" under a check item to select a red circle or yellow circle. Also, input value for [Draught/m]. A parameter for [Draught/m] can also be assigned globally to all legs from the context-sensitive menu. See section 9.3.4 for how to use the [Alert Parameters] page. 9. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions exist. The results appear on the [Check Results] page. This system can examine chart database against planned route to make a list of alerts where a route crosses a safety contour or specified areas used in chart alerts. 10. Use the [User Chart] page to link, de-link a user chart(s) with the route.See section 9.3.2. 11. Use the [Optimize] page to enter parameters for route optimization.See section 9.3.3. 9-3 9. ROUTES How to use the Undo feature The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed from the [Undo] button on the InstantAccess bar. In route creation the feature is used with waypoint and text input as follows: Waypoint input: Delete last-entered waypoint. Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string. 9.3.1 How to use the Waypoints page B The following fields and boxes can be found in the [Waypoints] page. Scroll the list rightward to see hidden items. WPT: Each waypoint has a number. Name: You can name each waypoint. Latitude: WPTs latitude coordinate is displayed in WGS-84 datum. Longitude: WPTs longitude coordinate is displayed in WGS-84 datum. Leg/°: Bearing of leg Leg/NM: Length of leg (nm). Str Mode: Define steering mode for each leg - rhumb line or great circle. Click to select [Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]. RAD/NM: Define turning radius for each waypoint. To change a radius, put the cursor in this column to show up and down arrows. Click the arrows to set the radius. Ch Limit/m: Define channel limit for each leg. Plan SPD: Define planned speed to use with a leg. SPD Max: Define maximum speed to use with a leg. Margin/m: Define extension for channel limits to be checked against chart alerts. PL 1/m, PL 2/m: One or two sets of parallel lines, colored orange, can be drawn on a route. Set the distance (in meters) to offset the lines from the route, from -99999 to 99999. Parallel lines allow the navigator to maintain a given distance away from hazards. See the illustration below. WPT1 WPT2 Parallel Line for Leg 1 Parallel Line for Leg 2 9-4 WPT3 9. ROUTES Note: You can select the route information data to display on the [Waypoints] page with the context-sensitive menu. Right click the “Edit Columns” to show the context-sensitive menu. Check or uncheck items as appropriate then click the [OK] button. 9.3.2 How to use the User Chart page The [User Chart] page lets you link user charts to routes. To link a user chart, click the box to the left of the user chart name in the [Stored User Chart] list to show a checkmark. Click the << button to copy that name to the [Linked User Chart] list. To de-link a user chart, click the box to the left of the user chart name in the [Linked User Chart] list then click the >> button to erase the name. The contents of each user chart are shown in the [Contents] window. Route Bank Linked User Chart: List of user charts linked with selected route. Stored User Chart: List of stored user charts. << button: Link a stored user chart. Check the chart in the [Stored user chart] list then click this button. The user chart name is then copied to the [Linked User Chart] list. >> button: Click to remove selected (checkmarked) user chart from the [Linked User Chart] list. Contents: Lists the objects saved to the user chart selected. 9-5 9. ROUTES 9.3.3 How to use the Optimize page After all waypoints are inserted and you have made safe water calculation, you can optimize your route, on the [Optimize] page. If not chosen, then optimization will be done automatically with max. speed. If you want do optimization with a specific strategy, see section 9.7 for how to optimize a route. Type: Select optimization strategy: maximum speed, time table, maximum profit, or minimum cost. Set ETD: Set date, time and waypoint to start from. Parameters: Set the parameters for optimization, speed limit and income (max profit). Edit Cost Parameters button: Enter fuel consumption figures. See section 21.3. Set ETA: For the type [Time table], set the date and time that you want to arrive at the waypoint selected. Optimized Speed/ETA: The optimized speed for the date and time entered at [Set ETA] appears here, after clicking the [Calculate] button. Clear All: Clear all ETD dates entered at [Set ETD]. Calculate button: Click to calculate optimization. 9-6 9. ROUTES 9.3.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page The [Alert Parameters] page sets the alert conditions to use when checking a route. Put an orange circle for an item to highlight on the chart. ([Safety Contour] is fixed to red.) If you do not require the highlight display for an item, put a yellow circle for that object. The relevant alerts (red, orange, yellow) are shown in the [Check Results] page. You can select the safety contour and chart alerts used to check the safety of the route. This allows you to check the safety with conditions different from those chosen for system use. This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing conditions. Click each box to show one of the following: - Orange circle (Item highlighted in red on chart) - Yellow circle (No highlight) Route Bank Radio buttons, input boxes Item Description Check type Check how to apply the alerts, to every leg or individual leg. (Only [Draught] can be applied to every leg.) Safety Set the safety contour (in meContour ters). UKC Limit Under keel clearance limit. Date (UTC) [Copy from Default Alert] button [Copy to Default Alert] button [Check Route] button Leg A chart may have date-dependent features. Enter the actual data of embarkation to know date-dependent features. Copy the default alert settings to this route. Copy the alert settings for this route as default alert settings. Click to check route for safe navigation. The results appear on the [Check Results] page. Leg number Item Draught/m Alert items Description Ship’s draught Safety Contour Safety contour Areas to be Avoided User Chart Danger Areas to be avoided Traffic Separation Zone Inshore Traffic Zone Traffic separation zone Restricted Area Restricted area Caution Area Offshore Production Area Caution area Offshore production area User chart danger area Inshore traffic zone 9-7 9. ROUTES Radio buttons, input boxes Item Description Item Military Practice Area Seaplane Landing Area Submarine Transit Lane Anchorage Area MarineFarm Aquaculture PSSA Area Non-official ENC No Vector Chart Not Up-to-date Permit Expired UKC Limit Alert items Description Military practice area Seaplane landing area Submarine transit lane Anchorage area Marine farm aquaculture Particularly Sensitive Sea Area No official ENC data No vector chart for area. Chart not up to date. Permit for chart has expired. Under keel clearance limit Context sensitive menus A context-sensitive menu for setting the Set “ALL” setting to all legs draught is available on the [Alert ParameClear setting ters] page. Right-click [Draught] to show the menu. [Set “ALL” setting to all legs] applies the draught value of [Check type: All Legs] to all legs. [Clear setting] restores default settings for each leg. 9.3.5 How to use the Check Results page The [Check Results] page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route. Click the [Check Route] button to do the check. After the button is operated, the alert type and latitude and longitude position of the alert appear for applicable legs on the route. Route Bank Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. Note 2: A route check can take longer with C-Map or CM-ENC charts. Wait until the completion of the check. 9-8 9. ROUTES 9.4 How to Modify an Existing Route 9.4.1 How to change waypoint position To change position of a waypoint you have the following choices: • Enter latitude and longitude on the [Waypoints] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box. • Drag and drop waypoint using the left button. How to drag and drop waypoint to new position 1. Put the cursor on the route waypoint to move then push the right button to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Edit]. 3. Press and hold down the left button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor to a desired position. Release the button when the cursor is at the desired position. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Finish]. How to change latitude and longitude from the Waypoints page 1. Show the [Waypoints] page. 2. Put the cursor on the digit to change in the Latitude or Longitude field. 3. Enter position from the Control Unit’s keyboard, or spin the scrollwheel. 9.4.2 How to change other waypoint data Other data of a waypoint, such as name, steering mode, turning radius, min/max speed, can be edited from the [Waypoints] page. Select the route to edit and open the [Waypoints] page. Put the cursor on a desired field and spin the scrollwheel to change data. (Push the left button to change steering mode.) 9.4.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the electronic chart area 1. Put the cursor on the current last waypoint of the route. 2. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit]. 3. Put the cursor on the new location for the last waypoint then push the left button. 4. Right click, then click [Finish]. How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the Waypoints page Open the [Waypoints] page, right-click [WPT] then select [Add WPT]. A waypoint is added at the end of the list. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary. 9-9 9. ROUTES 9.4.4 How insert a waypoint How to insert a waypoint between waypoints from the electronic chart area 1. Put the cursor anywhere on the route where you want to insert a waypoint. 2. Right-click to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit]. 3. Put the cursor on the leg where you want to insert a waypoint. 4. Right click then click [Insert WPT]. 5. Right click then click [Finish]. How to insert a waypoint from the Waypoints page Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the waypoint to process. Select [Insert after] or [Insert before] as appropriate. A waypoint is added after or before the waypoint selected. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary. 9.4.5 How to delete a waypoint How to delete a waypoint from the electronic chart area Put the cursor on the waypoint to delete. Push the right button to show the contextsensitive menu then select [Edit] followed by [Delete WPT]. How to delete a waypoint from the Waypoints page Open the [Waypoints] page. Right-click the waypoint you want to delete then select [Delete WPT]. 9.4.6 Geometry check of route When you add a new waypoint, modify a waypoint or change other waypoint data, the message "Impossible turn at WPT" may appear (in red). It means that the geometry of route makes it impossible for the ship to sail along a certain leg. Typically it is enough if you do the following, on the [Waypoints] page. • Decrease the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors. • Increase the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors. • Change lat/lon position of the waypoint or one of its neighbors. Note: If the above-mentioned remedies do not remove the "Impossible turn at WPT "indication, try changing the planned speed. 9-10 9. ROUTES 9.5 SAR Operations The SAR feature facilitates search and rescue and MOB operations. To use the SAR feature, get into the Voyage planning mode then do the following: 1. Click the [Planning] and [Route] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Route Plan] dialog box then click the [SAR] button. 2. Enter your start point. To enter current position, click the [Ship Position] button. (The start point can also be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on the start point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown below then click [Set start point].) 3. Enter your ship's speed and turn radius, current UTC date and time. 4. At [Search Point], enter the estimated position of the object to search. (The search point can also be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on the search point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown at step 2 then click [Set search point]. 5. Enter drift speed, drift direction, and the UTC date and time of the estimated position. 6. At the [Search Setting] window, choose and set the search type, referring to the table on the next page. 9-11 9. ROUTES Search type Options Sample pattern Expanding square WPT7 90.00° Start Leg Length WPT3 90° Direction: Set the direction to start the search, Clockwise or Anticlockwise. Search Pattern Heading: See the right figure. Start Leg Length: Enter the start leg length. Number of Legs: Enter the number of legs to use. Starting at the probable location of the target, the search vessels expand outward in concentric squares. WPT6 WPT4 WPT8 90.00°WPT2 90.00° Search Pattern Heading WPT5 WPT1 Start Point Parallel tracks Direction: Select the direction to start the search, Clockwise or Anticlockwise. Search Pattern Heading: See the right figure. Start Leg Length: Enter the start leg length. Track Space: Enter the length of the short legs in the route. Number of Legs: Enter the number of legs to use. The parallel tracks pattern is usually the first pattern used in undertaking a search operation, since it assumes that the search object is in the vicinity of the track. 9-12 Search Pattern Heading (North ref.) S Letart L ng eg th Start Point Track space 9. ROUTES Search type Options Sector search Sample pattern Search Pattern Heading WPT3 S radearch ius WPT6 Sector #1 60° Sector #2 Direction: Select the direction to start the search, Clockwise or Anticlockwise. Search Pattern Heading: See the right figure. Search Radius: Enter the search radius (in NM). Number of Sectors: Enter the number of sectors to use. The sector search is used when the position of the body is known accurately and the search has to be done over a small area. It is normally carried out in the area, where the casualty or the object has been sighted. WPT9 WPT5 WPT2 WPT8 WPT4 Sector #3 WPT7 WPT1 Start Point 7. Click the [OK] button. The [Route Plan] dialog box appears and the system draws the search and rescue route on the screen according to the search and rescue settings. 8. To follow the route, click the [Exchange to MONIT] button. Note: To monitor the route the following conditions must be met: • The route must have at least two waypoints. • The route must have no impossible turns. • The route must have been checked. 9. To save the route, click the [Save] button and enter a name for the route, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard. If necessary you can drag waypoints to new position, like with an ordinary route. 9-13 9. ROUTES 9.6 Route Bank The route bank stores all the routes you have created. To show the route bank in the Voyage planning mode, select [Route], [Route Bank] in [Route Plan] dialog box: Route name Date created or modified Route ID Total no. of waypoints Total distance of route Position of start waypoint Position of final waypoint In the Voyage planning mode, the waypoints of a route can be inserted into the route currently selected. 1. Show the dialog box shown above. 2. Select the route for which you want to copy its waypoint(s) in the active route. For example, select Route2. Click the [Open] button. Route1 Route2 3. At [Insert Position], select where you want to insert waypoints into the active route, [Before] or [After] the waypoint selected in the next step. The [Reset] button restores the route to the original condition. 4. In the left-hand column set the cursor on the waypoint where to insert waypoints from the inactive route. 5. At the right-hand column, select the waypoint(s) to add to the active route. A context-sensitive menu is available by right-clicking [WPT] in the inactive route. The options available are [Select All], [Deselect All] and [Reverse] (reverse the order of the waypoints in the inactive route). 9-14 9. ROUTES 6. Click the << button to insert the waypoint(s) from the inactive route to the active route. In the example below, WPT1 of the inactive route is inserted at the end of the active route, becoming its waypoint 5. Route1 Route2 7. Click the [OK] button to finish. 9.7 Route Optimization 9.7.1 Available route optimization strategies After all waypoints are inserted, the route is optimized from the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box. If no optimization strategy is chosen, the optimization is done with "max. speed," defined in ship parameters. Optimization calculates all parameters for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints, maneuvering start point, WOP, etc.). There are four methods for optimization: Max speed: This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parameters and multiplies by all reduction factors (weather, ice, fouling, etc.) together with speed limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. ETA may be entered, however it is calculated with user-entered ETD and speed limit. Time table: Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required ETA. Maximum speed is never exceeded. The user enters ETD and ETA to calculate speed to use. If, the user-entered ETA is earlier than that found with the Max. Speed calculation, the Max. speed-calculated ETA will be indicated below the Time Table ETA calculation figure. The calculated speed is shown on the [Route Information] box as [Plan Speed]. Max. profit: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most profitable speed (highest profit per time unit). Min. cost: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the speed that gives the minimum total cost. You need to set Cost parameters beforehand to use this feature. 9-15 9. ROUTES 9.7.2 How to optimize a route You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD), desired number of waypoints and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) on the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box to optimize your route. 1. Click the [Optimize] tab to open the [Optimize] page. Route Bank 2. At [Type], click the drop-down list to select desired optimization strategy, referring to section 9.7.1 Available route optimization strategies. 3. Do the following: 1) At the [Set ETD] window, enter starting WPT and date and time of departure. For entry of the date, the [Set date] window, shown right, appears. Click the applicable date in the calendar if you are going to depart during the current month, or click the applicable arrow on the month/year button to select a different date. Click the [OK] button to save the ETD and close the window. 2) At the [Waypoints] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box, enter the maximum speed to use. For the Type [MAX profit], enter [Income] value. If necessary, click the [Edit Cost Parameters] button to enter fuel consumption values. 9-16 9. ROUTES 3) For [Time table], the [Set ETA] window appears. Set the ETA to use for each waypoint. To enter the Time and Date, click the [Date] window to show the [Set date] window. Click the appropriate date. The date entered appears in the [Set ETA] window. 4. Click the [Calculate] button to calculate optimal route. The [Optimized Speed/ETA] dialog box shows the results of the calculation. 5. To apply the ETA results to the route, click the [Apply to Route] button. 6. To save all optimization settings, click the [Save] button. Note that the ETA used in route reports is the first-entered ETA. 9.7.3 How to plan a speed profile A speed profile is defined by general max. speed and optimization types. These values are given while planning a route. You can define speed limit and optimize type in the [Optimize] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box and in the [Waypoints] page you can give planned and max. speed for each leg. The table below demonstrate how different optimize types and speed limits influence speed. WPT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 min. cost 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 6.0 6.0 4.8 4.8 6.0 4.8 max. profit 10.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 8.0 timetable 10.0 15.0 16.2 16.2 15.0 16.2 16.2 16.2 16.2 8.0 Max speed 10 15 20 20 15 20 20 20 17 8 9-17 9. ROUTES 9.8 How to Import Routes 9.8.1 How to import FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 route data You can import a route created on another FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9. 1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the route data to import in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. Click the [OK] button then select [Settings]. 3. Click the [File Import] tab. Import file: 201310011155939.zip Select data to import: Setting data Route/User chart Playback data 4. Click the [Select file to import] button to select the file to import. 5. Check the data to import, at [Select data to import]. 6. Click the [Import] button. 9.8.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data Routes created at an ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS. Copy the routes to a folder in a USB flash memory then follow this procedure. Note that FEA2x05-created routes cannot be imported. 1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Activate the Voyage planning mode. 3. Click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [Route] buttons to show the [SELECT DIRECTORY] dialog box. 4. Select the folder that contains the route(s) to be imported then click the [OK] button. 5. Check the route(s) to import then click the [Import] button. 9-18 9. ROUTES 9.8.3 How to import csv, ASCII format route data 1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. Route Data Management 2. Activate the Voyage planning mode. 3. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Manage Data] and [Route] buttons to show the [Route Data Management] dialog box. 4. At the drop-down list, select the import format. The choices are [CSV Position]: waypoint position data, CSV format [ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint name, position order, ASCII format [ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII format [CSV Route Sheet]: route data, CSV format [RTE Format]: route data, RTE format Note: FEA-2x07 route data can also be imported through this procedure. 5. Click the [Import] button. 6. Select the file to import then click the [Open] button. 9.9 How to Export Route Data 9.9.1 How to export FMD-3xx0 route data You can export route data to share the data with other FMD-3xx0 units. 1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. Click the [OK] button then select [Settings]. 3. Click the [File Export] tab. Playback data 4. At [Select data to export], check only [Route/User chart]. 5. Click the [Export] button to save the data to the USB flash memory. 9-19 9. ROUTES 9.9.2 How to export route data in FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII format 1. Activate the Voyage planning mode then set a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Route], [Route] and [Route Data Management] buttons to show the [Route Data Management] dialog box. Route Data Management 3. At the drop-down list, select the import format. The choices are [CSV Position]: waypoint position data, CSV format [ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint name, position order, ASCII format [ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII format [CSV Route Sheet]: route data, CSV format [RTE Format]: route data, RTE format 4. Check the route(s) to export then click the [Export] button. 5. Click the [OK] button. 9.10 How to Delete Routes 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation mode. 2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Route] button. 3. Put a checkmark in the check box to the left of the route name. 4. Click the [Delete] button. 5. Click the [OK] button to delete the route(s) selected. 9-20 Route Data Management 9. ROUTES 9.11 Reports This ECDIS generates reports for waypoints in the selected route. If connected to a printer, reports can be printed by clicking the [Print Text] button. Text in reports can be searched with the [Find] button. To generate a report, do the following: 1. Click the [PLAN] button to go to the Voyage planning mode. 2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [Route] button. Click applicable “report” button - [WPT], [Full WPT] or [Passage]. The following dialog box appears. 3. Select the appropriate route then click the [Open] button to show the selected report. See the next several pages for examples. 9-21 9. ROUTES WPT report The WPT report contains the following information for each waypoint in the route selected. • Route name • Date of report • Waypoint no. • Position in latitude and longitude • Length of waypoint • Distance remaining in route • Planned courses and steering methods (RL (RhumbLine), GC (GreatCircle)) • Turning radius • Planned speeds • Estimated times of arrival (ETA) • ETD from waypoint 1 (start point) • ETA to waypoint “x” (final waypoint) • Total length of route • Estimated time required to run route using planned speeds and courses 9-22 9. ROUTES Full WPT report You can generate a full waypoint report for the route selected. The report includes the following for each waypoint • Route name • Date of report • Waypoint no. • Position in latitude and longitude • Planned radius • Channel limit • Planned speed • Planned course • ETA • Steering mode (rhumb line or great circle) to each waypoint • ROT • Margin for channel limit • Speed Max • Leg length • Time used 9-23 9. ROUTES Passage plan report The passage plan report generates waypoint information for each waypoint in the route selected. • Route name • Date of report • Waypoint no. • Position in latitude and longitude • Length • Cumulative length • Planned course • Steering method (RL or GC) • Name of waypoint 9-24 10. USER CHARTS 10.1 Introduction User charts are overlays that the user creates to indicate safety-related objects and areas. They can be displayed on both the radar overlay and the electronic chart. These charts are intended for pointing out safety-related items like position of important navigation marks, safe area for the ship, etc. User charts areas can be used to activate alerts and indications based on user-defined danger symbols, lines and areas. When route or own ship estimated position is going to cross a user chart symbol, line or area that is defined as a dangerous one, an alert or indication is generated by the system. See the chapter on chart alerts. A user chart consists of various objects (points, lines, text, symbols, etc.). The maximum number of objects per user chart is 200. A route may have up to five user charts, for a max. of 1,000 user chart objects per route. The user chart is displayed on the radar overlay and its position and shape is based on the ship's actual position. When own ship is moving in the area covered by the user chart, the elements of the user chart are superimposed on the radar, with a maximum of 80 of the nearest elements displayed. 10.1.1 Objects of user charts Below is a description of the objects used in a user chart. • Tidal: There are two types of tidals, current and predicted. • Line: You can define four different types of lines. Lines can be used in chart alert calculation and/or display on the radar: • Navigation lines: Displayed on both the radar overlay and the ECDIS display. Navigation lines are reference lines for coast line. • Coast line: Displayed on both the ECDIS and radar overlays. Coastal line is usually a well-defined (by chart digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline. The user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in S57 format. • Depth contour: Displayed on both the ECDIS and radar overlay. Depth line shows the chosen depth levels. The user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in S57 format. • Route line: Displayed on both the radar overlay and the ECDIS display. Route lines are zones for anchoring, traffic separation lines, etc. • Clearing line: A clearing line is used to define a line which a vessel can sail to avoid navigational hazards. A clearing line can be of the NMT (Not More Than) or NLT (Not Less Than) type. Displayed on the ECDIS display only. • Area: The operator can define closed areas with a polygon. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available regardless of the type of chart material used. 10-1 10. USER CHARTS • Circle: The operator can define an area with a circle, which can define a location to avoid. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available regardless of the type of chart material used. • Labels: There are two types of labels: point and label. A "point" (i) is mainly used to denote position of objects, such as buoys, light houses, fixed targets, wrecks, etc. Points can be used in chart alert calculation. A "label" provides user-entered text to show on the display. 10.2 How to Create a User Chart You can create and modify a user chart in the Voyage planning mode. To make a complete user chart, do the following: 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode. 2. Click the [Planning] and [User Chart] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the user chart palette and the [User Chart] dialog box. 3. Click the [New] button on the [User Chart] dialog box to create a new chart Tidal Area Line Circle Clearing line Label 4. Click the desired object (button) on the palette. The [Tidal], [Line], [Clearing line] and [Label] buttons have multiple choices. Right-click the respective button to show a context sensitive menu. The choices available for each object are shown below. Tidal: Current, Predicted Line: Coast, Nav, Route, Depth Clearing line: NMT (Not More Than), NLT (Not Less Than) Label: Point, Label 5. Put the cursor on the location to insert the object then push the left button. See the figure below for how to construct lines, areas and circles. For the "Tidal" ob- 10-2 10. USER CHARTS ject, you can set Orientation, Strength and Time from the dialog box. With the "Label" object you can enter text and show that text on the screen. Note: An object can also be put at the center of the screen. Do step 1-4 in this procedure. On the [User Chart] dialog box, right click the box to the left of [Object] then select [Add Object] from the pop-up menu. (3) Click (1) Click (2) Click (4) Right-click; select Finish. (2) Drag cursor; double-click to set. (1) Click 1) Put cursor where to locate center of circle then click. 2) Drag cursor to set radius; double-click to set. How to create a circle How to create a line (1) Click (2) Click (4) Right-click; select Finish. (3) Click How to create an area 6. When you insert an object, the following is done in the [User Chart] dialog box: - Name of the object button appears in the [Object] window - Latitude and longitude position of the object is displayed - Total object count is updated 7. To enter a name for the object, click the appropriate location in the [Name] window then use the software keyboard or the Control Unit to enter a name. 8. To show the object on the radar overlay, click the corresponding box in the [Radar] window to show a checkmark in the box. For the label, line, clearing line, area and circle, click the corresponding box in the [Danger] window to use or don't use the object in chart alert calculation. Show a red checkmark to use the object in chart alert calculation. For an area, circle, line, you can add Notes as shown below. See the description and figure below for a description of Notes. 1) Enter the text for the Notes in the [Description] box. 2) Click the box in the [Notes] window of the [User Chart] dialog box to show a checkmark. 3) At the [Range of notes] input box, enter the distance from the line position at which to display the Notes. This is effective for lines only. Note: You cannot select both Danger and Notes for these symbols; select either Danger or Notes. 10-3 10. USER CHARTS What are Notes? "Notes" provides messages for the operator relative to your vessel’s position in the Voyage navigation mode. The ECDIS compares Notes position and when own ship is x miles from the Notes it generates a message. Position of own ship when Notes will disappear Your vessel’s track i Location of Notes Notes range setting Position of own ship when Notes will be activated 9. To continue entering the same symbol, click a new location on the screen and do step 5. To enter a different symbol, do steps 4 and 5. 10. After you have entered all necessary objects, click the [Save] button. Note: If the [Save] button is not shown, update the user chart to show the button. 11. The [Save as user chart window] appears. Enter a name for the user chart then click the [Save] button. The figure on the next page shows a user chart and the corresponding entries in the [User Chart] dialog box. 10-4 10. USER CHARTS • The Line with the name "Coast" is a coastline. • The Circle has the Notes "Arrival No.1," which means the message "Arrival No.1" will be shown on the screen when the ship is 1 NM from the position of the center of the circle. • The Tidal marks line marks a tidal (current). • The Area has Radar and Danger checked. This means the area is shown on the radar overlay and is used in chart alert calculation. • The Label with the name "Point No. 1" is a point label and is also shown on the radar overlay. • The Label with the name "Wreck" is a common label and has Danger checked; it is used in chart alert calculation. CIRCLE LI NE TIDAL (C oa st ) LABEL (Point) LABEL (Label) AREA Note: The following combinations of object and display are not allowed: • Tidal object with Radar, Danger, Notes • Clearing line with Radar, Notes • Label with Notes How to use the Undo feature The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed from the [Undo] button on the InstantAccess bar, use double-click, or the context-sensitive menu. In user chart creation the feature is used with object and text input as follows: Tidal, Circle, Current, Label: Delete last-entered object. Area, Line: Erase last-entered point. For [Area], the area must have at least four points. And for a [Line], there must be at least three points. Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string. 10-5 10. USER CHARTS 10.3 How to Import a User Chart Created with ECDIS FEA-2x07 User charts created at the ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS. Copy the user charts to a folder (see chapter 17 in the operator’s manual of the FEA2x07) in a USB flash memory then do as follows. Note that FEA-2x05 created user charts cannot be imported. 1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Activate the Voyage planning mode. 3. Click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [User Chart] buttons to show the [SELECT DIRECTORY] dialog box. USB Flash 04.04.2012 19:23 4. Select the folder that contains the user chart(s) to be imported then click the [OK] button. User Chart Data Import from legacy ECDIS 5. Check the user chart(s) to import then click the [Import] button. 10-6 10. USER CHARTS 10.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart Do steps 1 and 2 in section 10.2 to show the [User Chart] dialog box then click the [Select] button. Select the user chart to edit then click the [Open] button. Follow the appropriate instructions below. 10.4.1 How to edit objects on the chart area How to move objects Drag and drop the object. How to change corner points in lines and areas Drag point to new location; double-click Drag point to new location; double-click How to change corner point on a line How to change corner point in an area How to insert a corner point on a line or area Put the cursor on the location where to insert a corner point, right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Insert]. 10.4.2 How to edit objects from the User Chart dialog box The latitude and longitude position, object name and description of an object can be edited from the [User Chart] dialog box. Open the user chart as described in this section. Double click the item to edit and use the scrollwheel to edit. 10-7 10. USER CHARTS 10.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart How to delete an object Right-click the object to show the context-sensitive menu and select [Delete]. How to delete a point on a line Put the cursor on the point to delete then right click to show the context-sensitive menu. Select [Delete Point]. The line is redrawn. 10.6 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display User charts can be displayed on the electronic chart. Open the [Mariner] page in the [Symbol Display] menu and check the user chart items to display. Choose the degree of transparency for the objects with [Density]. Note: Alpha blending technology is used for transparency effects. 10-8 10. USER CHARTS 10.7 How to Delete User Charts 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation mode. 2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [User Chart] button. UserChart1 UserChart2 3. Check the user chart(s) to delete. 4. Click the [Delete] button then click the [OK] button. 10.8 User Chart Reports 1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode. 2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [User Chart] button to show the [Select User Chart] dialog box. 3. Select the appropriate user chart then click the [OK] button to show the selected report. See the next several pages for examples of reports. 10-9 10. USER CHARTS Full report The full report contains information about each tidal, line, clearing line, label, area and circle in the user chart selected. Check or uncheck the boxes at the top of the display to select the report(s) to display. Check the report(s) to display. Tidal report The tidal report provides • • • • 10-10 Position of the tidal Type of tidal (current or predicted) Speed and direction of the tidal Time of the tidal 10. USER CHARTS Line report The Line report provides line name and latitude and longitude of each point on the line. Clearing line The Clearing line report shows the name and position of clearing lines entered on the user chart selected. 10-11 10. USER CHARTS Area report The area report provides • Area no. and area name • The latitude and longitude position of each point of the area • The description of the area • "On radar" is shown if the area is shown on the radar overlay. Circle report The Circle report provides the position and radius of circles drawn on a user chart. Label report The Label report provides the latitude and longitude position of each label, the name of each label. On radar is shown if the label is shown on the radar overlay. 10-12 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES Route monitor is a means for permanent monitoring of the ship's behavior relative to the monitored route. The [Route Information] box displays the data on the ship's position relative to the monitored route. The monitored route consists of the following information, displayed in the electronic chart area: • The route is displayed with red dots. • The limits of channels of each leg are displayed with solid red lines. These limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are monitoring the route. See chapter 8 for how set those limits. • Each leg has information about planned speed, shown in the Route box. • Each leg has information about planned course to steer. Note: In order to display charts with correctly updated situation, always use current date as Approved until and Display date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. See section 5.2 for how to set those dates. 11.1 How to Start Route Monitoring Method 1: InstantAccess bar In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] and [Select] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click a route then click the [Open] button. 11-1 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES Method 2: Selection from the Route information box Right-click the route name location in the [Route Information] box then select [Select Route] to show the [Select Route] dialog box. Select a route then click the [Open] button. TC: MANUAL Red box indicates detailed information available in larger scale. Chart alert area (alarm, warning) Waypoint 11-2 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES About monitoring routes When you choose a route for monitoring, the messages shown below appear, on the [Select Route] dialog box or in a message window, when a route cannot be opened for monitoring. • "Impossible turn at waypoint XX" (XX=waypoint no.). Geometry of the route makes it impossible for the ship to accomplish a turn. Modify the route to make the turn possible. • "Unchecked / Check condition differs". The route has not been checked. Check the route, on the [Alert Parameters] page. • "Monitored in the NAVI mode". The route is currently being monitored. • "More than one WPT needed". The route has only one waypoint. Add more waypoints to the route. • "Route monitoring cannot be started. Please check ship’s position and conditions." Click the [OK] button to close the message. Check ship’s position and conditions of the route. The route check which occurs after selecting a route can take longer with C-Map or CM-ENC charts. Wait until the completion of the check. If you have small-scale chart(s) on display that have the whole eastern/western (0180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there is a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/western hemisphere is not on the screen. Route monitoring is temporarily stopped (route is greyed out) and an alert appears when position, speed or heading is lost. To restore route monitoring, change the sensor system from System to Local (from the Sensor Information box), manually enter the lost data, check [Set Drift], then switch to the DR mode. Route data is sent to the radar (ex. FAR-2xx7 series) at the start of route monitoring or when the ship transits a waypoint. If a route is not displayed on the radar, stop then restart monitoring at the ECDIS. A route is erased from the radar when route monitoring is stopped or the ECDIS is restarted. To redisplay the route, stop then restart monitoring at the ECDIS. 11.2 How to Stop Monitoring a Route (Manual, Automatic) In the Voyage navigation mode, route monitoring can be stopped by clicking the [Route] and [Unselect] buttons. When alert 691, 692 or 693 occurs, route monitoring is automatically stopped. See “route monitoring is stopped” in the Troubleshooting table in section 24.5 for details. 11.3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display You can specify what parts of the monitored route to display. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click the [Route] tab. 11-3 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.4 How to View Waypoint Information Click the [Route] and [Route INFO] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Route Information] dialog box. Click the [Waypoints] tab to show waypoint information. * * Scroll list horizontally to view below items. No. 1 2 3 4 11-4 Item To WPT, GO button Distance Departure Actual Average SPD Waypoint list Description The system chooses a next waypoint automatically. Check that the To waypoint is the desired one. The system will automatically advance to a next waypoint when you pass the To waypoint. The default To WPT is WPT2. If you desire a different one, select it here and the click the [GO] button. Distance from current position to selected waypoint. The time the route was selected for monitoring. Actual speed The waypoint list provides for each waypoint WPT no., name, latitude and longitude position, ETA, plan speed, bearing and distance to leg, steering mode (rhumb line or great circle), radius, channel limit, speed max, and margin. Check ETA win- Parameters for checking ETA. The arrow to the left of [Check ETA] collapse dow or display the [Waypoints] and [User Chart] tabs. WPT, Distance Select a WPT to find the distance to that waypoint from current position. Plan The planned ETA to the selected waypoint. Actual The actual ETA to the selected waypoint. Off Plan The time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final WPT, when different. The indication is prefixed with "-" if earlier than planned; "+" if later than planned. SPD CalculaEnter ETA (time and date) to find the speed to use to arrive by the ETA. tion Suggested SPD The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the WPT selected would be same as planned ETA if type of optimization was "Time table". Start Calculate Click to start calculation. The button label changes to [Stop Calculate]. Total WPTs The total number of waypoints in the route. Total Distance The total distance of the route. 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.5 How to View User Chart Information In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] and [Select] buttons on the InstantAccess bar, select a route, click the [Open] button, then click the [User Chart] tab. The [Linked User Chart] list shows all the user charts linked with the monitored route and their contents. Click a user chart name to show the contents of the chart in the [Contents] window. Items with a checkmark are activated. For the [Check ETA] window, see the preceding page. 11.6 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned Route The monitored route can be transferred to the Voyage planning mode. This is useful when you don't need the route for monitoring but want to edit it. To transfer the monitored route, click the [Route] and [Move to Plan] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Up to five planned routes can be shown on the display. If you try to display another route, the route list appears. Deselect a route in order to transfer the monitored route to the Voyage planning mode. Note: When the monitored route is changed to a planned route, using the [Move to Plan] function, the operating mode changes from the Navigation voyage mode to the Voyage planning mode. If this operation is tried directly after the ECDIS starts and the change does not occur, click the [NAVI] button on the Status bar then try again. 11-5 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.7 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate from Monitored Route The instant track feature provides a temporary track, consisting of four waypoints, to return to or deviate from the monitored route. Correct data from navigation sensors is essential to this function. There are two instant track modes: [Safe Off Track] and [Back to Track]. [Safe Off Track]: This mode provides a track from the monitored route to a safe location to avoid collision or the like. [Back to Track]. This mode creates a track to follow to return to the monitored route when the vessel goes outside the channel limits. The mode is automatically selected according to whether a monitored route is active or not and the amount of off course. Further, if a monitored route is active while following the instant track route, the instant track mode can be changed manually. Condition Mode Neither monitored route nor instant track route active.* Safe Off Track • Both monitored route and instant track route are active.* Safe Off Track • The absolute value of off track is within the channel limit setting. • Both monitored route and instant track route active.* Back to Track • The absolute value of off track is outside the channel limit setting. Manual mode switching No Yes Yes * An additional instant track route can be joined to the instant track route related to a monitored route. The parameters for the instant track (channel limit, turn radius, etc.) can be set on the [Instant Track] page. See section 21.4. 11.7.1 Safe off track mode If it becomes necessary to deviate from the monitored route; for example, to avoid collision, use the [Safe Off Track] mode to create an instant track to a safe location. Click here to show drop down list to select mode. 1. With a monitored route active, click the [Instant Track] button on the InstantAccess bar to the show the [Instant Track] dialog box. The message "Please click a destination." appears on When monitored route is active the [Planning] page. Note 1: If a monitored route is active, the [Back to Track] mode can also be selected. Note 2: If a monitored instant track route is already active, an instant track mode different from the currently active one can be selected. 2. Click a destination. The location is marked with an orange circle and arrow. The message "Please click a point to decide an angle." appears in the [Instant Track] dialog box. The location must be within 50 NM of current position. 11-6 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 3. Roll the trackball to select the angle of approach to the destination then click. Current position Monitored route T2 WPT2 WPT2 Instant track waypoints (orange) Destination Click destination point . A circle and arrow appear. T3 T4 T1 Instant track (orange) Click a location to set desired angle of approach. Instant track is drawn. The system uses ship position, speed, angle of approach to create an instant track route. The track is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart alerts. During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box window shows "Checking" in the [Status] field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" replaces "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T4], are colored orange. The track is saved to the database as "Instant Track_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400). If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased from the screen. See section 11.7.3 for all the instant track messages and their meanings. To return to the monitored route, click a waypoint on a leg of the route to create an instant track route to use to return to the monitored route. 11.7.2 Back to track mode When the vessel goes off track, the alert "172 Off Track Alarm" appears in the [Alert] box. To create an instant track to return to the monitored route, use the [Back to Track] mode as follows: Click here to show drop down list to select mode. 1. With a monitored route active, click the [Instant Track] button on the InstantAccess bar. The message "Please click a WPT on Leg." appears on the [Planning] page. When monitored route is active Note 1: If a monitored route is active, the [Safe Off Track] mode can also be selected. Note 2: If a monitored instant track route is already active, an instant track mode different from the currently active one can be selected. Further, a completely new instant track route to the original monitored route can be created. 11-7 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 2. Click a leg or a waypoint on the monitored route. The location must be within 50 NM of current position. Monitored route Current position T1 WPT2 WPT2 T2 T3 Click a leg on monitored route. Instant track (orange) Point of return to route Instant track waypoints (orange) The system uses ship position, speed and final waypoint to create a track. The track is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart alerts. During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status] field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" replaces "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T3], are colored orange. The track is saved to the database as "Instant Track_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400). If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased from the screen. See section 11.7.3 for all the instant track messages and their meanings. 11-8 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.7.3 Instant track messages The table below shows all the instant track messages and their meanings. Message (1) Instant Track mode "Back to Track" "Safe Off Track" (2) Check result, error message "Could not create the Track." "Too far destination from own ship." "Checking" "OK" "NG" "Check error" "Instant track is expired." "Too many WPTs in monitoring route." (3) User operation message "Please click a destination." "Please click a point to decide an angle." "Please click a WPT on leg." (4) Name of instant track route InstantTrack_XXX (XXX: 0001 - 400) Meaning Color Back to track mode Safe off track mode White White The track could not be created. Selected destination is 50 NM or more from current position. Checking route. Instant track checked and is suitable to follow. Route check failed. Route check error. Route monitor timeout. More than 190 waypoints are in the monitored route. (Instant track cannot be created.) Yellow Yellow Red Green Red Red Red Red Select a destination in the [Safe Off Track] mode. Set the angle of approach in the [Safe Off Track] mode. Click a waypoint on a leg in the [Back to Track] mode. White White Name of monitored instant track route White White 11-9 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.7.4 Instant track details You can see the location and alert type found in an instant track by clicking the [Details] button on the [Instant Track] dialog box. Note: If the Status is not [OK], an alert (alarm or warning priority, depending on setting) appears in the Alert box. 11.7.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route How to monitor an instant track route If the route check results is "OK", click the [Monitor] button on the [Planning] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to start monitoring the instant track route. Click the button before the time remaining counts to zero, otherwise the instant track will be cancelled, followed by the message "Instant track is expiration." After the [Monitor] button is clicked the [Monitoring] page is opened. The [Monitoring] page shows the name of the instant track and the instant track mode. Click [Monitor] button The vessel follows the instant track route in the same method as a monitored route, which is greyed out to indicate it is inactive. For the instant track route connected to a monitored route, the previous instant track route is also greyed out to show it is inactive. Any additional instant track routes are erased. 11-10 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES To close the [Instant Track] dialog box, click the [Close] button. (The system continues monitoring the instant track route.) The following occurs when sensor data is lost while using the instant track function. Monitoring condition Result Instant track route monitoring. • An instant track route under creation is deleted. No route can be created. • The [Stop] button is pushed or the instant track route is followed until its completion. • After the instant track route is completed, an error message appears and the [Instant Track] dialog box closes. No monitored route An instant track route under creation is deleted. Monitored route active After the route is completed, an error message appears and the [Instant Track] dialog box closes. How to stop monitoring an instant track route Click the [Stop] button on the [Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to stop monitoring the instant track route. The system returns to monitoring the monitored route and the [Planning] page of the [Instant Track] dialog box opens. For the [Back to Track] mode, the instant track mode is canceled when the vessel returns to the monitored route. The instant track is greyed out to show that it is inactive. 11-11 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.7.6 How to return to a monitored route when following an instant track route (safe off track mode only) Do the following to return to a monitored route while following an instant track route. 1. While monitoring an instant track route, click the [Original Route] dialog box and its [Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to show the [Select Route] dialog box. Check [Planned Route] to show a list of planned routes, or check [Instant Track] to show a list of instant track routes. 2. Select the route to use. The original route or the instant track route currently in use cannot be selected. 3. Click the [Open] button to close the dialog box. The vessel starts following the newly selected route. When an instant track route is completed, the vessel starts following the route selected at step 2. 11-12 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.7.7 Button label and equipment state The label on the button at the position circled in the figure below changes according to the state of the instant track. Instant track state Creating Monitoring Return to original route after back to track mode TCS state Button label OFF Monitoring ON Execute (same function as Monitoring) OFF Stop ON* Stop OFF Reset (Instant track is deleted; another instant track maybe created) ON Reset * Button inoperative. 11-13 11. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 11.8 How to Share Route During Route Monitoring With multiple FMD-3x00 units the backup setting works as follows: • Backup ON: When route monitoring begins from the master unit (determined at installation), the backup units (other FMD-3xx0) display the route and monitor it. • Backup OFF: When route monitoring begins from the master unit, the backup units display route information in the Route Information box. Follow the procedure below to set master and backup units. 1. On the menu, select [Monitoring] from the [Shared] menu to show the [Setting] dialog box. ECD001 ECD002 2. Right click the equipment ID of the unit to set to show the pop-up menu. Select [MASTER] or [BACKUP]. Only one unit can be a master unit. All other units are backup. One unit must be as master unit. Note 1: To turn off the sharing the feature for a unit, select [CLEAR] from the popup menu. Note 2: To restore the original setting for a unit, click the Status column, then select [Reset]. 3. Click the [Save] button to save settings, then click the [Close] button to finish. 11-14 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS This chapter presents the various navigation tools available with the system. With the exception of the divider, the tools listed below are in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] Box. • TT/AIS (see chapters 13 and 14) • Echo (see chapter 16) • Parallel index lines • Check area • Range rings • Predictor • Anchor watch • Under keel clearance • Divider 12.1 How to Access the Nav Tools in the Overlay/NAV Tools Box The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box is located at bottom-right position on the screen. Use the page selection buttons to select desired page. Page name Minimize button Page selection buttons Overlay/NAV Tools box (Check Area page) 12-1 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.2 Parallel Index (PI) Lines The parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. There are six sets of PI lines (PIP6) and you can turn them on or off individually. Select the PI line to process with the [Display] pull-down list then click the [ON] or [OFF] button as appropriate. One, two, three or six lines can be shown - the actual number of lines shown depends on the line interval. The bearing can be set two ways: with the scrollwheel or dragging the PI line on the screen. 12.2.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines Select the PI line set to activate or deactivate, with the [Display] drop-down list. Activate or deactivate the set selected with the [ON/OFF] button. A maximum of six sets can be shown. 12.2.2 PI line bearing reference PI line bearing reference may be relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or referenced to North (True). Select [True] or [REL] as applicable. 12.2.3 Number of PI lines to display The maximum number of PI lines to display may be selected from 1, 2, 3 or 6 lines as below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line interval. Select the number of lines to display at [Index Lines]. 12.2.4 PI line mode The PI line mode can be set for parallel (0-degrees) or perpendicular (90-degrees). Select [Parallel] or [Perpendicular] at [Mode]. 12-2 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.2.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval There are two ways to adjust PI line orientation and PI line interval: through the menu and on the screen. How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval from the menu 1. Set the orientation with [Bearing]. 2. Set the line interval with [Distance]. How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval on the screen Adjust orientation: Put cursor on PI line bisecting own ship marker then drag cursor. Adjust interval: Put cursor on any PI line other than the one bisecting own ship marker then drag cursor. How to adjust orientation and interval, multiple PI lines Adjust orientation: Put cursor anywhere on PI line (other than own ship marker) then drag cursor. Adjust interval: Put cursor on own ship mark then drag cursor. How to adjust orientation and interval, single PI line 12.2.6 How to reset the PI lines You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees for parallel orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than doing it manually. Click the [Reset PI Lines] button to reset the parallel lines. 12-3 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.2.7 How to adjust PI line length You can adjust the forward and backward lengths of a PI line when [Index Lines] is set to 1. 1. Open the main menu and select [NAV Tools], [PI Lines] and [Truncate]. 2. If not already displayed, click the ON/OFF button to display the PI line whose length you want to adjust. 3. Click the value in [Forward] and [Backward] columns to adjust their lengths, referring to the illustration below. PI line Adjust the forward length. Adjust the backward length. 4. Click the [Save] button to finish. 12-4 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.3 Check Area Check area sets the area ahead and around own ship for which to check for safe navigation. See section 8.2 for how to activate own ship check. 12.4 Ring The range rings are the concentric set of rings on the ECDIS display. They provide an estimation of the range to an object. You can turn them on or off from the [Ring] page. Range ring The interval between rings changes with the chart scale, as shown in the table below. Chart scale 1:1,000 1:2,000 1:5,000 1:10,000 1:20,000 1:50,000 Ring interval (nm) 0.025 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.5 1.0 Chart scale 1:100,000 1:200,000 1:500,000 1:1,000,000 1:2,000,000 Ring interval (nm) 2.0 4.0 8.0 16.0 20.0 12-5 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.5 Predictor The predictor is a tool for estimating your ship's future positions and behavior. The onscreen predictor graphic consists of three pieces of your ship, drawn in true scale to successive future positions. The position of the third symbol will be your approximate position at the end of the time interval selected. The predictor is calculated using current speed and rate of turn. Docking speed components (transversal bow speed, transversal stern speed, transversal center speed and rate of turn) are assumed to be stable during the prediction period. The predictor can be used in every steering-state, including manual steering. To activate and set the Predictor, show the [Predictor] page. Turn the display on or off with [Display]. Set the time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 seconds), with [Time]. Movement of predictor (three pieces) The Predictor is updated every three seconds internally and the status of the predictor is shown with [Status] as shown in the table below. Indication Status OK Speed is suitable (0.5 kn or higher). Not Enough Speed Speed is too low (under 0.5 kn) to use the Predictor. Not Available. Reset Filter May Restore. Predictor is not being received. Note: The ship speed must be 0.5 kn or higher. The predictor may not be displayed or may not work properly if the speed is lower than that value. 12-6 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.6 Anchor Watch The anchor watch feature checks to see if your ship is drifting when it should be at rest. Alarm setting Conning position : Alarm triggered To set the anchor watch: 1. Select the [Anchor Watch] page. 2. Set the alarm radius (in nautical miles) with [Drag Circle]. 3. Drop the anchor then click the [Drop Anchor] button. 4. Click the [Start Anchor Watch] button to start the anchor watch. If your vessel travels from the CCRP more than the distance set here, the corresponding caution is generated. To continue to use the anchor watch, click the [Clear Anchor] button to set the alarm about your conning position. To stop the anchor watch, click the [Stop Anchor Watch] button. The caution is not generated even if your ship drifts more than the distance set with [Drag Circle]. If your ship drifts more than the anchor watch setting, the Alert 495 “Anchor Watch Setting” appears. 12-7 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.7 UKC (Under Keel Clearance) 12.7.1 UKC overview The UKC is the distance between the deepest point of the vessel's hull and the seabed. The UKC feature continuously checks ship's draught setting (UKC), and actual depth. When the depth gets shallower than the UKC, the Alert 634 “UKC Limit” is generated. And if the current depth is less than the echo alarm setting the echo alarm also is generated. Depth data is required to use the UKC function. Sea surface Draught Under keel clearance (UKC) Distance from keel to seabed Echo alarm setting Seabed Note: The sensor value shown is the depth to the transducer. Convert the value to the distance to the keel. 12.7.2 How to set UKC 1. Select the [UKC] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. 2. Use [Echo Alarm Limit] to set the distance for the echo alarm. To activate the alarm, click the [ON/OFF] button to show [ON]. 3. At [UKC Limit], set ship's UKC limit. To activate the UKC feature, click the [ON/OFF] button to show [ON]. 4. Use [Current Draught] to set your ship's draft. Be sure to change the setting whenever the draft changes. 5. Use [Type] to set how to show the seabed in the [UKC] window, [V-shape] or [Concave]. See the figure on the next page. 6. Click the [Apply] button to affect the changes. 12-8 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.7.3 UKC window The UKC window provides a visual graphic of the relationship between UKC, draft and current depth. The window can be shown or hidden as desired and located anywhere within the electronic chart area. To show the window, click [Show UKC] on the [UKC] page. To move the window, drag and drop. 100.2m 100.2m UKC Limit: V-shape seabed presentation UKC Limit: Concave seabed presentation 12-9 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.8 Divider The divider, available in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes with rhumb line navigation, measures the range, bearing and TTG (Time To Go) between points, like using a dividers on a paper chart. Only one divider can be displayed. The divider is neither saved nor shared among ECDIS units. 12.8.1 How to use the divider Do as shown below to get the range, bearing and TTG between points. Right click starting point Select New Divider Divider appears. Ship off center Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update New Divider 00.00 00.00 Drag circle to next point 00:07 00:07 5.9NM 051.2° 00:00 00:00 00.00 00.00 2.6NM 055.1° TTG between points Range and bearing between points You can also drag from an intermediate point to make another point. 2.75NM 358.6° 2.75NM 087.9° 2.75NM 087.9° Drag here 2.83NM 043.8° 2.83NM 043.8° 12-10 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS 12.8.2 Usage characteristics, limitations • The distance between points is shown to the hundredths decimal place up to 100 NM and to the tenths decimal place thereafter. • A maximum of 50 points can be inserted, and the maximum measurable distance between two points is 240.0 NM. • The TTG value is rounded to the nearest decimal place. Therefore, the displayed total TTG may not equal the sum of all the TTGs. • The TTG is measurable to 99:00. If the TTG is higher, the TTG indication is ">99:00". • The ship’s speed must be at least 0.5 kn to calculate TTG. • The divider cannot be used in latitude higher than 85°. • In the split screen display, the divider is viewable on both the main and sub views, but is operable only on the main view. 12.8.3 How to deactivate and erase the divider Get into the Voyage navigation or Voyage planning mode then right-click the screen to show the context-sensitive menu. Select [Clear Divider]. Ship off center Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update Clear Divider 12-11 12. NAVIGATION TOOLS This page is intentionally left blank. 12-12 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS With connection to a radar, the movement of a maximum of 100 radar-tracked targets can be shown on the chart. The data of received TT must have reference to ground. If the data does not meet that criteria, target vectors are not shown and the indications COG and SOG in the TT info data box show [missing]. 13.1 How to Show, Hide TT Do the following to show or hide the TT. 1. Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. 2. Click the indication circled in the figure below to show [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. Note: The TT display, together with the AIS and radar displays, can also be hidden from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Clear RADAR Info]. Ship off center Clear RADAR Info Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update Clear Divider 13-1 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS 13.2 TT Symbols and TT Attributes 13.2.1 TT symbols The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 62288. Symbol R Default color Green Name Past position point Description Marks a past position of a TT. Green Target under manual acquisition A target acquired manually is initially indicated with a dashed circle. Green Acquired target Red Dangerous target Green Reference target Red Lost target Thick solid circle with vector indicating steady state tracking (within three minutes after acquisition). Dangerous TT (thick solid circle). The ECDIS has its own definition for dangerous target limits, thus a radar may show a target as dangerous while ECDIS shows it as safe and vice versa. Used to calculate own ship's over-the-ground speed (echo-referenced speed) for ground stabilization. Mark a lost TT. Green Target selected TT selected to show its data. 01 13.2.2 TT symbol color and size The color and size of the TT symbol can be changed to your liking. Note that the color of the AIS symbol is also changed. 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Symbol Display] menu. 2. Click the [Targets] tab. 3. Select the color among, green, blue, black, magenta and brown, with the [Color] pull-down list. 4. Select the size from standard or small, with the [TT Size] pull-down list. 13-2 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS 13.3 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm A dangerous TT is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA and TCPA limits set on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools box]. A dangerous TT is displayed as a blinking target symbol in red until you acknowledge the "TT CPA/TCPA" alert. Then the target symbol is displayed in red color. When a TT whose CPA or TCPA is within the limits set here the buzzer sounds and the Alert 526 "TT CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box. 13.3.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits, enable, disable the alarm 1. Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. 2. If the CPA and TCPA alarm is disabled, click [CPA/TCPA] to activate it. CPA/TCPA alarm ON/OFF 3. Put the cursor on the CPA indication then use the scrollwheel or left button to set the CPA. CPA setting TCPA setting 4. Put the cursor on the TCPA indication then use the scrollwheel or left button to set the TCPA. 5. Click the [CPA/TCPA] alarm indication to enable or disable the alarm. The alarm is disabled when the CPA and TCPA indications are greyed out. 13.4 0.5NM 3min AUTO ACT ALL Lost TT Alarm A lost TT is displayed on the ECDIS as a blinking target symbol in red. You can set how the lost TT alarm sounds against lost targets as shown below. 13.4.1 How to enable, disable the lost TT alarm 1. Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. 2. Put the cursor on the Lost TGT indication then push the left button to display [OFF], [FILT], or [ALL]. OFF: Disable lost target alarm FILT: Alarm sounds against TT meeting a specific criteria. ALL: Alarms sounds against all lost TT. When a lost TT is within the limits set here the buzzer sounds and the Alert 527 "TT Lost" appears in the [Alert] box. 13-3 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS 13.4.2 How to set the lost TT alarm filter If you are in a congested area the lost TT alarm may sound against many TT. In this case, you can prevent the alarm from sounding against TT that are under a certain range and/or speed. 1. Right-click the setting of [Lost TGT] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box, select [Setting] and open the [Setting.2] page. (The [Setting.2] page can also be opened from the menu (MENU[TT/ AIS][Setting.1][Setting.2].) 2. In the [TT Lost Target Filter] window, set the maximum range to track a target and the minimum ship speed to track. MAX Range: The maximum range at which to track a lost target. A TT not within this range is not tracked. MIN Ship Speed: A TT whose speed is slower than set here does not trigger the lost target alarm. 3. Click the [ON/OFF] button to show ON or OFF as appropriate. 13.5 How to Set Vector Length and Vector Motion Ground stabilization and sea stabilization Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the [SPD] page from the [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System Settings] menu. Select [Bottom] for ground stabilization or [Water] for sea stabilization. The Vector mode indication shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [True-G] or [True-S] Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems unsatisfactory, enter set and drift corrections. True vector In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor remain stationary on the radar overlay with vector length zero. But in the presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly entered. 13-4 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS In) the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization (True-G) and sea stabilization (True-S). The stabilization mode is automatically selected according to speed selection, as shown in the table below. Speed selection True vector mode LOG(WT) True-S LOG(BT) True-G POSN True-G REF True-G MAN True-S MAN w/set & drift True-G Relative vector Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. (Dotted lines in the figure are for explanation only.) Buoy Buoy Target on collision course Own ship True vectors in head-up mode Target on collision course Own ship Relative vectors in head-up mode To set the vector, click the vector time and vector reference indications in the [TT/AIS] page to set them. Vector time Vector reference 13-5 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS 13.6 How to Display TT Data 13.6.1 How to display target data for individual TT By Control Unit Put the cursor on a TT then push the TARGET DATA key. By trackball Click the target for which you want to show its data. TT data To erase TT data from a data box, click the appropriate close data button. The basic TT data display shows the following information: • Target's number. The same number as the matching target on the radar. When a target is erased the number will not be reused until the power is re-set or more than 100 targets are acquired. • Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship • True speed (SOG) and true course (COG) of the target • CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed the closest point and the TT is going away from own ship. • Bow Closest Range (BCR) and Bow Closest Time (BCT) Title bar TT No. Bearing Range Course over ground Speed over ground CPA TCPA Bow crossing range Bow crossing time 13-6 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS 13.7 Displaying Past Positions of TT The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of TT. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset number is reached. If a TT changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line. You can set the plot interval and the presentation mode on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box, at the locations circled in the illustration below. 13.7.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position reference Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Click the indications circled in the figure below to set the plot interval (or disable the display) and the past position reference (true or relative). Plot interval, past position display ON/OFF Past position reference 13.7.2 Past position point attributes You can define past position point attributes for TT by points and style. 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Symbol Display] menu. 2. Click the [Targets] tab. 3. At [TT Points], select the number of points to show. 4. At [Style], select the style for the past position points. The choices are [Points] and [Points and Dots]. 13-7 13. TRACKED TARGET (TT) FUNCTIONS 13.8 TT Source The TT source can be either a radar antenna or the TTM sentence. Normally, select the radar antenna chosen to display radar echoes as the TT source. To automatically select the radar currently displaying radar echoes as the TT source, check the [SYNC. ANT] box on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. The TT source is either antenna or TTM data CCRP button With SYNC. ANT checked, the antenna chosen to display radar echoes is automatically selected as the TT source. TT source and usage characteristics • Antenna (RAS001 to RAS010) or other sensor (OTR001 to OTR010) whose SFID (Service Flow ID) starts with [RA]. Antenna example: RAS001 is shown as [ANT_1], RAS002 is shown as [ANT_2]. Other sensor example: The SFID set at installation; for example, RA0201. • With [SYNC. ANT] checked, the antenna selected on the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box is marked with an asterisk. • With [SYNC. ANT] checked, the checkmark is removed when a selection is made the drop-down box. • SYNC. ANT is inoperative if no antenna is registered. • The reference position for the TTM sentence is the antenna position. • The [CCRP/ANT] button in the TT/AIS page of the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box selects the reference position to use in the TTM sentence, either CCRP or antenna. Note: When the radar picture from the FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0 series radar (IEC 623388 Ed. 2 compliant) is fed via LAN, there may be a difference between the radar picture and the TT position. If this occurs, set the reference position as CCRP with the [CCRP/ANT] button in the TT/AIS page of the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. 13-8 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.1 Introduction An AIS transponder can be connected to the ECDIS to display AIS targets received from an AIS transponder. The ECDIS can store up to 2,000 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this buffer becomes full of AIS targets, Alert 533 “AIS Target Capacity 100%” is generated to alert you that the storage buffer is full. The storage buffer contains automatic dead reckoning for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed Over Ground (SOG), Course Over Ground (COG), Rate Of Turn (ROT) and heading. The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, etc. The CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS targets. This radar can activate 500 AIS targets. The Alert 535 “AIS Target Activate 100%” appears when 500 AIS targets are activated. The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course of tracked AIS target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the ECDIS defines which AIS targets are in tracking or lost. When you acknowledge the lost target alert, the AIS symbol is removed from the ECDIS display. Type of Ship Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG < 3 kn Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG 3kn Class A: 0kn SOG < 14kn Class A: 14kn SOG 23kn Class A: SOG > 23kn Class B: “CS” SOG < 2kn Class B: “CS” SOG 2kn Class B: “SO” 0 kn SOG < 2kn Class B: “SO” 2 kn SOG < 14kn Class B: “SO” 14 kn SOG 23kn Class B: “SO” SOG > 23kn Class A and Class B: no SOG available AIS SAR aircraft AIS aid to navigation AIS base station AIS search and rescue transponder IMO nominal reporting interval 3 min Lost target indication reporting interval 10 min 10 s 50 s 10 s 6s 2s 3 min 30 s 3 min 30 s 15 s 5s N/A 10 s 3 min 10 s N/A 50 s 30 s 10 s 10 min 150 s 10 min 150 s 75 s 25 s 10 min 50 s 10 min 50 s 10 min An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either Class A or Class B. Additionally the AIS transponder receives messages other than messages from ships: • AIS Base station • AIS on airborne SAR craft • AIS on ATON (AIS aid to navigation) 14-1 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS There can be several hundreds or several thousands AIS targets, and of those only a few will be significant for your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the ECDIS display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. Initially any new AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not-active (="sleeping"). Such non-active targets are shown with a small triangle. The operator can pick any AIS target and change it from non-active to active. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle with speed vector, headline, rot indicator, etc. Further, the operator can pick active AIS targets and change their status to non-active. An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached. When 95% of the operator-set limit is reached for displayed AIS targets, the Alert 530 "AIS Target Display 95%" appears. When the operator-set limit is reached, the Alert 531 "AIS Target Display 100%" appears. An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached. The Alert 532 "AIS Target Capacity 95%" is given when 95 percent of 2,000 targets are in the storage buffer and the Alert 533 "AIS Target Capacity 100%" is given when 2,000 targets or more are in the storage buffer. The system releases the AIS Alerts "536 CPA/TCPA" and 537 "AIS Lost". Only active AIS targets generate alerts. The operator can enable or disable AIS target alerts as desired. The feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets which need supervision. The ECDIS further eases the task of the operator by automatically changing non-active targets to active targets, if they meet the dangerous target limits set by CPA and TCPA. 14.2 AIS Symbols Then the AIS is turned on, AIS targets are marked with appropriate AIS symbol as below. Symbol Default color Green Name Green AIS tracked target past position point Sleeping AIS target Green Activated AIS target Green Activated target, true scale symbol Red Dangerous AIS target ABC 14-2 Description Marks a past position of an AIS target. Denote sleeping AIS symbol. (Lines are thinner than Active AIS symbol.) Denote active AIS target, with vector. Lines are thicker than sleeping AIS symbol. Vessel name is shown (default setting). Active AIS target with symbol shown in true scale. Target's CPA and TCPA are within the CPA and TCPA settings. Vector shown. 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS Symbol Default color Green No heading/COG target Green Heading-turn indicator AIS symbols are shown in a broken lines in the following cases: • No water or ground tracking speed of your ship, or there is no speed data. All AIS symbols are shown in broken lines. • No speed data from AIS target. The symbol of the corresponding AIS target is shown in broken lines. A target with neither a reported heading nor COG is oriented toward the top of the operational display area. Shows target's direction of turning. Green AIS ATON Aids to navigation Green Virtual AIS ATON Denote virtual AIS Green SAR-AIRCRAFT Green AIS base station Green AIS SART Green AIS select symbol Target selected to display its data. Red AIS lost symbol X is superimposed on the AIS target symbol and is flashing. Name Description ABC ABC Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately displayed. Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when the heading is changed from the Head-up mode. Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the Alert 380 "AIS COM Error" appears in the [Alert] box. Check the AIS transponder. Note 4: A target is declared a lost target if it is not detected in five consecutive reporting periods. Note 5: The color of the AIS symbols can be changed. See section 13.2.2. 14-3 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.3 Voyage Data Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught and crew, on the [Voyage Data] page in the [NAV Status] menu. The data entered here is reflected to the AIS transponder. Note: [Persons], the total number of persons onboard, should be set at the AIS transponder. Some AIS transponders may not accept this input from the ECDIS. 1. Open the MENU then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Voyage Data] tab. 2. Click the [Navigational Status] drop-down list then select your navigational status, from the list below. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Underway using engine At anchor Not under command Restricted maneuverability Constrained by her draught Moored Aground Engaged in fishing Under way sailing Reserved for high speed craft Reserved for wing in ground Reserved for future use (x3) AIS-SART (active) Not defined 3. Enter ship's draught (0.0 - 25.5 (m)) at [MAX Draught]. 4. Enter your ETA at [ETA], in UTC. Day: two digits Month: Three-character abbreviation Year: Four digits 5. Enter your destination at [Destination], using a maximum of 20 characters. 6. Click the [Save] button to register the settings. The settings are sent to the AIS transponder. 14-4 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.4 How to Show, Hide AIS Targets Targets that are being tracked by an AIS transponder can also be displayed on the ECDIS display. To show or hide AIS target, select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/ NAV Tools] box. Click the indication circled in the figure below to display [DISP OFF], [DISP FILT], [DISP ALL] or [FUNC OFF]. DISP OFF: Turns off the AIS display. (Tracking continues internally.) DISP FILT: Targets are shown according to the AIS DISP filter settings, on the [TT/ AIS] menu. DISP ALL: Shows all AIS targets within the range set. FUNC OFF: Deactivates the AIS function. The maximum number of AIS targets on the ECDIS display is 1000. The number of AIS targets on display can be limited by filtering AIS targets (option DISP FIL), then the max. number of AIS target on display is user defined. See section 14.5. Note: The TT display, together with the AIS and radar displays, can also be hidden from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Clear RADAR Info]. Ship off center Clear RADAR Info Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update Clear Divider 14-5 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.5 How to Filter AIS Targets 1. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools box], select [Setting] and open the [Setting.1] page. (The [Setting.1] page can also be opened from the menu (MENU[TT/ AIS][Setting][Setting.1].) 2. In the [AIS DISP Filter] window, set each item referring to the descriptions below. • Click the button of [Class A], [Class B] and [Base Station] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show those targets. • Set the maximum range with [Max Range]. Any target beyond the range set here will not be displayed. • Set the ship speed for AIS targets, with [Min Ship Speed]. Any AIS target whose speed is lower than that set here will not be displayed. 3. Click the [Save] button to save settings. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box. Note: AIS and tracked target viewing limitations are as follows: • AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,000,001 for S57 charts. • AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,900,001 for ARCS charts. This allows display of AIS and tracked targets on top of the largest scale ocean charts (original scale 1:3,500,000) when they are zoomed to "overscale". 14.6 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm A dangerous AIS target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA and TCPA limits set in the information area. A dangerous AIS target is displayed as a blinking target symbol in red as long as you acknowledge the "AIS CPA/TCPA" alert. Then the target symbol is displayed in red color. When a target whose CPA or TCPA is within the limits set here the buzzer sounds and the Alert 536 "AIS CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box. 14-6 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 1. Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. CPA setting DISP ALL CPA/TCPA Alarm ON/OFF 0.5NM 4min AUTO ACT FILT TCPA setting 2. If the CPA and TCPA values are blank, click [CPA/TCPA] to show them. 3. Put the cursor on the CPA indication then use the scrollwheel or left button to set the CPA. 4. Put the cursor on the TCPA indication then use the scrollwheel or left button to set the TCPA. 5. Click the [CPA/TCPA] alarm indication to enable or disable the alarm. The alarm is disabled when the CPA and TCPA indications are greyed out. 14-7 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.7 Automatic Activation of Sleeping Targets 14.7.1 Enabling, disabling automatic activation of sleeping targets Enable or disable the automatic activation of sleeping targets from the [TT/AIS] page of the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Click the indication below to enable or disable automatic activation. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to get automatic activation of AIS targets. DISP ALL 0.5NM 4min AUTO ACT FILT ON/OFF for automatic activation of sleeping targets OFF: Turn off automatic activation. AUTO ACT FILT: Activate the sleeping targets that meet the criteria set in section 14.7.2. AUTO ACT ALL: Activate all sleeping targets. 14.7.2 Conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets You can get automatic activation of sleeping AIS targets. Open the [TT/AIS] menu, select [Setting] then click the [Setting.1] tab. Max Range: Set the max. range at which to get automatic activation. Min Ship Speed: Set the minimum ship speed to get automatic activation. Except Class B: Exclude class B AIS targets from automatic activation. Be sure the label of the [OFF/ON] button shows [ON] for the items to use automatic activation. 14-8 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.8 How to Sleep All Activated Targets You can sleep all activated targets. Open the [TT/AIS] menu, select [Setting] and then click the [Setting.1] tab. Click the [Sleep All Targets] button to sleep all activated targets. 14.9 AIS Lost Target Alarm If AIS data is not received from a vessel within a certain interval, the corresponding target becomes a lost target. The target is marked with the lost target symbol, which is red and flashing. The buzzer sounds and the Alert 537 "AIS Lost" appears in the Alert box. After the target is acknowledged, the lost target is erased from the screen. If Alert 537 is not acknowledged, lost AIS target symbol will be automatically removed from display. In case of a sleeping AIS target, the buzzer does not sound. 14.9.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alarm 1. Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. DISP ALL 0.5NM 4min AUTO ACT FILT 2. Put the cursor on the Lost TGT indication then push the left button to display [OFF], [FILT], or [ALL]. OFF: Disable lost target alarm FILT: Alarm sounds against targets meeting a specific criteria. ALL: Alarms sounds against all lost targets. 14-9 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.9.2 How to set the AIS lost target alarm filter You can select what AIS targets to exclude from the lost target alarm, on the [Setting. 2] page in the [TT/AIS] menu. Max Range: Set the max. range at which a target must be to be declared a lost target. Min Ship Speed: Set the minimum ship speed a target must obtain to be declared a lost target. Except Class B: Exclude class B AIS targets from the AIS lost target alarm. 14.10 Vector Length, Vector Stabilization in True Motion Mode Ground stabilization and sea stabilization Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the [SPD] page from the [System Sensor Settings] or [Local System Settings] menu. Select [Bottom] for ground stabilization or [Water] for sea stabilization. The Vector mode indication shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [True-G] or [True-S]. Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems unsatisfactory, enter set and drift corrections.. True vector In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor remain stationary on the radar overlay with vector length zero. But in the presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly entered. In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization (TrueG) and sea stabilization (True-S). The stabilization mode is automatically selected according to speed selection, as shown in the table on the next page. Manual selection is available with [Stabilization Mode] in the [SPD] page: [Bottom], [True-G], [Water], [True-S]. 14-10 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS Speed selection LOG (WT) LOG (BT) POSN REF MAN MAN w/set & drift True vector mode True-S True-G True-G True-G True-S True-G Relative vector Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. Vector time and vector reference can be set from the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/ NAV Tools] box. Click the vector length and vector reference indications to set them. Vector time Vector reference DISP ALL 0.5NM 4min AUTO ACT FILT 14.11 How to Display AIS Target Data Standard data Put the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the left button. Title bar MMSI Vessel name Bearing Range Course over ground Speed over ground CPA Normal/Expand button Scroll buttons Close button Heading Rate of turn TCPA Bow cross range Bow cross time Position Navigation status 14-11 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS Expanded data Put the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the left button. Click the [Expand] button on the [AIS Info] box to show expanded AIS data. Title bar MMSI Vessel name Bearing Range Course over ground Speed over ground CPA Normal/Expand button Scroll buttons Close button Heading Rate of turn TCPA Bow cross range Bow cross time Position Navigation status Position sensor Position sensor accuracy (HIGH, LOW) Call sign IMO No. Length Width Draught Destination ETA AIS version no. Ship & Cargo type 14-12 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS 14.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of activated AIS targets. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line. Past Positions (or the length of trace) and presentation mode can be set on the information area, as shown in the next section. a) Ship turning b) Ship running c) Ship reduced d) Ship increased straight speed speed 14.12.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, set past position reference Select the [TT/AIS] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Click the indications circled in the figure at right to set the plot interval (or disable the display) and the past position bearing reference (true or relative). Plot interval, display ON/OFF Past position bearing reference DISP ALL 0.5NM 4min AUTO ACT FILT Note: The number of past position points and points style can be selected on the [Targets] page. See section 13.7.2. 14.13 How to Display Own Ship Data You can see own ship's data on the [Own Ship] page in the [NAV Status] menu. Open the menu then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Own Ship] tab. MMSI: 457804356 Name: FURUNO Voyager Call Sign: JZ5890312 Type: 0 Description: All ships of this type Length(LOA): 223.2 m Width: 31.8 m Ref Bow: 3.3 m Ref Port: 2.8 m 14-13 14. AIS TARGET FUNCTIONS This page is intentionally left blank. 14-14 15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 15.1 AIS Safety Messages You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination (MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS. 15.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message Note: If you are using the Trackball Control Unit RCU-026, display the software keyboard ([DISP] button, [ cedure. ], [ON] on the InstantAccess bar) before starting this pro- 15-1 15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 1. In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Message] dialog box. MMSI of receiver (MMSI or “Broadcast”) MMSI of sender Type of message (Binary, Safety) Date received Status of message (Read, Unread) 2. Click the [New] button. 3. At [Send to], select where to send the message. Select [Broadcast] to send the message to all AISequipped ships within communication range, or select [MMSI] and enter the MMSI of the ship where to send the message. 4. At [Type], select the type of message, [Safety] or [Binary] (routine). 5. At [Channel], select the channel to use to send the message. 6. At [Description], enter the text of your message. The no. of characters available depends on the type of message. Safety message broadcast: 161 characters Binary message broadcast: 156 characters Safety message addressed to MMSI: 156 characters Binary message addressed to MMSI: 151characters 7. Click the [Send] button to send the message. 15.1.2 How to manage received and sent AIS safety messages When an AIS message is received, the alert 539 “AIS Message Received” appears. Do the following to view the message. 15-2 15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES How to display the Message dialog box, view a message Click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] button as appropriate. Click a message to view its contents. How to delete a received or sent message 1. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] as appropriate. 2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.) 3. Click the [Delete] button. Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete. How to delete received, sent messages permanently 1. Click the [Trash Box] button. 2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.) 3. Click the [Delete] button. 15.2 Navtex Messages Navtex (Navigational Telex) is an international automated medium frequency directprinting service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and forecasts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships. Navtex messages can be received and read in the Voyage navigation mode. 15-3 15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 15.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages Do the following to display a NAVTEX message: 1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 23:59 12 Apr 2012 13:51 11 Apr 2012 12:12 11 Apr 2012 10:33 11 Apr 2012 10:11 11 Apr 2012 181740 UTC JUL 10 JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1555/2011 HOKKAIDO, S. COAST NW OF ERIMA GUNNERY EXERCISE 2300Z to 0830Z 2. Click the message to view. The text of the message appears in the [Description] box. 15-4 15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 15.2.2 How to manage received Navtex messages How to delete received Navtex messages 1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Trash Box] button. 3. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.) 4. Click the [Delete] button. Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete. How to deleted received Navtex messages permanently 1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of [Date] then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.) 3. Click the [Delete] button. 15-5 15. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES This page is intentionally left blank. 15-6 16. RADAR OVERLAY 16.1 Introduction The radar overlay has the radar echo image overlaid on the ECDIS chart display, in the Voyage navigation mode. The radar overlay video is received over LAN from the FAR-2xx7 or FCR-2xx9 series radar. Radar echo This ECDIS has many features to support exact match in scale and orientation of the chart and radar echo image. Exact match of the radar echo image and chart is an essential security feature. If the radar echo image and the chart display match, then the mariner can rely on what he sees and the mariner also gets a very good confirmation that his navigation sensors (such as gyro and position receivers) operate properly and accurately. However, if the mariner is unable to achieve exact match, it is a very strong indication that something is wrong and he should not rely on what he sees. If a radar echo and a chart object occupy the same geographical position, the one selected as having priority (with [Priority] on the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box) is displayed. Selected scale of displayed chart also defines scale of radar overlay. When you change the chart scale, the scale of the radar overlay is automatically changed. The table below shows the standard scale and equivalent radar range. Radar range (nm) Standard scale Radar range (nm) Standard scale 0.25 1:4,000 6 1:90,000 0.5 1:8,000 12 1:180,000 0.75 1:12,000 24 1:350,000 1.5 1:22,000 48 1:700,000 3 1:45,000 96 1:1,500,000 16-1 16. RADAR OVERLAY 16.2 How to Setup the Radar Overlay Radar echoes can be output to the ECDIS and shown on its display. Like details on S57 charts, the radar overlay can be displayed or removed from the chart display. The transparency of the echo display can be set from the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. To activate and setup the radar overlay, do the following: 1. Select the [Echo] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. 2. Click the [ON/OFF] button at [Display] to show [ON] (radar overlay ON) to activate the overlay. "Status: OK" appears under [Antenna] if the radar signal is being received. "Status: No Data" is displayed if there is no radar signal. Note: The TT display, together with the AIS and radar displays, can also be hidden from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Clear RADAR Info]. Status: OK Ship off center Clear RADAR Info Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update Clear Divider 3. [Echo Level] adjusts the sensitivity of the radar picture. To adjust, put the cursor on the slider bar and roll the scrollwheel. 4. [Density] controls the "see through" behavior of the radar overlay. [100%] overlays the radar echo on the chart without modification. "25%" displays radar echoes somewhat faintly, and "75%" displays radar echoes very faintly. It is recommended to use 25% or 50% when navigating narrow channels, so as not to conceal landmasses. 5. [Priority] sets the priority between chart object and radar echo when an object and an echo share the same position. Select the one that is to have priority. 6. Click the [Antenna] drop-down list to select the radar that is to feed radar echoes. 16-2 16. RADAR OVERLAY 16.3 Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart There are several reasons why the radar echo image and chart display do not match exactly. The mismatch is a combination of several reasons and removing one reason doesn't solve the mismatch perfectly. There is a fundamental difference between the radar echo image and corresponding chart feature. The radar echo is a reflection from the real life target and the actual position of the real life target is the front edge of the radar echo. Therefore, the radar echo should start from the chart feature and exist as far as the radar pulse length goes. How to compensate for bearing error Bearing error occurs in the following instances: • Gyro error • Inaccurate chart • Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset) How to compensate for position error Position is caused by the following: • Inaccurate position • Position offset • Inaccurate chart • Improper installation parameters (conning position offset, position receiver antenna offset, radar overlay range offset) 16-3 16. RADAR OVERLAY 16.4 Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT Mismatch There are several reasons why the radar echo image and tracked target symbols do not match exactly. 1. Different gyro value at radar overlay and at ECDIS. 2. Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset, radar overlay range offset, conning position offset). The example below shows how different gyro value set at radar overlay and at ECDIS affect the display of the ECDIS. Different gyro value at radar and ECDIS 16-4 Equal gyro value at radar and ECDIS 17. WEATHER OVERLAY 17.1 What is the Weather Overlay? The weather overlay, available in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes, provides an animated display of weather information over time for the area selected. The information may include wave, ocean current, wind, temperature, cloud coverage, and precipitation rate. Spot weather information, which provides cursor-picked weather reports, is also provided. The weather overlay is driven by GRIB (Gridded Information in Binary) data files. (This equipment supports GRB2 (2nd edition) files.) GRIB is the format used by the world’s meteorological institutes to transport and process global weather data. (GRB2 files are output direct from Numerical Weather Prediction programs, which is usually the US GFS (General Forecast System). Other models are used, however no one model is more reliable or accurate than another. GRIB files are sent without review, thus there is no assurance that the data are accurate or correct. They are intended as an aid to weather forecasting - use them in conjunction with other weather data such as GMDSS forecasts and Navtex broadcasts. GRIB forecasts are useful for short term planning. The US GFS mathematical model, for example, is run four times a day, and produces forecasts for up to 16 days in advance, but with decreasing reliability over time. The model calculates on a 3-D grid with horizontal spacing of approx. 27 km on a 1/2 degree grid - namely approx. 30 mile spacing. Global forecasts (GRIB files) are available through a wide variety of sources; for example, e-mail, FTP, and web browser, and most are free to the user. 17.2 How to Activate, Deactivate the Weather Overlay To activate the weather overlay, get into the Voyage navigation mode then click the Weather overlay button on the InstantAccess bar. The overlay is active when the background color of the button is light blue. Note: The weather overlay and manual update mode (If active) are activated or deactivated reciprocally. Weather overlay button 17-1 17. WEATHER OVERLAY When the weather overlay is made active, two weather overlay dialog boxes appear, [Weather Overlay Control] and [Weather Overlay]. The [Weather Overlay Control] dialog box selects and plays back weather data files. The [Weather Overlay] dialog box controls what weather information to display and how to display it. Weather Overlay Control dialog box Weather Overlay dialog box To deactivate the weather overlay, click the [Clear] button on the [Weather Overlay Control] dialog box to remove the weather overlay display then click the Weather overlay button on the InstantAccess bar. 17.3 How to Select, Playback a Weather Data File 1. Copy the weather data file (.grb extension) to a USB flash memory and insert the drive into a USB port on the PCU. 2. Activate the weather overlay then click the [Open] button on the [Weather Overlay Control] dialog box to show the [OPEN FILE] window. Click the [Volume select] drop-down list to select the USB flash memory. 17-2 17. WEATHER OVERLAY 3. Select the weather data file then click the [Open] button. The message "Now Preparing... "appears while the file is being read, and "Now unmounting the media" appears when the reading is completed. The [Weather Overlay Control] dialog box shows the start and end times of the file. If the file is too large, the message "An error occurred. The file size is too large." appears. Select a smaller file - the maximum file size is 100 MB. If there is a problem with the file, the message "An error occurred while reading weather data file." appears. Select another file. Open selected file Start and end time of GRIB file Clear current file Count up time Slider bar (Select playback start point.) Time-step selection Close the weather overlay dialog boxes Play button 4. To select a specific start time, drag the slider bar to show that time on the Count up time indication. (The time and date can also be entered manually. Use the software keyboard to enter the time. Click the date to show the [Set date] dialog box to select the date.) 5. Use the [Step] drop-down list to select the time step interval, which defines how often to refresh (non-real time) the weather display. The choices are 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, and 6 hours. 6. To play or pause the playback, click the Play () button. 7. To close both weather overlay dialog boxes, click the [Close] button. (The weather overlay remains active.) To redisplay them, click the Weather overlay button. 17.4 How to Set up the Weather Overlay The weather overlay is set up from the [Weather Overlay] dialog box, in the Voyage planning mode or the Navigation planning mode (overlay must be active). 1. Select a display from the [Overlay Informa- Overlay information drop-down list Overlay type attributes ON/OFF Color legend (changes with overlay type) Isobar display ON/OFF Information density adjustment Hide weather overlay temporarily 17-3 17. WEATHER OVERLAY tion] drop-down list. The choices are [Wind], [Temperature], [Cloud Coverage], [Precipitation Rate], [Wave], and [Ocean Current]. (The weather data file must contain the data selected in order to display it.) 2. The [Color] checkbox, when checked, provides a color presentation of the weather item selected. (Unchecking the checkbox erases the color presentation.) 3. The [Wind], [Wave] and [Ocean Current] displays can show windbarbs (wind) or arrows (waves, ocean currents) to indicate the direction of respective item. Check [Arrow] to show the windbarbs or arrows. 4. For any display, show or hide the isobar with [Isobar]. The isobar is the black curved line in the right figure and it connects points of equal atmospheric pressure. “H” appears in the case of high atmospheric pressure; “L” for low atmospheric pressure. 5. Set the information density with the [Information Density] bar. Drag the bar to required setting. The figure below shows several information density settings and the resulting displays. Full dense Medium Full sparse 6. To hide the weather overlay temporarily, click and hold down the [Hide Weather] button. Release the button to redisplay the overlay. 17-4 17. WEATHER OVERLAY 17.5 Weather Overlay Examples 17.5.1 Wind display The wind display provides wind speed and direction. Windbarbs show both wind speed and direction. The relative wind speed is shown in colors, from blue (low) to magenta (high). How to read the windbarbs Windbarbs represent both wind speed and direction. The windbarbs point in the direction from which the wind is blowing. Lines and filled pennants on the windbarbs indicate speed. • A half line represents speed from 1.49 to 4.08 kn • A full line represents speed from 4.09 to 6.68 kn • A filled pennant represents speed from 24.69 to 27.28 kn 22.09 to 24.69 kn wind at 100° east-east southeast Wind from south at 24.69 to 27.28 kn Wind from southeast at 29.97 to 32.0 kn Example windbarbs 17-5 17. WEATHER OVERLAY 17.5.2 Temperature display The temperature display provides air temperature information, in colors from blue (low) to red (high). The entire area in the figure below has moderately high temperatures. 17.5.3 Cloud coverage display The cloud coverage display shows areas obscured by clouds, in transparent (low) to light gray (high). In the figure below, clouds are covering the landmass and body of water at the top left corner. 17.5.4 Precipitation rate display The precipitation rate display shows accumulated precipitation over an hour, in colors from blue (low precipitation) to red (high precipitation). In the figure below light-toheavy rain is present at the top left corner. 17-6 17. WEATHER OVERLAY 17.5.5 Waves display The waves display shows the average height of the highest waves, in colors from green (low) to red (high). The length of an arrow indicates wave height. The arrow points in the direction of the main swell. Arrow length and wave height (m) Less than 1 Less than 3 Less than 5 Less than 9 Higher than 9 (No arrow) Less than 7 17.5.6 Ocean current display The ocean current display provides ocean current direction and speed information. The arrows show both direction and speed. Speed is also shown with colors, from transparent (low) to red (high). The color of the currents in the figure below indicate that their speed is low. Arrow length and current speed (kn) Less than 0.06 Less than 0.25 Less than 0.97 Less than 1.45 Less than 1.94 Less than 2.43 Less than 2.91 Less than 3.4 Less than 3.88 Less than 4.37 More than 4.37 (No arrow) 17-7 17. WEATHER OVERLAY 17.6 Weather Spot Information You can get various weather information for any area with the weather spot information feature, in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes. The weather overlay must be active and position data available. 1. Right-click the location for which you want to know its weather to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Weather INFO] to show the [Weather Spot Information] window. The window shows [N/A] where there is no data for the corresponding weather item. Item 06 Dec 2013 0.1kn 327.8° Time POSN Wind Temperature Cloud Coverage Precipitation Rate Wave Ocean Current Pressure Ship off center Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update New Divider Weather INFO Description Time and date of weather forecast. L/L position of weather forecast. Wind speed (kn) and direction (degree). Temperature, in °C. The fraction of the sky obscured by clouds, expressed in percentage. The amount of precipitation (rain, snow, etc.) in millimeters to fall in one hour. Wave height, in meters. Current velocity (kn) and direction (degree). Atmospheric pressure, expressed in hPa. 3. To erase the window, click the Close button at the top right corner of the window. 17.7 Summary of Weather Overlay Viewability, Operability and Operating Mode The table below summarizes the operability and viewability of the weather overlay according to the operating mode. Item Activate weather overlay View weather overlay Select weather data file Operate weather overlay related dialog boxes Deactivate weather overlay Restore weather overlay when switching from chart mode or playback mode Weather spot information window *Weather display previously active 17-8 Operating mode NAVI PLAN Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes* Yes* Yes Yes 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS 18.1 CCRS This ECDIS employs a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) for the acquisition, processing, storage and distribution of sensor information. The CCRS ensures that all parts of the system uses the same source and values, e.g., speed through water, heading, etc. The illustration below shows the CCRS diagram. Processor Unit Processor Unit CCRS CCRS CCRS SENSOR ADAPTER Sensors The CCRS processes IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2 data sentences. No other types of data (video signals, etc.) are processed. Check for validity, legitimacy The system checks received sentences for validity and legitimacy. Validity check: A sentences’s checksum, status (A/V), Mode indicator and setting values are checked. (If checksum error is found, the sentence is dis-affirmed.) Legitimacy check: The range and accuracy of a sentence is checked. If the check for both is OK a valid flag results. If either is invalid, the invalid flag is given. Types of CCRS There are two types of CCRS: System and Local. The System CCRS integrates all navigation devices. In the Local CCRS each navigation device operates independently. Representative sensors If the system has multiple like sensors, the CCRS selects the representative sensor. Generally, the system uses common representative sensors; however, independent representative sensors (local representative sensors) can also be used. 18-1 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS 18.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors The operator can choose navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the applicable page in the [System Sensor Settings] and [Local Sensor Settings] menus. To access these menus, right-click the [Sensor information] box then click [Open MENU]. 18.2.1 Sensors menu description HDG page GYRO2 Passed GYO0001 GYO0002 GYRO2 2.1° Passed Local sensor HDG page Sensors: Select the heading sensor to use. Analog Gyro: No use. Manual: Set heading manually when there is no heading sensor available. Gyro Correction: Check to enable gyro correction. Enter correction value in box. Not shown in system sensor [HDG] page. Valid for sensor activated on database. SPD page SPD: Integrity: Passed Local sensor SPD page Stabilization Mode: Select the water stabilization mode: Select [Bottom] for ground stabilization, or select [Water] for sea stabilization. Sensor Type: Select [GPS] in case of a GPS navigator, or [LOG] for speed log. Data Source: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the [Sensors] list, or click [Manual] to enter speed manually. Use [Manual] when no speed source is available. 18-2 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS Reference SPD: If checked, radar is used as the source for speed and course. Checkmark is valid when the speed measurement method is “ground”. Not available with system sensor. Set and drift: Check the [Set Drift] checkbox to manually set speed and course of drift. Note that you can select manual drift only if you deactivate the AIS function. Checkmark is valid when the speed measurement method is “water”. Not available with system sensor. Angle = Difference between heading and COG Spd = Speed component of the drift vector Cse = Course component of the drift vector Vector defined by (SOG and COG) is equal to vector sum of vectors defined by (SPD and HDG) and (set and drift). North cse SOG COG HDG spd SPD an gle SPD: HDG SOG: COG: spd: cse: angle: water speed heading of ship speed over ground course over ground speed of drift course of drift difference between HDG and COG POSN (Position) page FILT LAT: 35°15.743’N LON: 139°50.064’E Integrity: Passed DGPS LAT: 35°15.743’N LON: 139°50.064’E Integrity: Passed The sensor label (here GPS001) indicates the name of the sensor. A status indication, Prim or Second, denotes the priority of the sensor. Latitude and longitude values will appear in red for position sensor error. Position sensors have priority, which is indicated as Prim or Second Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary or off. If a position sensor is changed from secondary to primary state and another position sensor was chosen as primary, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically selected to secondary state. When the position source is changed based on priorities and signal validity to another position source, then you get the Alert 472 "Position Source Change". 18-3 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS COG/SOG page Select the source (GPS receiver) for speed over the ground and course over the ground. FILT Not Available Other sensors page To show the [Other Sensors] page, open the menu and select [Other Sensor Settings]. 1.9 12.1° 123.1m 123.2m 123.2m 22.7°C 37.3° 3.2kn Wind: Wind speed (kn or m/s) and direction ([Apparent], [North] (True wind, reference to North), or [Theoretical] (True wind, reference to heading)) are displayed. See section 18.9. Data source can be selected among, True, Relative, Theoretical, and Theoretical (T) and Relative. Depth Below Trans: Depth from hull at bow and aft to bottom. A depth alert value may be entered to alert you when the depth is within the value set. Temperature: Water surface temperature. Water Current: Tide at own ship’s position. 18-4 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS 18.3 Source of Position The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The position sensors have either primary or secondary as input for their calculation. DGPS position sensors are considered more accurate than other position sensors. The latitude and longitude position is shown at the top-right position on the chart display, and in the example below the position source is DGPS. Other indications that may be displayed in the position area are as follows: • DR: Shown in yellow when position source is dead reckoning. • DGPS, GPS: Name of position source. Position sensor selected as high priority Valid data exists No valid data exists Position sensor selected as low priority Position used by this system Valid data exists No valid data exists Selected Backup dead reckoning If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data, the system immediately generates the Alert 472 "Position Source Change". 18-5 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS 18.4 CCRP, Primary, Secondary and Pivot Positions of Own Ship This system displays position in one of four methods • CCRP position: CCRP • Primary position: Position generated by position source chosen as highest priority. • Secondary position: Position generated by position source chosen as 2nd highest priority. • Pivot position: Ship’s pivot point position. The position source for primary position of own ship is chosen as Primary on the [POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu. The position source for secondary position of own ship is chosen as Secondary on the [POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu. Secondary position of own ship is not available as latitude/longitude value for the user. Position sensor selected as Secondary No valid data Valid data exists Position sensor selected as priority lower than Secondary No valid data Valid data exists Secondary position of own ship is is not valid Past ship’s track can be plotted on the chart with reference to CCRP, Primary, Secondary or Pivot position. You can control their visibility of the tracks, etc. from the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu, shown in the right figure. In this example, past tracks are plotted using the primary position-fixing equipment. 18-6 Secondary position of own ship used by this system 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS 18.5 Source of Navigation Data The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are chosen. "SOG, COG" is speed over the ground and course over the ground, respectively. "SPD" is speed through the water. ”Drift” is the difference between speed through the water and speed over ground. Heading used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart display. In the example shown below, heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is shown without additional text, meaning the value is referenced to true North. Additional gyrorelated text that may appear is "(GYRO-A)" if the value is referenced to magnetic North. Heading sensor selected as high priority No valid data exists GPS1 Valid data exists Heading sensor selected as low priority No valid data exists Valid data exists Heading used by this system Alert 450 “Heading Sensor Not Available” SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart display. In the example below, COG and SOG are from chosen position sensors and this is indicated with the text "GPS*" or "LOG*" (* is the number of sensors). Valid data exists COG/SOG from position sensor No valid data exists COG/SOG calculated from speed log Valid data exists SOG/COG used by this system 18-7 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS Speed used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart display.The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation. Water Stabilization Mode Selected Manual speed Selected and Manual set drift exists Manual speed + Manual set drift Selected and no manual set drift exists Not selected LOG (Water speed) Selected and Manual set drift exists Speed used by this system Manual speed + Manual set drift Selected and No manual set drift exists No valid data exists LOG (Ground speed) Selected No valid data exists GPS Selected Not selected Bottom Stabilization Mode Selected Reference SPD (local only) Selected Alert related to SOG, COG, speed and heading components It is possible that the operator has not chosen any speed or heading sensors, or that the chosen sensors do not have any valid values. This kind of a situation is critical for the system, because it cannot even perform dead reckoning. When no heading source is available, the system generates the Alert 450 "Heading Sensor Not Available." When no speed source is available, the system generates the Alert 453 "SDME Sensor Not Available." When no COG/SOG data is available, the system generates the Alert 279 "COG/SOG Not Available." 18-8 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS 18.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication When a sensor cannot be used because of some problem, the system automatically switches the sensor. When this occurs the name of the newly selected sensor appears in yellow. LOG BT Speed sensor changed 18.7 Filter Status The ECDIS incorporates a filter that receives raw sensor data, checks sensor integrity and processes multiple sensor data to produce a continuous estimate of ship’s position and motion. By default, the filtering uses data from all available sensors for filtering and integrity monitoring. The exception is heading data; only the selected heading device affects the filter output, but other heading sensors (including magnetic compasses) are used for integrity monitoring. Sensors may be excluded manually or automatically. An excluded sensor participates in neither integrity monitoring or filtering. The filter automatically excludes a sensor from use if the sensor fails the first level of integrity check (for example, if a sudden jump is detected). If the actual integrity check fails for some reason and the filter is able to identify the faulty sensor, the faulty sensor is automatically excluded. Sensor integrity is determined by: (1) monitoring the statistical accuracy of each sensor independently and analyzing the input values and using the information of the type of sensor, and (2) monitoring the difference between pairs of sensors. The system checks heading, rate of turn, position, COG/SOG and CTW/STW data for integrity, in accordance with INS regulations (IEC-61924-2). The result is either [Passed], [Failed] or [Doubtful]. The integrity check result appears in the following locations: GYRO1 Integrity check result Passed GYRO2 2.1° Passed • [Local Sensor Setting] and [System Sensor Setting] menus. The right figure shows the result for the heading sensor GYRO1. • [Filter Status] page in the [Other Sensor Setting] menu. See the next page. Passed (green): Data is available for comparison and data is normal. Doubtful (yellow): Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal. Failed (red): Data may or may not be available for comparison, and data is abnormal. 18-9 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS For heading data, If there is only one gyro, the judgement is "Doubtful" when the ship is stopped because there is no COG for comparison. When the ship begins to move, the judgement is changed to "Passed" because there is COG for comparison. The methods of integrity monitoring are outlined in the table below. Sensor Comparison Position • Comparison with other position sensors. • Comparison with dead reckoning position. Heading • Comparison with other heading sensors. • Comparison with a COG sensor (used only if other heading sensors are not available and if COG is high enough). Speed over the ground • Comparison with other SOG sensors. • Comparison with water speed sensors is a secondary option (used only if other SOG sensors are not available). Speed through the water • Comparison with other STW sensors. • Comparison with SOG sensors is a secondary option (used only if other STW sensors are not available). Rate of turn • Comparison with other rate of turn sensors. The status and integrity of all sensors can be monitored from the [Filter Status] page in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. Sensors can also be unselected and the filter reset from this page. The [Status] column indicates sensor status as follows: • [Selected] (sensor selected for use in filter) • [Unselected] (sensor not used in filter) • [Not Available] (no sensor information) • [Excluded] (automatically excluded sensor) The [Integrity] column indicates sensor integrity as either [Passed] (green characters) or [Failed] (red characters). The integrity evaluation is [Doubtful] (yellow characters) when there are no other sensors to compare with. The [Comparisons] column shows the sensors compared and the integrity evaluation of compared sensors in parentheses. Using the illustration above as an example, SOG/COG data fed from GP0002 is compared with the sensors GP0001 and VD0001. The integrity evaluation for the compared sensors is [Passed]. 18-10 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS To unselect a sensor manually, select the sensor from the drop-down list at the bottom left corner of the page, click the [Unselect] button then click the [Save] button. [Unselected] appears in the [Status] column. To reselect an unselected sensor, select the sensor from the drop-down list, click the [Select] button. [Selected] appears in the [Status] column. The [Reset Filter] button functions to recover from sensor failure. When the button is operated: • • • • Automatically excluded sensors are re-included. All data history is erased. Output values are re-estimated using new data. Integrity monitoring is restarted using new data. Note: The filter can also be reset from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click anywhere in the [Own ship information] box then click [Sensor Information], [Reset Filter], [Filter Reset]. 18.8 Position Alignment The position alignment feature functions to fine tune ship's position by using radar, radar echo target and ECDIS chart material. If position alignment is in use, the Alert 640 "Chart Align: Over 30 Min." is generated every 30 minutes to remind the user to align position. The alert is automatically erased in 10 seconds. Note: This feature is effective with the ECDIS unit whose data source for FILT is assigned the highest priority. 18.8.1 How to align position If the radar echo targets' symbols are not positioned correctly on the chart, there is either position error or gyro error or some combination of these errors. Position may be aligned on the ECDIS display by moving own ship position or by moving radar target position. To align position, get into the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Offset] button at the top-right position on the screen, put the cursor on the correct position then click. The amount of offset, in bearing and range, appears to the right the [Offset] button. The maximum offset in distance is 10.0 NM. 332.5° 10.0NM The latitude and longitude position indication is shown in yellow characters when the position align feature is active. 18.8.2 How to cancel position alignment Click the [Offset] button to cancel the position offset. 18-11 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS 18.9 Wind Sensor ECDIS can display and output wind data in the following three formats: Apparent: Windmeter-measured wind speed and direction. Wind angle reference: Heading North: True wind angle, true wind speed, referenced to North Wind angle reference: True North Theoretical: True wind angle, true wind speed, referenced to heading Wind angle reference: Heading The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data. The wind values are as shown below. Ship information: COG: 60° SOG: 8.7 kn Heading: 45° Wind angle Wind speed Apparent 345° 10 kn North (true wind, referenced to North) 330° 5 kn Theoretical (true wind, referenced to heading) 285° 5 kn North Wind from NNW (330°) Wind Angle (Apparent: 345°) Wind speed (Apparent: 10 kn) Apparent Wind Heading True Wind Ship's Speed (SOG: 8.7 kn) Wind Speed (North/Theoretical: 5.0 kn) Angle (reference North) Wind Angle (Theoretical: 285°) Wind Angle (North: 330°) 18-12 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS Apparent, North (true wind referenced to North), Theoretical (true wind referenced to heading) may be selected from the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. If the wind indication is not accurate; for example, the wind is blowing from the North but the wind direction displays otherwise, check if the format is Theoretical. If it is, switch to another format. 130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m 18.10 Depth Sensor The depth output from a depth sensor (for example, echo sounder) is shown on the [Other Sensor] page in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. The content of the [Other Sensor] page depends on sensors connected. In this example there are three transducers (bow, mid and aft) installed. 130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. If required, you can get an alert when the measured depth is less than the "Echo Alarm Limit" setting at the [UKC] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. The system generates the Alert 485 "Depth Limit". 18-13 18. NAVIGATION SENSORS This page is intentionally left blank. 18-14 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS The ECDIS records various items during a voyage, like movement and position of your ship and dangerous radar targets (from the radar). These items are recorded in the following logs: Event log: NAV log: Target log: Alert log: Chart log: Records user events and position events. Records entire voyage (i.e., a sailing of a route from first point to the last, also MOB data), details (position, speed and course every minute), chart usage (information on charts used for display). Records dangerous TT, AIS. Records alerts generated by the system. Records the install and update history for the ENC, ARCS and C-MAP charts. 19.1 How to Record User, Position Events 19.1.1 User events A user event is a comment about an event (weather, etc.). You can show user events on the chart area. Open the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu show or hide the events. To record a user event: 1. Get into the Voyage planning mode then click the [Record], [Event Log] and [User Event] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Record User Event] window. 2. Enter a comment. Click the [OK] button to finish and close the text box. An event marker ( the [Voyage] log. ) (orange) appears at your position and the event is recorded to To view the comment entered for an event, put the cursor on the event then left click to show the [Event Information] window. The window shows the name of the event ([UserEvent]), time and date of entry, latitude and longitude position of the event and comment. Note that the comment can be edited from this window. Edit the comment then click the [OK] button to save. 19-1 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 19.1.2 Position events The purpose of a position event is to record current position data to the [Voyage] log. Position events can be shown in the chart area by checking [Positions] on the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu. Do as shown below to record position events. How to record position events 1. Get into the Voyage planning mode. 2. Click the [Record], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Position Event] dialog box. 3. At the list box at the top of the dialog box, select position type. [LOP]: Latitude and longitude position of a fixed object at ship's position. [Position]: Ship’s position fed from navigator selected. [Manual]: Manual entry of position. 4. If you selected [Position] at step 3, click the [Record] button. Position from sensor DGPS1 The [Position Event] window shows the position at the moment the [Record] button is clicked. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log. Name of sensor used 1044 Time of entry DGPS1 Name of sensor Position Event mark 19-2 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 5. If you selected [Manual] at step 3, enter latitude and longitude position and comment (optional), then click the [Record] button. Manually entered position The [Position Event] window shows the position at the moment the [Record] button is clicked. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log. Enter comment here. 1044 Time of entry MAN Position event 6. For [LOP], see the description below. mark A plotted line on which a vessel is located, determined by observation or measurement of the range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element. Two or more simultaneous observations can be combined to produce an estimate of the ship's current position. If the position is based on only two observations, it is an "estimated position" (EP); otherwise it is called a fix. A maximum of 6 observations can be entered to obtain a fix. Basic operation: Coordinates of the aid to navigation can be entered into dialog boxes or they can be selected graphically on the chart: • S57: Click on a charted object (beacon, light, buoy etc.) or any location. Description of the object appears above coordinate boxes. • ARCS: Click anywhere in the chart. Default values for bearing and range are approximated from ship's current position information. The time of observation is stopped when the object is selected (or when the [Add] button is clicked). Click the [Add] box to include the observation in the fix computation. The counter shows "new/1", at the input of the second observation. The word "new" indicates that the observation currently displayed is not yet included in the fix computation, and it appears as a dashed line or ring on the chart. The added observations can be edited or deleted after selecting them at the counter. When at least two measurements are entered, the EP or fix is computed and the coordinates are shown in the top part of the dialog. To show a position symbol on the chart, click the [Record] button. In the case of an EP, the letters EP are shown on the right side of the coordinates. If a valid position estimate cannot be obtained, a message is displayed under the coordinates. This may happen, for example, if the lines / circles have multiple crossings that are far apart, or if two lines are nearly parallel or don't intersect at all. The accuracy limit (estimated standard error) is 1.0 NM. If the estimate is valid, the [Record] box can be clicked to record the current position estimate in the [Voyage] log. Discrepancy between LOP result and ship position is also recorded in the log (this information may be viewed by Info query on the position event symbol on the chart - which is displayed if position event display is on in chart display settings). Time transfer: If the observations are not simultaneous, they should be transferred to a common time. Transferring is based on dead reckoning of ship movement. If a position line (or ring) is transferred, the letters TPL are shown beside its 19-3 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS timestamp on the chart. The method of transfer may be selected in the bottom of the dialog. Transfer to latest transfers the measurements as if they were all made at the time of the newest measurement. Continuous transfer transfers all measurements to real time. Transfer off can be used to check where the measurement origins are. The position estimate and the record function follow the same logic, which means that Transfer off shows a position that has no relevance and Transfer to latest sends an old position to the [Voyage] log (timestamp in the log does not match the position). If you are satisfied with the position shown in the latitude and longitude fields, then click the [Record] button to save the position observation to the Voyage log. If you wish you can also enter latitude and longitude values manually. Timeouts: The observations cannot be used long after they were made because dead reckoning is inaccurate. Click the [Record] button to put a position event at the LOP-calculated position. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log. Time of entry 1044 Accuracy of position EP: Low accuracy DR: High accuracy EP LOP Position event mark How to find position event information You can find information about a position event by putting the cursor on the event mark then left click. The [Event Position] window shows event type (position event), time of entry, event position, name of sensor ([Position] only), comment (automatic for [LOP] and [Position]; user-entered comment* for [Manual]), and position line data ([LOP] only). *Comment cannot be changed from this window. Position event: Position Position event: Manual 19-4 Position event: LOP 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 19.2 Details Log The [Details] log contains various voyage information, recorded once per minute. • • • • • • • • • • Date of entry Time of entry Source: No. of unit which generated log Type: Type of position data • Auto: Automatic input of position Latitude, Longitude: Position as output by selected sensor Align/NM, Align/°T: Range, bearing offset, if used SOG/kn: Speed over the ground COG/°T: Course over the ground HDG/°T: Heading CORR/°T: Gyro correction value, if used. How to view the Details log To open the [Details] log, lick the [Record], [NAV Log] and [Detail] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Export File • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: Input box 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. Find 4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of Input text in box and the screen. [Find] button appears. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select printing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait] prints two pages of data on one page. • To show track for the period selected, click the [Show Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the track. • To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is named DetailsLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv. 19-5 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 19.3 Voyage Log The [Voyage] log records all voyage-related data of the past three months. Recorded events are: • Date: Date of entry • Time: Time of entry • Type: Log entry types • Auto: Automatic entry of ship position, in 1 to 4 hr intervals, set by operator. • Ship: Logged if the amount of change in speed or course equals or is greater than the set values. • MOB: MOB position, entered with [MOB] button. • User: Operator-entered position. The information entered in the [Description] box is logged. • Posdev: Record user-entered position event. The[ Description] window shows automatically entered data (Position, LOP) or manually entered comment (Manual). Automatically entered data (Position: data source, LOP: see below. The latitude and longitude position and bearing (or distance) of a maximum of three objects are automatically recorded to each log entry. An object whose position accuracy is low is not recorded. If an object has both a bearing and distance, separate entries are made. Dead reckoning position L/L position, bearing of object (no.1) • • • • • • • 19-6 Latitude and Longitude: Latitude and longitude position SOG/kn, COG/°T, HDG/°T: Speed over the ground, course over the ground, heading. CORR/°T: Offset bearing, if used Wind/kn Wind/°T: Wind speed and angle Dist/NM: Navigation distance Depth/m: Depth in meters Description: Show recorded contents, for [User], [PosDev] above. If desired items other than [Posdev] can be edited. Click an item to show the [Edit Description] box. Edit the description as required then click the [OK] button. 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS How to view the Voyage log Click the [Record], [NAV Log] and [Voyage] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Export File • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select printing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait] and [Spread Landscape] print two pages of data on one page. • To show track for the period selected, click the [Show Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the track. • To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is named VoyageLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv. 19.3.1 How to set conditions for voyage logging The operator can set the conditions for automatic voyage logging. When your speed or course equals the amount set here, an entry is made in the [Voyage] log. • Define the amount of course and speed change which creates a log entry. • Set the interval of logging, regardless of speed and course change. To set the conditions of logging, do as follows: 1. Open the menu and select the [Voyage] menu from the [NAVI Log] menu. 2. Set desired limits for speed and course, and log interval. Speed: 1 - 10 kn, 1 kn increment Course: 0 - 30°, 0.1° increment Log Interval: 1 - 4 hr, 1 hr interval 19-7 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 19.4 Chart Usage Log The [Chart Usage] log stores which charts were used on the ECDIS display. To open the log, click [Record], [NAV Log] and [Chart Usage] on the InstantAccess bar. The following information is recorded in the chart usage log: • • • • • • • • • Date and time chart was displayed Chart ID Center position of display (Lat, Lon) Chart source Chart edition Display scale Compilation scale The latest update included to chart Chart base • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. 19-8 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 19.5 Danger Targets Log The [Danger Targets] log stores information about dangerous targets that are received from a radar (TTs) and/or targets that are received from an AIS transponder (AIS targets). If a TT or AIS target is within the set CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to CPA), information of all TTs (including non-dangerous targets) are recorded into the danger target log. This data is as follows: • • • • • • • • • • Date: Date of entry Time: Time of entry Source: Unit which generated log Type: Type of dangerous target Latitude and Longitude: Latitude and longitude position of dangerous target SPD/kn: Speed of dangerous target CRS/°T: Course of dangerous target HDG/°T: Heading of dangerous target CPA/NM, TCPA/min: CPA and TCPA of dangerous target Index: Radar target no. (TT), MMSI (AIS) How to view the danger targets log To open the [Danger Targets] log, click the [Record], [Target Log] and [Danger Target] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2013-05-08 2013-05-08 13:55:59 13:53:42 ECD001 ECD001 TT 35°38.164’N TT 35°57.770’N 139°49.842’E 139°49.732’E 15.1 12.1 193.3 200.6 N/A N/A 1.3 1.1 0.7 0.2 • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. Matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select printing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait] prints two pages of data on one page. • To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is named DangerTargetLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv. 19-9 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 19.5.1 How to set the conditions for logging danger targets The operator may set Closest Point of Approach (CPA), Time to CPA (TCPA) and Log interval for viewing dangerous TT and AIS targets on the ECDIS display. 1. Open the menu and select the [Danger Targets] page from the [Danger Target] menu. 2. Set how often to record dangerous TTs and AIS target with [Log interval]. The setting range is 1 to 100 (min.). 19-10 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS 19.6 How to Playback the Log The log can be played back to check ship’s movements within a given time frame. If an AMS is connected, deactivate it to enable playback. 1. On the Status bar, click the [OTHERS] and [Playback] buttons. The message "If you use playback function, you cannot use other function before ECDIS restarts." appears. Click the [OK] button to proceed. The window shown below appears. Click to playback data of current day. 2. Select the date to playback. Log data is stored by the day. To play back data in the current month, click a day in the calendar. For other dates, click the [] or [] button to select the month and then click a day in the calendar. To playback the current day, click the button at the top of the screen. 3. Click the [OK] button, and the dialog box shown on the next page appears. This box has controls for • Start and End times • Time elapsed • Slider bar (drag the bar to change start time) • Playback speed list box (change the playback speed). The choices are x1, x2, x4, x10 and x60. 19-11 19. RECORDING, PLAYBACK FUNCTIONS • The [Select] button selects a file. Playback is stopped and a message asks if you are sure to select a different file. 14:46 05 Mar 2014 14:54 05 Mar 2014 Time elapsed Slider bar Pause/playback button Select button (Select different file to playback.) 05 Mar 2014 Playback speed Pause : Playback : All your ship's movements and chart-related operations during the time period selected are plotted on the screen and the screen shows the message "PLAYBACK". To stop playback and return to the normal display, click the [Exit] button. The message "Please Restart ECDIS for using other functions without playback." appears. Click the [Restart] button to restart ECDIS. 19-12 20. ALERTS 20.1 What is an Alert? "Alert" is a generic name for a notice to any unusual or potentially dangerous situation generated within the system. Alerts are classified according to priority and category. Alert priority There are four alert priorities: emergency*, alarm, warning and caution. * Generated when this ECDIS is connected to an AMS. Emergency: Immediate danger to human life or to the ship and its machinery exists and that immediate action must be taken. Emergency alerts are handled the same as an alarm. Alarm: Situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any kind of hazardous situation and to maintain the safe navigation of the ship. Warning: Conditions or situations which require immediate attention for precautionary reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but may become so. Caution: Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the ordinary consideration of the situation or of given information. Alert category An alert is further classified by category, A, B or C, according to its degree of severity or source. Category Description A Category A alerts include alerts indicating • Danger of collision • Danger of grounding B Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision support is necessary. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under category A. C IAS (Integrated Automation System) generated engine alert 20-1 20. ALERTS 20.2 Alert Box When an alert is generated, the related alert message and alert state icon appear in the [Alert] box, which is at the bottom right corner on the screen. An audible alarm is additionally generated for emergencies, alarms and warnings. In addition to the alert message and alert state icon, the [Alert] box has the buzzer stop button and provides access to the [Alert List] and [Alert Log]. Alert state icon 152 Wheel Over Line Alert message (Number and name of alert) Buzzer stop button (Click to stop buzzer.) Alert List/Alert Log button (Right click to select.) Alert state icon: The state of an alert is shown with an icon. See page 20-4. Alert message: The name and number of all active alerts appear in the message area, with the alert of the highest priority on top always. The color of both the message and the background change according to alert priority and alert state. See the table on the next page. An alert can be acknowledged from the [Alert] box or [Alert List]. An alert remains in the [Alert] box and [Alert List] until it is acknowledged and rectified. See section 20.4. Alert List/Alert Log button: Right click to select the [Alert List] or [Alert Log]. The background color of the button is light blue when the log or list is open. See sections 20.5 and 20.6 for a description of the list and log. Buzzer stop button: Click to temporarily silence the buzzer, which sounds against alarms, emergency, and warnings. See page 20-4. 20-2 20. ALERTS Alert message display format Alert indication 156 Sensor Failure Priority of alert Alert state Display state Emergency, - Not acknowledged, Not rectified. Black characters on red Alarm OR background, flashes - Not acknowledged, Rectified. every 0.5 s. Displayed alternately Red characters on gray background. 156 Sensor Failure ! 156 Sensor Failure Emergency, Acknowledged, Not rectified. Alarm 008 Fan2 No Rotati.. Warning Red characters on gray background. - Not acknowledged, Not rectified. Black characters on OR yellow-orange - Not acknowledged, Rectified. background, flashes every 0.5 s. Displayed alternately Yellow-orange characters on gray background. 008 Fan2 No Rotati.. ! 008 Fan2 No Rotati.. ! 362 Wind Sensor 3.. Warning Acknowledged, Not rectified. Yellow-orange characters on gray background. Caution Not rectified. Yellow characters on gray background. Emergency, Acknowledged, Rectified. Alarm, Warning No display. Caution No display. Rectified. 20-3 20. ALERTS Alert state icons The table shows the icons used to indicate the different alert states for the emergency, alarm, warning and caution alerts. Icon Alert state Icon description Alert priority: Emergency, Alarm Not acknowledged, Not rectified Red triangle with black loudspeaker in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Not acknowledged, Not rectified Red triangle with crossed out black loudspeaker Buzzer temporarily silenced. in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Acknowledged, Not rectified Red triangle with black exclamation point in center of triangle. Not acknowledged, Rectified Red triangle with black check mark in center of triangle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat. Alert priority: Warning Not acknowledged, Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Not acknowledged, Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with crossed out black Buzzer temporarily silenced loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Acknowledged, Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black exclamation point in center of circle. Not acknowledged, Rectified Yellow-orange circle with black check mark in center of circle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat. Alert priority: Caution Caution Steadily displayed yellow square with black exclamation point in center of square. Buzzer stop button The color of both the background and the icon change according to alert state. Button state Description No alert generated. The background is grey and the icon is greyed out. An emergency, alarm or warning is being acknowledged. The background is grey and the icon is white. Button clicked to silence buzzer temporarily. The background is lightblue and the icon is black. 20-4 20. ALERTS 20.3 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an Alarm or Warning When the buzzer for an alarm or warning sounds, you can temporarily silence it by doing one of the following: • Click the buzzer stop button in the [Alert] box. • In the [Alert List], click the [Silence] button. The buzzer stops and the appearance of the alert state icon changes. An alert message remains n the [Alert] box and [Alert] list until acknowledged and rectified. The alert for the alarm or warning sounds again if not acknowledged within 30 seconds. 20.4 How to Acknowledge an Alarm or Warning When an alarm or warning is generated, the buzzer sounds and the name of the alert appears and flashes in the [Alert] box and [Alert List]. To acknowledge the alert, do one of the following: • Operate the ALARM ACK key on a Control Unit. • In the [Alert] box or [Alert List], click the alert name. When acknowledged, the buzzer stops and the flashing of the alert name stops. The state of the alert changes and the alert priority changes as shown below Priority of Alert state alert 1 Emergency, Not acknowledged, Not rectified Alarm Priority no. High 2 Warning 3 Emergency, Not acknowledged, Rectified Alarm 4 Warning 5 Low Not acknowledged, Not rectified Not acknowledged, Rectified Emergency, Acknowledged, Not rectified Alarm 6 Warning Acknowledged, Not rectified 7 Caution Not rectified Unacknowledged warning alerts If the Warning alert 150 "Early Course Change Indication" or 151 "Actual Course Change Indication") is not acknowledged within 30 seconds, then the priority changes to Alarm. If a Warning (other than Alert 150 and 151) is not acknowledged within 60seconds, the warning is generated again. 20-5 20. ALERTS Category of alert and place of alert acknowledgement The place of alert acknowledgement depends on the category of the alert. Category A B C 20.5 Where the alert is generated Equipment that generated the alert. Equipment and AMS* (Alert Management System) *No use IAS (Integrated Automation System) generated engine alert Place of alert acknowledgement Equipment that generated the alert. Equipment that generated the alert or AMS. – Alert List The [Alert List] displays all active alerts, with unacknowledged alerts at the top, in priority order. To display the list, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the [Alert] box then select [Alert List Window]. The ZDA sentence is required to display the time in the list. The list shows • Alert no. • Alert text • Source of alert • Time (UTC) alert was generated • Time (UTC) alert was acknowledged • Details about the alert selected Filter Alert details Silence buzzer Alert no. Alert text Source Time ACKed Time generated Alert info icon The background color of an unacknowledged emergency or alarm is red and flashing and unacknowledged warning is yellow-orange and flashing. An acknowledged alert is displayed steadily, in red for emergency or alarm and yellow-orange for warning. A caution is displayed steadily in yellow always. 20-6 20. ALERTS The [Filter] checkboxes at the top of the window let you select what alerts to view. Check or uncheck the boxes to show or hide the corresponding alerts. To find details about an alert, click the applicable alert info icon at the left side of the window to show the details in the [Detail] box at the top of the window. The box shows the reason for the alert, how to handle the alert, etc. An individual emergency, alarm or warning can be acknowledged by clicking it. The [Silence] button silences the buzzer. How the alert list is updated after acknowledgement, rectification When you acknowledge an alert, its display method on the [Alert] list changes according to alert category and alert state. Acknowledged and rectified alerts are immediately removed from the list. No. 1 2 3 Alert priority Emergency, Alarm Warning 4 Display after acknowledgement Display after rectifying Not acknowledged, Not rectified 5 2 Not acknowledged, Rectified 8 – Not acknowledged, Not rectified 6 4 Not acknowledged, Rectified 9 – Alert state 5 Emergency, Alarm Acknowledged, Not rectified – 8 6 Warning Acknowledged, Not rectified – 9 7 Caution Not rectified – 10 8 Emergency, Alarm Acknowledged, Rectified – – Acknowledged, Rectified – – Rectified – – 9 10 Caution 20-7 20. ALERTS 20.6 Alert Log The [Alert Log] stores and displays the latest 10,000 alerts. To display the log, rightclick the [Alert List/Alert Log] button then select [Alert Log Window]. The log shows the following information for each alert: • • • • Priority of alert (Emergency, Alarm, Warning, Caution) Category of alert (A, B or C) Alert description (alert no., alert text) Source of alert • • • • Occurred Time (UTC) ACKed Time (UTC) Rectified Time (UTC) Alert details You can select what priority and category of alerts to display with the [Priority] and [Category] filters at the top of the list. The list can be sorted by [Priority], [Cat.], [Description] or Time (Occurred, Rectified, ACKed). Click the corresponding column title to sort accordingly. To find information about an alert, select it to show the information in the [Detail] box. To search the log, enter text in the [Log Search] box then click the [Find] button. You can save the contents of the log to a USB flash memory, in .dat format, by clicking the [Export Log] button. Priority filter Category filter Category Alert text Priority Occured time Source Alert no. Alert Details 20.7 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors An "ALR receive and ACK transmit" communication is available for every serial line input. The ALR message from the sensor includes information about alerts from the sensor, and is presented though the normal alert system. When you acknowledge an alert, an ACK message is sent to the sensor to do remote acknowledge. This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF. 20-8 20. ALERTS 20.8 List of Alerts Below is a list of all available alerts and their default priorities. The priority of Alerts 620 to 638 can be switched between Caution and Warning on the [Chart Alert] page. See section 8.1.2. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 070 071 072 073 074 Text Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering LCD Unit Lifetime Over High Temperature Inside Monitor Fan1 No Rotation Fan2 No Rotation Fan3 No Rotation Fan4 No Rotation RS485 Communication Timeout No Signal Sentence Syntax Error Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering LCD Unit Lifetime Over High Temperature Inside Monitor Fan1 No Rotation Fan2 No Rotation Fan3 No Rotation Fan4 No Rotation RS485 Communication Timeout No Signal Sentence Syntax Error Main Monitor COM Timeout Sub Monitor COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 1 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 2 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 3 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 4 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 5 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 6 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 7 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 8 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 9 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 10 COM Timeout RCU 1 COM Timeout RCU 2 COM Timeout RCU 3 COM Timeout EC-3000 CPU Temp High EC-3000 GPU Temp High Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution 20-9 20. ALERTS No. 075 076 077 078 079 080 082 083 084 086 087 088 089 090 094 095 096 097 098 099 150 151 152 153 154 156 158 159 170 171 172 235 236 237 255 256 257 258 259 260 272 273 274 275 277 278 279 280 20-10 Text EC-3000 CPU Board Temp High EC-3000 Remote 1 Temp High EC-3000 Remote 2 Temp High EC-3000 CPU Fan Rotation Speed Lowering EC-3000 Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering EC-3000 Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering EC-3000 CPU Fan No Rotation EC-3000 CPU Fan1 No Rotation EC-3000 CPU Fan2 No Rotation EC-3000 CPUboard 5V Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard 3.3V Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard 12V Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard Battery Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard Core Power Error Sensor Adapter 11 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 12 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 13 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 14 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 15 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 16 COM Timeout Early Course Change Indication Actual Course Change Indication Wheel Over Line Track Control Stop Position Monitor Sensor Failure Course Difference Low Speed Alarm Positioning System Failure Crossing Safety Contour Off Track Alarm Echo Sounder 1 COM Error Echo Sounder 2 COM Error Echo Sounder 3 COM Error Gyro 1 COM Error Gyro 2 COM Error Gyro 3 COM Error Gyro 4 COM Error Gyro 5 COM Error Backup Navigator UTC Time Not Available Depth(Bow) Not Available Depth(Midship) Not Available Depth(Stern) Not Available Wind Speed/Direction Not Available STW Not Available COG/SOG Not Available SDME 1 COM Error Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Alarm Alarm Warning Alarm Warning Alarm Warning Alarm Alarm Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Alarm Warning Caution Caution Caution Warning Caution Warning Caution 20. ALERTS No. 281 282 285 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 330 331 360 361 362 370 371 380 390 391 Text SDME 2 COM Error SDME 3 COM Error Heading Magnetic Not Available EPFS 1 COM Error EPFS 2 COM Error EPFS 3 COM Error EPFS 4 COM Error EPFS 5 COM Error EPFS 6 COM Error EPFS 7 COM Error EPFS 8 COM Error EPFS 9 COM Error EPFS 10 COM Error Rudder 1 COM Error Rudder 2 COM Error Rudder 3 COM Error HCS 1 COM Error HCS 2 COM Error VDR COM Error BNWAS COM Error Other Sensor 1 COM Error Other Sensor 2 COM Error Other Sensor 3 COM Error Other Sensor 4 COM Error Other Sensor 5 COM Error Other Sensor 6 COM Error Other Sensor 7 COM Error Other Sensor 8 COM Error Other Sensor 9 COM Error Other Sensor 10 COM Error EC-3000 Ch.01 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.02 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.03 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.04 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.05 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.06 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.07 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.08 COM Timeout Double Gyro Status Conflict Select Gyro Status Missing Wind Sensor 1 COM Error Wind Sensor 2 COM Error Wind Sensor 3 COM Error Water Current COM Error Water Temp COM Error AIS COM Error NAVTEX COM Error ROT Gyro 1 COM Error Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Caution Caution 20-11 20. ALERTS No. 392 393 400 401 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 450 451 453 469 470 472 473 474 475 485 495 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 539 20-12 Text ROT Gyro 2 COM Error ROT Gyro 3 COM Error Network Printer Not Available Local Printer Not Available Other Sensor 11 COM Error Other Sensor 12 COM Error Other Sensor 13 COM Error Other Sensor 14 COM Error Other Sensor 15 COM Error Other Sensor 16 COM Error Other Sensor 17 COM Error Other Sensor 18 COM Error Other Sensor 19 COM Error Other Sensor 20 COM Error Other Sensor 21 COM Error Other Sensor 22 COM Error Other Sensor 23 COM Error Other Sensor 24 COM Error Other Sensor 25 COM Error Other Sensor 26 COM Error Other Sensor 27 COM Error Other Sensor 28 COM Error Other Sensor 29 COM Error Other Sensor 30 COM Error Heading Sensor Not Available Gyro CORR. Source Change SDME Sensor Not Available WGS84 Not Used Datum Change Position Source Change Heading Source Change COG/SOG Source Change CTW/STW Source Change Depth Limit Anchor Watch Error TT CPA/TCPA TT Lost REF Target Lost AIS New Target AIS Target Display 95% AIS Target Display 100% AIS Target Capacity 95% AIS Target Capacity 100% AIS Target Activate 95% AIS Target Activate 100% AIS CPA/TCPA AIS Lost AIS Message Received Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Caution Warning Warning Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Alarm Warning Alarm Warning Warning Warning Caution Warning Caution Warning Caution Warning Alarm Warning Caution 20. ALERTS No. 541 542 543 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 640 652 665 667 675 690 691 692 693 820 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 871 872 873 Text AIS Message Transmit Error AIS Transmitting No CPA/TCPA for AIS User Chart Danger Area Traffic Separation Zone Inshore Traffic Zone Restricted Area Caution Area Offshore Production Area Military Practice Area Seaplane Landing Area Submarine Transit Lane Anchorage Area Marine Farm / Aquaculture PSSA Area Areas to be Avoided Buoy UKC Limit Non-official ENC No Vector Chart Not Up-to-date Permit Expired Chart align: Over 30 min Last WPT Approach Autopilot Mode Conflict AP Receive Error Use MAN Steering TC Start Timeout RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE RM Stop - Disconnect Sensors RM Stop - Other Causes NAVTEX Message Received EPFS 1 Sensor Banned EPFS 2 Sensor Banned EPFS 3 Sensor Banned EPFS 4 Sensor Banned EPFS 5 Sensor Banned EPFS 6 Sensor Banned EPFS 7 Sensor Banned EPFS 8 Sensor Banned EPFS 9 Sensor Banned EPFS 10 Sensor Banned SDME 1 Sensor Banned SDME 2 Sensor Banned SDME 3 Sensor Banned Gyro 1 Sensor Banned Gyro 2 Sensor Banned Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Default priority Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Alarm Alarm Caution Warning Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution 20-13 20. ALERTS No. 874 875 881 882 883 891 900 901 902 903 904 Text Gyro 4 Sensor Banned Gyro 5 Sensor Banned ROT Gyro 1 Sensor Banned ROT Gyro 2 Sensor Banned ROT Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Water Current Sensor Banned No Filter Source of Position No Filter Source of COG/SOG No Filter Source of CTW/STW No Filter Source of Heading No Filter Source of ROT Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Note: The priority of alerts 620 to 638 can be switched between Warning and Caution. See the installation manual for details. 20-14 21. PARAMETERS 21.1 Ship and Route Parameters The purpose of the ship and route parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship. These parameters are relative to ship steering and they are very important to get correct function of the integrated navigation system. They must be maintained carefully. Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters' importance. Open the menu and select [Ship & Route Parameters] from the [General] menu to show the [Ship & Route] page. Set each item referring to the description below. Ship Parameters description [MAX Speed]: Maximum speed the ship can do. [MAX Height]: Maximum height of ship above sea level. [MAX Draught]: Maximum draught of ship. Route Parameters description [MAX ROT]*: The maximum rate of turn of the ship. Set at installation. [WPT Approach]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point. [WPT Prewarning]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point. [Default Line Radius]: Define the default value of radius between waypoints during automatic route steering. [Default CH Limit]: Define the default value of channel limit. [Default Safety Margin]: Define the default value of extension for channel limits to be checked against chart alerts. * Set at installation and cannot be changed by the operator. 21-1 21. PARAMETERS 21.2 Forwarding Distances The forwarding distances are the distances the ship travels straight after the steering command is given to the autopilot. These distances change according to the radius of turn. The forwarding distances are entered at installation and cannot be changed by the operator. However, the operator can view the forwarding distances settings on the [Forwarding Distance] display ([MENU][General][Navigation Parameter]). Note: These are the port side values. Starboard side values can also be shown. Contact a FURUNO dealer for details. 21-2 21. PARAMETERS 21.3 Cost Parameters The cost parameters are used in the optimization calculation. Therefore define these parameters before doing the calculation. Open the menu and select [Cost Parameters] from the [General] menu to show the [Cost Parameters] page. Set each item according to ship’s plan, etc. At the [Cost] window, enter the cost/hour and cost/ton for heavy fuel oil and diesel oil. At the [Fuel Consumption] window, define the fuel consumption figures for up to 12 different speeds. Before entering the data, plot the data on a graph, like the one shown below. Use a second graph if, for example, diesel oil consumption is different from that of heavy fuel oil. Reset the power to effect the settings. FUEL CONSUMPTION 7 6 5 TON/h 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 SHIP’S SPEED (kn) 21-3 21. PARAMETERS 21.4 Instant Track Parameters The instant track feature can create, in route monitoring, a simple route in the following situations: • Return to the monitored route when the vessel goes outside the channel limits. • Temporarily deviate from the monitored route (avoid collision, etc.). How to set instant track parameters Set the parameters for the instant track ([MENU][General][Ship & Route Parameters][Instant Track] tab). [Delay before Initiating First Turn]: Set the number of seconds (30 - 600 seconds) to wait before initiating the first turn in the simple route. [Turn Radius]: Set the turning radius (0.02 - 3.00 NM) to use between waypoints (four waypoints) in the simple route. [Channel Limit for Track Control]: Set the channel limit (10 - 1852 m) for the instant track, automatically or manually. The [Auto] setting uses the channel limit set for the monitored route. [Route Check Strictly]: Check to prevent monitoring of instant track when a chart alert (alarm or warning) is found through the route check. Uncheck to monitor instant track in spite of chart alert found through the route check. 21-4 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS 22.1 Conning Display The conning display provides relevant sensor information data (including engine data) from external equipment, on one display to facilitate safe and efficient monitoring. The ECDIS accepts sensor information data in analog, serial and contact signal formats. Six sets of conning displays are available, and they are arranged at installation. Consult with the installer of the equipment to decide the content and layout of each display. To show the conning display, click the [Operating Mode] button on the Status bar to select [CONNING]. Note: Analog data is shown in the lowest value of the setting range when the data is not input. Conning display Status bar (see next page) 05 Mar 2014 UTC 05 Mar 2014 17.5° Pitch And Roll ROLL PITCH 3.8° -2° Azimuth Note: The cursor can be moved between the main monitor and a sub Cursor Cursor Push scrollwheel Conning Sub monitor ECDIS Main monitor 22-1 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS monitor and vice versa if the sub monitor is configured to show the Conning display. Push the scrollwheel until the cursor moves to the other monitor. Conning display Status bar No. 1 2 3 4 Button Operating mode Conning display sheet STANDBY TOOL Description Selects the operating mode, ECDIS or CONNING. Selects the conning display sheet to use, Sheet.1 - Sheet.6. (Sheet name is decided at installation. “Sheet x” (x=sheet number) is the default sheet name.) Goes to the Standby mode. See section 1.4. Shows, hides the software keyboard; adjusts the volume of the key beep and audio alert. Shows, hides software keyboard Adjusts volume of key beep, audio alert Volume setting To adjust a volume, put cursor in applicable box. Click up arrow to raise volume; down arrow to lower volume. 5 Selects a display palette. See section 1.7. 6 Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO or Hatteland monitor. See section 1.8. 7 Takes a screenshot. See section 1.14. 8 Displays AMS and conning software version and system information. The information shown in the figure may differ from your own. For System and System 2 see section 1.17. Version nos. subject to change. 9 10 11 22-2 Date Time See section 1.13. See section 1.13. Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. See section 2.1.2. 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS Conning display examples Six conning display sheets are available, and the content, layout and name of each sheet can be customized, by the service technician. Below are some examples conning display sheets. Example 1 (General navigation) Example 2 (General navigation) 22-3 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS Example 3 (General navigation) Example 4 (General Navigation) 22-4 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS Example 5 (All waters, navigation) Example 6 (All waters, harbor) 22-5 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS Example 7 (Ocean, navigation) Example 8 (Ocean, harbor) 22-6 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS Example 9 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 1) Example 10 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 2) 22-7 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS Example 11 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft1) Example 12 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft2) 22-8 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS 22.2 Mini Conning Display The mini conning display, available in the Voyage navigation mode, provides various navigation information and is set during the installation. The display example below shows heading, doppler log speed and rudder angle. To show or hide the mini conning display, click the [Mini Conning] button on the InstantAccess bar. The location of the display can be changed. Right click the mini-conning display to show the context-sensitive menu. Click the location desired: [Left Top], [Left Middle], [Left Bottom], [Right Top], [Right Middle] or [Right Bottom]. 22-9 22. CONNING AND MINI CONNING DISPLAYS This page is intentionally left blank. 22-10 23. SETTINGS MENU The [Settings] menu provides file import, export and maintenance, testing facilities (display, keyboard, self test), data sharing, customizing, screenshot processing, user default restoration, and CCRP selection. 23.1 How to Access the Settings Menu Click the Settings button ( ) on the Status bar then select [Settings]. The right message appears. Click the [OK] button to show the [Settings] menu then click the [OK] button. For the service technician Playback data No. Name Description 1 Pages (menus) A total of eleven menus. See the descriptions in this chapter. 2 Menu area The menu for the selected page appears here. 3 Page selection buttons Click to scroll the menus. To open a page, use the page selection buttons to select a page then click the tab of the page required. The color of the border of the page selected is light blue. 23-1 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.2 File Export The [File Export] page exports setting data, route/user charts, and playback data*, to a USB flash memory. Data is exported in .zip files. * Disable AMS to enable export. Playback data Play No. Name Description 1 Data selection Check the data to export, setting data, route/user chart, and playback data. (The size of the log data is large, thus some time may be required to export the data.) 2 [Export] button Click to export all items selected on this menu. The [SAVE FILE] dialog box appears. Select where to save the data, then click the [Save] button. Note 1: The Export button does appear unless an item is checked. Note 2: The message "Now processing" appears during the exporting, and "File export succeeded." appears upon completion. Click the [OK] button to finish. 23-2 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.3 File Import The [File Import] page lets you import FMD-3xx0 series created setting data, routes/ user charts, and playback data*, from a USB flash memory. .*Disable AMS to enable import. Playback data No. Name Description 1 Select file to import button Click to show the [OPEN FILE] dialog box, where you can select the file to import. 2 Data selection Check the data to import setting data, route/user chart, and playback data. 3 [Import] button Click to import the objects selected. The message shown right appears. Following data will be replaced with the imported data, and system will reboot automatically. Please export current data before import if needed. - Setting data - Route/User chart Do you wish to continue? Note 1: Item 2 does not appear until after a file is selected. Item 3 appears after the data to import is selected. Note 2: The message "Now processing" appears during the importing, and the message "File import finished." appears upon completion. Click the [OK] button. Note 3: The larger the file the more the time required to import the data. Note 4: The system automatically restarts after setting data is imported. Note 5: If importing could not be completed, first check if the USB flash memory is properly inserted. If inserted properly, try importing again. 23-3 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.4 File Maintenance The [File Maintenance] page lets you restore the last-saved route/user chart application and Route/user chart system. No. Name Description 1 Route/User chart Application backup Check to restore last-saved route/user chart application. 2 Route/User chart System backup Check to restore last-saved route/user chart system. 3 [Restore] button Click to restore item selected. Note: To restore the route data from the backup data, first check all route data then do the restore from the latest data. 23-4 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.5 Self Test The [Self Test] page is mainly for use by the service technician to check the equipment. The ECDIS function is inoperative during the test. OK OK OK * * * * * Function: ecdis,conning,tcs,ams *Subject to change. No. Name Description 1 Test results, program numbers The results of the self test and the program numbers. 2 [Start] button Start the self test. 3 [Stop] button Stop the self test. (Shown during test.) 23-5 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.6 Data Sharing The [Data Sharing] page shares the same brilliance setting between main and slave displays (ECDIS and conning applications). Data Sharing Please check items to share between all applications. Display Settings Display Brilliance 23-6 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.7 Customize The [Customize] page lets you set buzzer volume, key beep volume, and scrollwheel rotation direction. File Maintenance No. Name Self Test Data Sharing Description 1 Wheel rotation Set the direction of scrollwheel rotation direction. Normal: Downward to increase value, upward to decrease value. Reverse: Reverse of "Normal". 2 Key beep volume Set the volume of the key beep that sounds for correct key or mouse button operation. 0, no beep; 1, LOW; 2, MID; 3, HIGH 3 Alert sound volume Set the loudness of the alert buzzer. 1, LOW; 2, MID; 3, HIGH 23-7 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.8 Display Test The [Display Test] page displays various test patterns to check the FURUNO-supplied monitor for proper display of colors. Click the [Display Test] button to start the test. The buzzer sounds at the start of the test. Self Test Data Sharing Left-click to proceed in the numerical order shown below; right click to proceed in reverse order. (1) (2) (3) (4) Diagonal (5) Black (6) All colors (7) Black (8) White Red Green Blue (9) (10) (11) (12) Gray Red bars (13) (14) (15) (16) Yellow bars Aqua bars Purple bars Gray bars Green bars Blue bars To quit the display test and close the [Settings] menu, press the ESC key on the applicable Control Unit, or click the Exit button on the [Display Test] menu. 23-8 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.9 Keyboard Test The [Keyboard Test] page checks the controls and keys on the ECDIS Control Unit and the trackball module on the ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit. Data Sharing No. Customize Name Display Test Keyboard Test Description 1 EBL, BRILL, GAIN and VRM Operate the related controls on the ECDIS Control Unit. Rotate a control and the window above the control shows the setting value. Push a control and the equivalent location on screen lights in light blue. (The RAIN and SEA control have no function and the EBL and VRM controls do not have a push function.) 2 InstantAccess knob/key Check the InstantAccess knob and key. 1) Rotate the knob and the setting value appears in the window. 2) Push the knob and the knob lights in light blue. 3) Push the key and the key lights in light blue. 3 No use 4 Keyboard of the ECDIS Control Unit Operate each key. The pressed key lights in light blue. 5 Keys of the ECDIS Control Unit Operate each key. The pressed key lights in light-blue. 23-9 23. SETTINGS MENU No. 23-10 Name Description 6 Trackball module Check the trackball module of a Control Unit: 1) Spin the scrollwheel and rotate the trackball. The indication above the operated control shows the setting value. 2) Push each button. The window above a pushed button lights in light blue. 3) Push the scrollwheel. The window above the wheel lights in light blue. 7 [Buzzer ON] button Click the [Buzzer ON] button to sound the buzzer. The buzzer sounds and the button flashes (in red). Click the button again to cancel. 8 [Contact Output] button Click the [Contact Output] button to output the System Failure contact signal from the Processor Unit. Click the button again to cancel. 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.10 Screenshots The [Screenshot] page processes screenshots saved to the SSD. No. Name Description 1 List List of screenshots taken. Screenshots are automatically assigned a file name consisting of the time and date the screenshot was taken. 2 Check boxes Put a checkmark in the box of the screenshot to process. 3 Preview Preview of the screenshot selected. 4 [Delete] button* Delete the screenshot(s) selected. 5 [Export] button* Export selected screenshot(s) to a USB flash memory. 6 [Apply] button* Save comment. 7 Comment box Enter comment for screenshot. Put a check in appropriate checkbox then enter comment. * Button does not appear until related action is completed. 23-11 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.10.1 How to export screenshots You can export screenshots to a USB flash memory as follows: 1. Insert a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Open the [Screenshot] page. 3. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to export. 4. Click the [Export] button. SAVE FILE 5. Select the USB flash memory. 6. Click the [OK] button to export the screenshots selected. 7. If the exporting was successful, a window showing the number of files exported appears. Click the [OK] button to finish. 23.10.2 How to delete screenshots 1. Select the [Screenshot] page. 2. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to delete. To select all screenshots, right-click the box to the left of the [Date] column then select [Select all]. To clear all check marks, select [Clear all]. 3. Click the [Delete] button. You are asked "Selected files will be deleted. Do you wish to continue?" 4. Click the [Yes] button to delete the screenshots selected. The message "File deletion succeeded." appears. 5. Click the [OK] button to finish. 23-12 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.11 User Default The [User Default] page restores all default settings for the [Chart Display] and [Symbol Display]. Click the [Restore User Setting] button. You are asked "All setting data will be restored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Click the [Yes] button to restore default settings and reset the power. If you require the settings shown below, copy them to a USB flash memory (using the file export feature), BEFORE restoring user defaults. • Setting data • Route/User chart 23-13 23. SETTINGS MENU 23.12 CCRP The [CCRP] page provides for selection of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) and shows the location of various sensors. No. 23-14 Name Description 1 CCRP Select the CCRP to use in the case of multiple CCRPs. 2 Display Filter Check the items to show on the ship’s graphic. 3 Ship’s graphic Shows the location of the sensors selected at the [Display Filter]. 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to keep optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment. Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below. If you cannot restore normal operation after following the troubleshooting procedures, do not attempt to check inside any unit; there are no operator-serviceable parts inside. Refer any repair work to a qualified technician. WARNING 24.1 IMPORTANT ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Do not open the equipment. Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant or contact spray to coating or plastic parts. Only qualified personnel can work inside the equipment. Those items contain organic solvents that can damage coating and plastic parts, especially plastic connectors. Maintenance Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below. Interval When needed 3 to 6 months Check point Monitor unit and Processor Unit Check and measures Dust or dirt may be removed from a cabinet with a soft cloth. Water-diluted mild detergent may be used if desired. DO NOT use chemical cleaners to clean the display unit; they may remove paint and markings. To clean the LCD, wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching, using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper frequently so the salt or dirt will not scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents such as thinner, acetone or benzene for cleaning. Also, do not use a degreaser or an antifog solution, as they can strip the coating from the LCD. Filter inside Pro- Have a technician clean the filter if it is cessor Unit dusty. See section 24.4. Cabling Check that all cabling is firmly connected and is not damaged. Remarks Do not use chemicalbased cleaners for cleaning. They can remove paint and markings. 24-1 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.2 How to Replace the Fuse The fuse in the Processor Unit, Monitor Unit and Sensor Adapter protects those units from overvoltage (overcurrent) and internal fault. If a unit cannot be turned on, check if its fuse has blown. If a fuse has blown, find out the cause before replacing the fuse. If the fuse blows again after replacement, contact your dealer for advice. WARNING Use the proper fuse. Use of a wrong fuse can damage the equipment or cause fire. Unit 24-2 Power supply Type Code no. Processor Unit EC-3000 100-115 VAC FGMB 125V 10A PBF 000-157-470-10 220-230 VAC FGMB 250V 5A PBF 000-157-570-10 Monitor Unit MU-190 100-230 VAC FGBO 250V 1A PBF 000-155-828-10 Monitor Unit MU-231 100-230 VAC FGBO 250V 1.5A PBF 000-155-833-10 Sensor Adapter MC-3000S 24 VDC FGMB 125V 3A PBF 000-157-481-10 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.3 Trackball Maintenance If the cursor moves abnormally, dust or dirt may be on the trackball. Clean the trackball as shown below: 1. Turn the retaining ring on the trackball module counterclockwise 45° to unlock it. Retaining ring 2. Remove the retaining ring and ball. 3. Clean the ball with a soft, lint-free cloth, then blow carefully into the ball-cage to dislodge dust and lint. 4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers with a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol. 5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers. 6. Re-set the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted reversely. 24.4 How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit Have a qualified technician clean the air inlet filter in the Processor Unit when it becomes dusty. Remove the filter and clean it with water and a mild detergent. Rinse the filter, allow the filter to dry then return it to the Processor Unit. Air inlet Filter Processor unit, left side Note 1: Be sure the air inlet is not blocked. A blocked inlet can cause the temperature to rise inside the cabinet, which can lead to malfunction. Note 2: The right side of the Processor Unit has an exhaust vent. Remove dust from the vent as necessary. 24-3 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.5 Troubleshooting The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedies with which to restore normal operation. Troubleshooting If… power cannot be turned on power can be turned on but nothing appears on the display • • • • • then… power connector may have loosened. ship's mains is off. fuse has blown. brilliance is too low. the ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F). the picture freezes • ECDIS internal error (display is not updated) message “There is no dongle or an error has occurred in the dongle. The system will automatically shut down.” appears monitored route is not displayed planned route is not displayed symbol of user chart cannot be erased position cannot be found ARCS chart cannot be displayed S57 chart cannot be displayed past track is not displayed monitored user chart is not displayed on ECDIS display 24-4 • dongle is not connected. • data in the dongle is corrupted. Remedy • Check connector. • • • • Check power supply. Replace fuse. Adjust brilliance. The heater is warming the Processor Unit. The display appears in approx. 2 minutes. • Press the power key on a Control Unit to turn off the power. If the power does not go off, hold down the key. Turn on the power again to restore normal operation. • Connect dongle. • Contact FURUNO for assistance. • route has not been selected. • Select route to monitor. • monitor route has not been select- • Open the [Route] page of the ed to be visible above the chart. [Symbol Display] menu and check the monitored route parts to show. • route has not been selected. • Select route as “planned”. • planned route has not been select- • Open [Route] page of [Symbol Dised to be visible above the chart. play] menu and check the planned route parts to show. • two or more symbols may be su• Do the delete action several times. perimposed on each other. • position sensor(s) is not selected • Check position sensor selections. on the [POSN] page. • position sensor is turned off. • Turn on position sensor. • sensor cable has loosened. • Check cable. • no ARCS chart for area. • Open ARCS chart from the [Manage Charts] dialog box. • dongle is not connected. • Connect dongle. • license has expired. • Renew ARCS license. • no ENC chart for area. • Open S57 chart from [Manage Charts] dialog box. • dongle is not connected. • Connect dongle. • past track is not selected to be vis- • Open [Tracking] page of [Symbol ible. Display] menu and select [Own Ship Past Tracks] to [CCRP], [Primary], [Secondary] or [Pivot] as appropriate. • user chart is not selected to be vis- • Open [Mariner] page of [Symbol ible. Display] menu and select parts to show. 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING If… route monitoring is stopped • • • user chart is not displayed on radar overlay message "Nearing memory usage limit. Click the Restart button to restart the system to prevent trouble." appears message "Nearing memory usage limit. If you will start monitoring, click the Restart button to restart the system to prevent trouble during route monitoring." message "Memory usage limit reached. Click the Restart button to restart the system to prevent trouble." appears. both the operating mode buttons [ECDIS] and [CONNING] are yellow 24.6 • then… Alert 691: RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE. Own ship is too far away from the route. Alert 692: No Valid Sensor Data. ECDIS internal error. Alert 693: RM Stop - Other Causes. Required data (position, SOG/COG) not found. user chart is not selected in Voyage navigation mode. • the memory usage limit for software is close to capacity. Performance may be affected. • the memory usage limit for software is close to capacity. Performance may be affected. Remedy • Steer the ship back to the route then restart route monitoring. • Request service. • Check sensor connections. • Select user chart in Voyage navigation mode. • If you need to save your work, click the [Later] button then reset the power. If you don’t need to save your work, click the [Restart] button. Note that the notice does not appear in the Conning mode. • Click the [Restart] button. • the memory usage limit for software is reached. Performance may be affected. • Click the [Restart] button to reset the power. No other operations are available other than restart. Note that the notice does not appear in the Conning mode. • the memory usage limit for software is close to capacity. Performance may be affected. • Stop all operations and reset the power. Consumable Parts The table below lists the consumable parts in the Processor Unit, Sensor Adapters and Monitor Units. Replace the parts before their expected expirations. Unit Processor Unit EC-3000 Sensor Adapter MC-3000S Sensor Adapter MC-3010A Monitor Unit Part CPU Fan Power Fan Chassis Fan MC-CS Board Type 109R0612G429 109P0612H761 109P0612H761 24P0114 Life 8.5 years 8.5 years 8.5 years 8.5 years MC-ANLG Board 24P0115 7.0 years MU-190 MU-231 BEZEL (19) & LCD ASSEMBLY BEZEL (23) & LCD ASSEMBLY 50,000 hours 50,000 hours 24-5 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.7 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts The color differentiation checks if the ECDIS monitor can distinguish between the various color-coded areas, lines and symbols. 1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu. 2. Click [Color diagram] to show the color test diagram. If the colors are correct, the diagonal line will be distinguishable from its surroundings, at any brilliance setting. 24-6 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) 25.1 What is an Alert Management System (AMS)? An AMS warns the navigator, with audio-visual indications, when safety parameters are violated or there is a failure of connected equipment. The AMS also transfers unacknowledged alerts to the BNWAS. The main functions of the AMS are • Organize and track alerts that occur on the vessel. The AMS displays the alerts on its HMI system and sounds a buzzer when an alert condition occurs. • Acknowledge alerts. • Transfer alerts not acknowledged within 30 seconds to the BNWAS. (The BNWAS then activates the Emergency Call to inform appropriate officers’ quarters of unacknowledged alarms.) 25.2 System Configuration Refer to the system configuration for the ECDIS - the AMS is an integral part of the ECDIS. 25.3 Alert Definition, Priority and Category of Alerts “Alert” is a generic name for an emergency, alarm, warning or caution generated by an equipment connected to the AMS or the ECDIS. Priority of alerts Alerts have one of four priorities: Priority of alert Emergency Alarm Warning Caution Description Immediate danger to human life or to the ship and its machinery exists and that immediate action must be taken. Emergency alerts are handled the same as alarms. Alarms indicate situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any kind of hazardous situation and to maintain the safe navigation of the ship. Conditions or situations which require immediate attention for precautionary reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but may become so. Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the ordinary consideration of the situation or of given information. 25-1 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) Category of alerts Each alert is further put into the category A or category B. Category of alert Description Category A Category A alerts include alerts indicating • Danger of collision • Danger of grounding Category B Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision support is necessary besides the information that is shown at the central alert management HMI. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under category A. Category and location of alert acknowledgement • A category A alert cannot be acknowledged at the AMS; it must be acknowledged at the equipment that generated the alert. • A category B alert can be acknowledged at either the AMS or the equipment that generated the alert. • All caution alerts are a part of category B. Caution alerts neither sound the buzzer nor require acknowledgement. Category A alert: External Equipment AMS Alert generated Acknowledge: possible Acknowledge: not possible Category B alert: External Equipment Acknowledge: possible 25-2 AMS Alert generated Acknowledge: possible 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) 25.4 Alert Category and Alert acknowledgement From Connected Equipment, AMS Category A alert Acknowledged from the equipment that generated the alert: The alert is acknowledged at both the equipment and the AMS and their buzzers stop. Acknowledged from the AMS: The alert is acknowledged at neither the equipment that generated the alert nor the AMS, however their buzzers stop. (The buzzer sounds again at both locations if the alert is not acknowledged within 30 seconds at the equipment that generated the alert.) Category B alert Acknowledged from the equipment that generated the alert or AMS: The alert is acknowledged at both the equipment and the AMS and their buzzers stop. 25.5 How to Acknowledge an Alert, Stop the Buzzer From the AMS There are two methods to acknowledge an alert and/or stop the buzzer from the AMS: • Trackball: Click the alert name on any window in the AMS. • ALARM ACK key: Push the key on the connected Control Unit. 25.6 About the ALR and ACK Sentences The function of the AMS is to coordinate exchange of alerts and acknowledgement of alerts between equipment connected to the AMS. This AMS is designed according to the IEC’s recommendations for Alert Handling (80/ 520/INF). The figure below shows the transition of the Alert status at the sensor. NO ACTIVE ALERTS Send no-alerts message (max. 60 seconds between) Yes (send event; clear list) New alert (Send event; create list) No (Send event; update list) New alert (Send event; update list) Alert reset. Last in list? ACTIVE ALERT(s) Send alerts-list message (max. 60 seconds between) Change in alert ACK state (Send event; update list) 25-3 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) Device states A sensor has two main states, N and A. State N: No active alerts. The device should send a "no-alerts" message with an interval of a maximum of 60 seconds. This message informs the AMS that the sensor has no active alerts. State A: The device has one or more active alerts, of which zero or more may have been acknowledged and the rest (possibly zero) are unacknowledged. In this state, the device shall send all active alerts at an interval not greater than 60 seconds. When multiple alerts are active in the sensor, all active alerts are transmitted as a “list" of alerts (alert-list message). In response to the “list”, applicable sensors output the ALR sentence, the content of which is defined in IEC 80/250/INF. In addition to the periodic transmission mentioned, the sensor sends an Alert message (ALR) to the AMS when an alert is generated in the sensor in the following instances: • A new alert is generated in the sensor. • An existing alert is acknowledged in the sensor, either by the sensor itself or by remote acknowledgement by the AMS. • An existing alert condition becomes non-active. No-alerts message The no-alerts message to informs the AMS that the sensor has no active alerts. It is sent at an interval not greater than 60 seconds, and may be used to clear the AMS alert list. This message is sent as an ALR message, without a time stamp and includes a “V” flag in the both the alert condition and acknowledgement field. The no-alerts message is as shown below. $--ALR,,,V,V,*hh The alert-list message The alerts-list message periodically refreshes the alert list in order for personnel to have up-to-the-minute list of active alerts. The alert / alert list message is sent with an interval not greater than 60 seconds. The alert / alert list message consists of the same message(s) sent when the corresponding event occurred, but all active alerts shall be reported. An example of two alert-list messages are shown below. $--ALR,123456,123,A,A,Battery power in use*hh$--ALR,130507,456,A,V,Self test failure*hh ACK sentence The AMS sends the ACK sentence to all sensors to acknowledge alerts. The sentence format is as shown below, where xxx is the Alert no. generated by each sensor. $--ACK,xxx*hh This AMS supports only the single alert acknowledgement as defined by IEC 80/520/ INF. In this case, it is necessary to send an alarm acknowledge message, the format which is shown below, from the external from the AMS to the sensor. The message is sent at an interval not greater than 60 seconds. $--ACK,*hh 25-4 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) 25.7 How an Alert is Transferred to the BNWAS Alerts are transferred to the BNWAS in the following sequence. Note: For a DNV class vessel, only category A alerts are transferred. 1) An alert generated by an equipment connected to the AMS is transferred to the BNWAS if it is not acknowledged within 30 seconds. 2) The BNWAS sends the Emergency Call to applicable Cabin Panels in living quarters and general quarters, to inform personnel of an unacknowledged alert. To stop both the Emergency Call and the transfer of the alert, do as follows: • Category A alert: Acknowledge the alert at the equipment that generated the alert. • Category B alert: Acknowledge the alert at the equipment that generated the alert or the AMS. Connected equipment AMS Alert generated. Alert is transferred if not acknowledged within 30 seconds. BNWAS Emergency Call sent to Cabin Panels. Cabin Panel Cabin Panel Cabin Panel Cabin Panel Cabin Panel 25-5 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) 25.8 Change of Priority for Unacknowledged Warning IMO MSC302(87) requires that a Warning be changed to an Alarm if it is not acknowledged within 60 seconds. The change of priority feature is enabled or disabled during the installation. Acknowledge 60 seconds Not acknowledged A Warning is generated. 25.9 The Warning becomes an Alarm and is then transferred to the BNWAS. How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer The FMD-3xx0 series and the FCR-2xx9 series are compliant with IEC 61924-2, which has a provision to allow the temporary silencing of the buzzer for 30 seconds against any alert, from the equipment that generated the alert or from the AMS. The buzzer again sounds after 30 seconds if the alert is not acknowledged. How category A alerts are treated at the AMS The buzzer given against a category A alert can be temporarily silenced at the AMS, by clicking the alert on any AMS mode window (see section 25.13.2) or pushing the ALARM ACK key on a Control Unit. However, the alert must be acknowledged from the equipment that generated the alert. The AMS indicates acknowledgement after the alert is acknowledged at the equipment. 25.10 Buzzer Patterns The AMS has two buzzer patterns, legacy and IEC 61924-2, and one is chosen at installation. Legacy buzzer pattern This buzzer sounds continuously until an emergency/alarm or warning is acknowledged. Acknowledge The buzzer sounds continuously. Emergency/Alarm or Warning generated 25-6 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) IEC 61924-2 buzzer pattern This buzzer complies with INS regulations. There are two types of buzzer patterns, Emergency/Alarm and Warning. Emergency/Alarm: The buzzer sounds three times in 7-second intervals. Emergency/Alarm generated. ACK 7 seconds Buzzer ON Buzzer muted Time Buzzer OFF 0.5 seconds IEC 61924-2 mode, emergency/alarm priority buzzer Warning: The buzzer sounds twice and is then muted. ACK Warning generated. Buzzer muted Buzzer ON Time Buzzer OFF 0.5 seconds IEC 61924-2 mode, warning priority buzzer 25.11 Alert Priority, Alert State There are seven priority numbers according to the priority of the alert and alert state. Priority of Alert state alert 1 Emergency, Not acknowledged, Not rectified Alarm Priority no. High 2 Warning 3 Emergency, Not acknowledged, Rectified Alarm 4 Warning 5 Low Not acknowledged, Not rectified Not acknowledged, Rectified Emergency, Acknowledged, Not rectified Alarm 6 Warning Acknowledged, Not rectified 7 Caution Not rectified 25-7 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) 25.12 Alert Icons The alert icons show the state of all alerts. Icon Alert state Icon description Alert priority: Emergency, Alarm Not acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with black loudspeaker in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Not acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with crossed out black loudspeaker Buzzer temporarily silenced in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with black exclamation point in center of triangle. Not acknowledged/Rectified Red triangle with black check mark in center of triangle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat. Acknowledge not allowed for alarm Red triangle with black cross in middle of triangle. Presented with first two icons above. Alert priority: Warning Not acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Not acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with crossed out black Buzzer temporarily silenced loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black exclamation point in center of circle. Not acknowledged/Rectified Yellow-orange circle with black check mark in center of circle. Lights 3 s, off 1 s, repeat. Acknowledge not allowed for warning Yellow-orange circle with a cross in middle of circle. Presented with first two warning icons above. Alert priority: Caution Caution 25-8 Steadily displayed yellow square with black exclamation point in center of square. 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) 25.13 AMS Mode Operations 25.13.1 How to select the AMS mode Select [AMS] with the operating mode button (the leftmost button on the Status bar) to activate the AMS mode. The configuration of the button depends on the monitor configuration. MONITOR (ECDIS, Conning or AMS) ECDIS ECDIS . CONNING EC-3000 AMS Single monitor configuration and operating mode button MAIN MONITOR (ECDIS only) SUB MONITOR (AMS or Conning) CONNING CONNING EC-3000 AMS Dual monitor configuration and operating mode button 25-9 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) 25.13.2 AMS mode windows The AMS mode shows alert information in three windows: [ACTIVE ALERT], [ALERT LOG] and [ALERT LIST]. The windows can be selected with the corresponding buttons on the Status bar. Alerts can be acknowledged from any window, by clicking the alert. Window selection buttons Operating buttons, indications (See page 22-2.) ACTIVE ALERT window The [ACTIVE ALERT] window shows the status of all active alerts. A maximum of 20 alerts is shown per page. When there are more than 20 active alerts, a new page is created to hold the new alerts. You can move between pages with the arrow buttons. The background color of an unacknowledged emergency or alarm flashes red and an unacknowledged warning flashes yellow-orange. The text of an acknowledged emergency or alarm is red and the text of an acknowledged warning is yellow-orange. The text of a caution is yellow. Category B alerts can be acknowledged by clicking the alert. The buzzer for category A alerts can be temporarily stopped by clicking the alert; but, acknowledgement must be done from the equipment that generated the alert. See the next page for a description of the contents of the list. 25-10 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Item name Priority Filter Description Filter the list by alert priority, [Emergency], [Alarm], [Warning], [Caution]. Source Filter Filter the list by the source of the alert, [Navigation], [Communication], [External]. Category Filter Filter the list by category, A, B or C. Decision Support box Displays the reason for an alert and troubleshooting tip when an information icon is clicked. [], [] Select the page to display, when there are more than 20 (page selection buttons) active alerts. Greyed out when inoperative. Alert Icon description Provides a description of the alert icons. button Emergency/Alarm icons (Red) Warning icon (Yellow-orange) Caution icon (yellow) Alarm icon (Red) Warning icon (Yellow-orange) 7 8 9 10 11 12 Alert state icon Alert Text Source Occurred Time(UTC) ACKed Time(UTC) Information icon 13 Silence button Show alert state by icon. Displays alert no. and name of alert. The name of the device that generated the alert. The time (UTC) the alert occurred. The time (UTC) the alert was acknowledged. Click the icon to display a description of the alert (reason for alert and troubleshooting tip) in the Decision Support box. Note that some alerts provide no information. Silence the buzzer. 25-11 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) ALERT LOG window The [ALERT LOG] window provides a comprehensive list of generated alerts. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 25-12 Item name Current Alert box Description This box shows the name of the active alert that has the highest priority. You can acknowledge the alert by clicking the box. Priority Filter Filter the list by the alert priority, [Emergency]. [Alarm], [Warning], [Caution]. Source Filter Filter the list by the source of alert, [Navigation], [Communication], [External]. Category Filter Filter the list by alert category, A, B or C. Log Search box Enter the text string to search. Search button Click this button to search the text string entered in the [Log Search] box. Reset button Stop the text search and restore the list to its pre-search state. Export Log button Export the contents of the log to a USB flash memory, in .dat format. [], [] Select the page to display, when there are more than 20 (page selection buttons) alerts. Greyed out when inoperative. Priority Priority of the alert. Cat. Category of the alert. Alert Text Alert no. and name of alert. Source The name of the device that generated the alert. Occurred Time(UTC) The time (UTC) the alert occurred. ACKed Time(UTC) The time (UTC) the alert was acknowledged. Rectified Time(UTC) The time (UTC) the alert was rectified. 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) ALERT LIST window The [ALERT LIST] window provides a context-based list of generated alerts, by source and priority. No. 1 Item name Current Alert box 2 3 Alert Source window Priority filter 4 5 Category filter [], [] (page selection buttons) Alert state icon Alert priority, category, alert text 6 7 Description This box shows the name of the active alert(s), in order of priority. Alert sources, [Navigation], [Communication], [External]. Filter the list by the alert priority, [Emergency], [Alarm], [Warning], [Caution]. Filter the list by the alert category, A, B or C. Select the page to display, when there are more than 20 alerts. Shows alert state. (Active alerts only) The data (priority, category, alert no., alert name) of all alerts related to the alert source selected from the [Alert Source] window are shown in green. However active alerts are shown in red (emergency and alarm), yellow-orange (warning) or yellow (caution). 25-13 25. ALERT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (option) This page is intentionally left blank. 25-14 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS This chapter covers the type approval testing for the following autopilots: • Type Approval TC-3000: YOKOGAWA PT-500A, TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000, EMRI FAP-2000, EMRI FAP-3000. (These Autopilots comply with IEC 62065 Ed.1.0.) Configuration ECDIS FMD-3xxx ECDIS Monitor or 100-230VAC 100-230VAC MU-231 100-230VAC MU-231 MU-190 100-230VAC MU-190 ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar (FCR-2xx9, FAR-2x07) GPS navigator Processor Unit EC-3000 Gyrocompass or Speed log Autopilot Digital IN MC-3020D Analog IN MC-3010A Sensor Adapter Control/Serial MC-3000S Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Digital OUT MC-3030D Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 100-230VAC Steering Gear System Engine AIS ARPA RADARS LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG GYRO COMPASS Serial Interface(IEC61162) POSITIONING FIX2 Backup Navigator Alarm POSITIONING FIX1 26.1 : MANDATORY : ALTERNATIVE : OPTIONAL : OPTIONAL, BUT NOT USED BY TCS : EXTERNAL SENSOR or EQUIPMENT 26-1 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.2 Controls 26.2.1 EMRI FAP-2000 Control Panel 12 13 FURUNO GYRO ALARM 10 LIGHT MEDIUM 7 RESET LOADED ECONOMY MANUAL SPEED MEDIUM FUNC. SETUP OFF COURSE SET HEADING 8 PRECISE ON LIMIT 11 ROUTE TRACK TURN RUD.LIMIT DEG. SPEED KNOTS RAD. 4 PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE AUTO LIMIT 5 6 RADIUS CONTROL HEADING CONTROL SPEED WARN 15 PORT READY ° /MIN INCREASE 14 HEADING ROT. N.M. 9 GO TO WAYPOINT 3 16 GO TO TRACK STBD START HEADING CHANGE ACKN. WARNING PROGRAM TRACK 2 1 DECREASE FAP-2000 AUTOPILOT 17 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 26-2 18 Description PROGRAM TRACK: Program Track-controlled heading change using set radius. Also for steering with selected TT models. GOTO TRACK: Track-controlled route steering. GOTO WAYPOINT: Course-controlled route steering. PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE: Program heading-controlled course change using set radius. RADIUS CONTROL: Immediate radius-controlled course change using set radius. HEADING CONTROL: Immediate heading-controlled course change using set rudder angle limit. Loading condition indicator - Light, Medium or Loaded. Performance indicator - Economy, Medium or Precise. 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Status indicator - Shows selected mode and state of readiness: • ROUTE: FAP-2000 route steering • TRACK: FAP-2000 control mode • TURN: FAP-2000 track controlled turn • HEADING: FAP-2000 control mode • READY: FAP-2000 in operation Alert indicator and buzzer control: • ALARM lamp lights for FAP-2000 related alarms and errors. • RESET button acknowledges FAP-2000 related alarms and errors. Special function buttons: • MANUAL SPEED: Manually enter speed. • FUNC. SETUP: Adjust panel dimmer. • Up, Down arrow buttons: Set manual speed value, auto speed, rudder limit function, performance and conditions. Set heading display includes: • Off course alert • Turn side • Rudder-on limit indication Gyro reading and a bar graph showing rate of turn Rudder displays: • Rudder set point in the Radar Control mode. • Rudder limit in the Heading Control mode. • AUTO LIMIT lamp lights to indicate selection of automatic rudder limit function. Speed displays: • ROT in the Radar Control mode. • Speed in the Heading Control mode. • Speed warning indicator (LOG FAILURE or LOW). Tiller: • Set course and radius. • PORT and STBD lamps show when the tiller can set course. • INCREASE and DECREASE lamps show when the tiller can set radius or rudder angle limit. START HEADING CHANGE button: • Flashes if the newly set heading is different from used set heading. • Push to start course change. ACKN WARNING button: • Lights when an alert is generated. • Push to acknowledge an alert. 26-3 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.2.2 EMRI FAP-3000 Steering Control Unit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-10 11 26-4 Description PROGRAM NEXT button: Shows next heading, next course, next radius, next rudder limit field. CALL REMOTE CTRL button: Initiates integrated control with external navigation equipment (ECDIS, etc.) CALL COURSE CTRL button: Heading-controlled course change using set radius CALL HEADING CTRL button: Immediate heading-controlled course change using set rudder angle limit. RADIUS button: Immediate radius-controlled course change using set radius. Tiller • Set course and radius. • PORT and STBD lamps show when the tiller can set course. • INCREASE and DECREASE lamps show when the tiller can set radius or rudder angle limit. EXECUTE button: Push to start course change. SELECT buttons, arrow buttons: Select item to set (manual speed value, auto speed, rudder limit function, performance and conditions) with arrow buttons. ALERT ACKN button: Lights when alert is generated; push to acknowledge alert. 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.2.3 TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000 Steering Control Unit 1: Mode selection unit 2: Mode selection switch 3: Non-follow-up unit 4: Non-follow-up steering lever 5: Auto steering control knobs 6: HCS unit (see next page) 7: Course setting knob 8: Remove control selection unit 9: Repeater unit 10: Repeater synchronizing knob 11: Repeater switch 12: Helm unit 13: Steering wheel 14: System selection unit 15: System selection switch 16: Order rudder angle indicator 17: PS display lamps 18: Alert unit 19: Max. rudder angle selection unit 20: Max. rudder angle selection switch 26-5 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS Power System indicator indicator Bar graph selection indicator Data selection Bar graph display indicator Data display display Data Steering mode indicator No.1 AUTO SET COURSE display Rudder limit angle indicator Group alarm indicator Individual alarm indicator HCS Unit Beneath lid ADPT control (course-keeping mode, OPN, CNF) WEATHER control (PID weather adjustment) RUDDER LIMIT control (Rudder angle limit) RATE control (rate of turn) No. 2 Auto setting adjustment section (same controls as in No.1 section) No. 1 Auto setting adjustment section RUDDER control (Rudder ratio) PILOT WATCH control (Pilot watch) ADPT control: Select OPN (Open Sea) when economical operation is required. The course is followed with the least necessary steering, allowing a little meandering when; for example, sailing on the open sea. The CNF (Confined) position keeps the ship straight on the course, for better route steering accuracy. Large rudder may be necessary. The ADPT and CNF/OPN lamps are turned on. WEATHER control: Adjust this control when the weather or sea state changes. The ship should go straight with a rudder angle as small as possible (a lower angle than 5 degrees is desirable), with few rudder operations (less than six times a minute is desirable). The PID lamp goes on when the manual PID is active. RUDDER control: Set the best value of the rudder ratio changes according to the ship's speed. RATE control: Set the best value of the rate of turn changes according to the loading condition. 26-6 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS PILOT WATCH control: Set the amount of course deviation to allow in automatic steering. An alert is generated at the Autopilot when the deviation is more than the value set. RUDDER LIMIT control: Limit the rudder motion to the least necessary rudder angle during AUTO steering. Steering override units FU Override Unit Starting steering override: 1) Confirm that the Ready lamp in the FU unit is ON. 2) Press the Override steering switch to give the control of the steering to this unit, by the Override steering knob. A beep sounds intermittently then the selected steering mode indicator flashes. Override steering knob Ready lamp Override steering switch Servo loop fail lamp Buzzer Dimmer knob Stopping steering override: 1) Push the ON/OFF switch to show ON in the FU override unit or push the RESET switch on the Override reset unit in the steering stand to return to the previous steering mode. 2) If the steering mode was AUTO, the heading at the time override steering became active is set as heading. Auto resume is disabled if the steering mode was RC/NAV. To restore the RC mode, turn the mode selection switch to another steering mode then select the RC mode again. Override indicator Ready Ready lamp lamp Override steering reset switch Dimmer kno Dimmer knob 26-7 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS FU Override NFU Controller Starting steering override: 1) Confirm that the Ready lamp in the NFU controller is ON. 2) Pull out the pin stopper inserted in the override NFU controller and turn the lever to the desired direction. Beeps sounds then the selected steering mode flashes. The ON lamp in the Override reset unit is lit. 3) The rudder is taken when the lever is turned, and the rudder stops when the lever is returned to the neutral position. Stopping steering override: 1) Push the Override steering reset switch on the override reset unit in the steering stand to return to the previous steering mode. 2) If the steering mode was AUTO, the heading at the time the override steering became active is set as heading. Auto resume is disabled if the steering mode was RC/NAV. To restore the RC mode, turn the mode selection switch to another steering mode then select the RC mode again. 26-8 Override steering lever Pin stopper Override indicator Ready lamp Override steering reset switch Dimmer knob 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.2.4 YOKOGAWA PT-500A Steering Control Unit Steering Repeater Compass Auto Steering Unit Steering Mode Selector Non-Follow Up Steering Lever System Selector Switch Steering Handle Control Steering Repeater Compass Heading Steering Dial Auto Steering Unit Steering Mode Selector Non-Follow-Up Steering Lever System Selector Switch Steering Handle Description Shows heading. Rotate to set heading. Provides controls for automatic steering functions. Select NAVI, AUTO, HAND, or RC (Remote Control) steering mode. Steers the rudder in the direction selected, port or starboard. Selects the system to use: OFF, FU-1 (No.1 operating system), FU-2 (No.2 operating system, NFU (Non-follow-up steering) Steers the vessel. 26-9 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.3 Steering Modes 26.3.1 EMRI FAP-2000, FAP-3000 The FAP-2000, FAP-3000 receives position, heading and speed data, compares them with the track section to be steered, and applies that information to calculate and command the necessary rudder angle. Hand (manual) steering modes The following hand steering modes are available without the autopilot: Steering wheel, Wing steering control, and Override tiller. While in a hand steering mode, the ECDIS indicates the rudder angle and the hand steering mode. Autopilot steering modes The autopilot steering modes are selected from the autopilot control panel. Heading control mode The autopilot steering modes are selected from the autopilot control panel. • Mode selection: HEADING CONTROL (FAP-2000), CALL HEADING CTRL button (FAP-3000) • The HEADING CONTROL (FAP-2000), CALL HEADING CTRL button (FAP-3000) lights. • Immediate course change when the tiller is used to set the heading. • Course change is defined as heading controlled by the set rudder angle limit. Radius control mode The Radius Control steering mode can be used always because it does not require position data. • Mode selection: RADIUS button • The lamp on the RADIUS button (FAP-2000, FAP-3000) and CALL HEADING CTRL button (FAP-3000) lights. • Course change is radius controlled with the set radius. • If wind, current, etc. affect the ship, the ship will drift (inside or outside) from the planned turn. This is displayed on the radar screen. Program heading change mode The Program Heading Change steering mode can be used always because it does not require position data. • Mode selection: PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE (FAP-2000), PROGRAM NEXT button (FAP-3000) • The PROGRAM NEXT button (FAP-3000) lights. • The tiller is first used to set a new heading and radius, which are also displayed on the radar screen. • The START HEADING CHANGE (FAP-2000), EXECUTE button (FAP-3000) flashes if the newly set heading is different from the currently used heading. • Start course change by pushing the START HEADING CHANGE (FAP-2000) button, EXECUTE button (FAP-3000). • After activation, control is returned to the RADIUS button (FAP-2000, FAP-3000). • If wind, current, etc. affect the ship, the ship will drift (inside or outside) from the planned turn. This is displayed on the radar screen. 26-10 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.3.2 TOKYO KEIKI PR-6000, YOKOGAWA PT-500A Steering functions are available when the ECDIS system is connected to the Autopilot. To use a steering mode, set your Autopilot’s system selection switch to the FU-1 (PT500A) or No. 1 (PR-6000) position. Hand (manual) steering mode (Mode selector: HAND) Set the Steering Mode Selector Switch to HAND. The ECDIS displays the rudder angle and indicates the steering mode in the [Route Information] box. Autopilot steering mode (Mode selector: AUTO) The operator sets the required heading of the ship with the Course Setting knob. Turns are controlled by the rudder limit or rate of turn and are started the operator. Turn the Mode selection switch to the AUTO position, and the set course is shown in the SET. COURSE display. The initial value of the set course is the ship's heading at that time. To change the course, press the Course setting knob and release it when the required course appears. Now, the course deviation (CO.DEV: COURSE DEVIATION) is shown in the bar graph and AUTO is lit. AUTO goes off when the ship is following new course. When the loading condition changes remarkably, yawing can large at the departure. Then, do auto course; change by 20° of port and starboard two or three times, and follow the state for approx. 15 minutes. Turn controlled by the rudder angle: When a new course is set, turns are controlled by the rudder angle. You can set the required rudder angle limit with the Rudder limit knob. Turn controlled by rate of turn: Press the AUTO unit <-SEL switch a number of times to light the data selection indicator R.O.T. and show the rate of turn (unit deg/ min). Now, press the DATA CHANGE switch (located at the lower right) to show the turn rate order. The displayed value can be changed with - or + while pressing the DATA CHANGE switch. This value becomes the turn of rate order during automatic course change. The setting, however, cannot be changed during automatic course change. Route steering mode (Mode selector: NAVI (PT-500A), RC (PR-6000)) GoSEA mode (open sea mode): The planned track is followed at moderate and "economical accuracy" between waypoints and also during the turns (position-controlled turn). When the ship nears a waypoint, the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn. GoAW mode (all waters mode): The planned track is followed at the "maximum accuracy" between waypoints and also during the turns (position-controlled turn). When the ship nears a waypoint, the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn. Non-follow-up steering mode (Mode selector: NFU) (PR-6000) The operator sets the steering mode selector to NFU and steers with the Non-FollowUp lever. While in the NFU steering mode the ECDIS system displays both the rudder angle and the steering mode. 26-11 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS Remote hand steering mode (Mode selector: RC) (PR-6000) When the Mode selection switch mode is set to RC, the mode becomes RC, not the selected condition. The steering mode indicator “RC” flashes. The hand steering is in use while “RC” flashes. (This operation is like the HAND mode.) At this time you can switch to the remote steering mode. Press the Enable switch button while pressing the Steering location selection switch. The lamp of the steering location comes on. (See Note 1.) The state of the steering mode indicator RC changes from flashing to lighting. Note 1: If your RC Selection Unit does not have the Enable switch button, like the figure below, press the NAV button to start the TCS. Steering mode indicator Steering location selection switch (P/W, W/H, S/W) Nav entry switch Enable switch Remote control selection unit Steering mode selection switch Remote control steering position Note 2: When you select the RC mode, select "RC" in one motion. Do not stop at any of the secondary positions on the switch, to prevent loss of the TCS. If the TCS is lost, first check that the rudder is centered then restore manual steering (HAND) at the autopilot. Restart TCS (GoAW) at the ECDIS then reselect RC. 26-12 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.3.3 Summary of steering modes Route steering modes (all autopilots) Mode Item Set course Set radius Radius control Design before execution Wind, current, etc. compensation running straights between WPT Wind, current, etc. compensation in turns Needs a gyrocompass Needs a log Precision of position-fixing equipment Needs direct SOG/COG sensor GoSEA GoAW Automatic Automatic Yes Yes Low gain Yes Automatic Automatic Yes Yes High gain Yes Yes Yes Good(GPS) No Yes Yes High(GPS) No Summary of autopilot steering modes (FAP-2000, FAP-3000) Heading Control Radius Control Program Heading Change Program Track Set heading Set radius Radius control Design before execution Wind, current, etc. compensation Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Needs a gyrocompass Needs a log Needs precise position-fixing equipment Needs direct SOG/COG sensor Yes No No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Item 26-13 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.4 Autopilot Functions at the ECDIS Autopilot functions are available in the Voyage navigation mode. Click the [NAVI] button to get into this mode. [Track Control Status] Preconditions for Track Control Start are missing: AP connection error. Instant Track TC: (1) TCS buttons TCS TCS Setting State Go AW Go SEA The buttons in the TCS button group do the following tasks. See section 26.6. [TCS]: Opens the TCS button group. [TCS Setting]*: Selects a steering mode, [GoAW] or [GoSEA]. *Not shown on FAP-2000. [TCS State]: Shows or hides the [Track Control Status] window. See "Messages" on page 26-19. 26-14 (2) [Track Control Status] window MANUAL (3) [Route Information] box [Track Control Status] Preconditions for Track Control Start are missing: AP connection error. The [Track Control Status] window displays a message when the route steering preconditions are not complete. See "Messages" on page 26-19. TC: GoAW Appr. Enabled The [TC] field shows Autopilot status. In the example above, the status is [GoAW Appr. Enabled]. See section 26.7.1 for a description of the autopilot status information that appears in this box. 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.5 How to Select the ECDIS to Control the Autopilot If the ship has more than one ECDIS, you can select the ECDIS to control the Autopilot. The ECDIS are connected to the Autopilot via a hardware switch to permit manual switching of the ECDIS. HUB-3000 FMD-3xx0 HUB-100 FMD-3xx0 Hardware switch Autopilot For example, ECD0002 is currently the primary ECDIS and ECD003 is the secondary ECDIS. Then, to swap primary and secondary ECDIS units, do as follows. 1. If the TCS is engaged to the ECDIS, stop the TCS. CAUTION: DO NOT switch the ECDIS units while the TCS is engaged. Stop the TCS, then switch the units. Failure to disengage the TCS from the ECDIS can cause sudden and violent movement, creating a potentially dangerous situation. 2. Switch from ECD002 to ECD003 with the hardware switch. 3. Open the ECDIS menu. 4. From the [General] menu, open the [TCS] dialog box. 5. Click the radio button [ECD003]. 6. Click the [Save] button to finish. Then, the [TCS] button (InstantAccess bar) at the ECDIS formerly selected as Primary becomes inoperative (greyed out) and the [TCS] button at the ECDIS now selected as Primary becomes operative. Description of items in TCS dialog box Start: The deviation threshold for the planned route and heading at the start of track control. Alert Threshold: The deviation threshold for the planned route and heading in route monitoring and track control. Min Maneuvering Speed: The minimum allowable maneuvering speed in track control. A speed lower than this triggers the low speed alarm. 26-15 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.6 How to Activate, Deactivate the Track Control System (TCS) from the ECDIS 26.6.1 How to activate the TCS The TCS cannot be activated if the route steering preconditions have not been met. A related alert and status message appear on the ECDIS. See section 26.7.2 for the status messages. FAP-3000, PR-6000, PT-500A 1. Click the [TCS] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the TCS button group. TCS TCS Setting State Go AW Go SEA 2. Click the [TCS Setting] and [Go AW] or [Go SEA] buttons to activate the route steering. 3. Do one of the following: FAP-3000: Push the CALL REMOTE CTRL button. PR-6000: Select the RC mode. PT-500A: Select the NAVI mode. FAP-2000 At the Autopilot, push the GoAW or Go SEA button as appropriate. The TCS starts with the steering mode selected. 26.6.2 How to deactivate the TCS Change the steering mode at the Autopilot to hand to automatic. 26-16 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.7 Route Steering Related Indications, Alerts and Messages Generated by ECDIS 26.7.1 Route steering related information in Route Information box The [TC] field in the [Route Information] box shows the route steering related information. TC: GoAW Appr. Enabled Indication Reason Comments AUTO Automatic steering activated. DPS* Dynamic Positioning System activated. GoAW GoAW mode activated. GoAW Appr. Enabled Shown between the time of the WPT prewarning notice and its acknowledgement. GoAW GC Great circle navigation in the GoAW mode. GoAW Turn Turning in the GoAW mode. GoAW Turn Enabled Shown between the time of the prewarning acknowledgement and the beginning of the turn. GoSEA The GoSEA mode activated. GoSEA Appr. Enabled Shown between the time of the WPT prewarning notice and its acknowledgement. GoSEA GC Great circle navigation in the GoSEA mode. GoSEA Turn Turning in the GoSEA mode. GoSEA Turn Enabled Shown between the time of the prewarning acknowledgement and the beginning of the turn. JOY* Joystick is being operated. MANUAL Manual steering activated. NAVI Mode is different from GoAW or GoSEA. Service State Vessel is now making gradual advancement [TC] is yellow. (instead of immediate). [TC] is red TCS module error found. The TCS cannot be started. [TC] is yellow Service state or TCS module status is NA. *Not shown on FAP-2000, FAP-3000, PR-6000. 26-17 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.7.2 Alerts and messages when precondition for route steering are not complete When you select the GoAW mode and change the steering mode to NAVI at the Autopilot to activate the route steering, but route steering preconditions are not complete, an alert and a message are given. Alerts Route steering precondition related alerts appear in the [Alert] box, at the bottom-right position on the ECDIS screen. The alert flashes if it is an alarm or warning category alert. 158 156 Course Difference Alert ID no. and alert name Alert "158 Course Difference" informs you that there is a difference between the current heading of your ship and the required heading. The alert threshold is set during the installation. Alert "172 Off Track Alarm" appears if the ship is outside the channel limits of the route. Alert "665 Auto Pilot Mode Conflict" informs you that neither the ECDIS nor the Autopilot can start the route steering mode. First change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2 then check that the preconditions for the route steering are complete. *1 REMOTE CONTROL on FAP-3000 *2 HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000 Alert "690 TC Start Timeout" informs you that the 60-second timeout has passed before you changed the mode to NAVI. After you select the GoSEA or GoAW at the ECDIS, you have 60 seconds to change the mode to NAVI, otherwise alert 690 is given. 26-18 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS Messages The message in the [Track Control Status] window (at the top of the display) states the reason why the preconditions for the start of track control are not complete. [Track Control Status] Preconditions for Track Control Start are missing: AP connection error. This window can be shown or hidden with the [TCS State] button. TCS TCS TCS Setting State Only PR-6000, PT-500A show TCS Setting. TCS State Click the button to show or hide message window. Window OFF (gray) TCS State Window ON (blue) Messages in the Track Control Status window Message "AP connection error" "AP heading error" Reason Problem with connections at the Autopilot. No HDG at Autopilot. "AP not ready" AP is in the NFU mode. "Off course" "Invalid HDG" Ship is off course. No HDG at ECDIS. "Speed too low" Current speed is lower than that set as the maneuvering speed. "Not using filter" "Out of channel" The filter is not being used. You tried to activate the route steering outside the channel limits. "Unreliable POSN" Position data is not reliable. Action Check the Autopilot. Check connections, heading source. Select NAVI (REMOTE CONTROL on FAP-3000) mode. Correct your course. Check connections, heading source. Raise speed to match maneuvering speed set. Steer the ship inside the channel then try to activate the route steering again. Check navigator. 26-19 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.7.3 Alerts given when approaching a waypoint This section provides examples of how the ECDIS responds to acknowledged, unacknowledged alerts when approaching a waypoint. Condition 1: No acknowledgement to alerts 1. The vessel’s position is 90 seconds from the WOL. 2. The ECDIS releases the Early Course Change Indication (ECCI), which is the Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication". 3. The ECCI is not acknowledged. 4. The vessel’s position is now 30 seconds from the WOL. 5. The ECDIS releases the Course Change Alarm (CCA), which is the Alert "152 Wheel Over Line". 6. The vessel passes the WOL. 7. 30 seconds after the vessel passes the WOL, the ECDIS outputs the Backup Navigator Alarm (contact signal, N/O or N/C) to the BNWAS. 8. The CCA is acknowledged. 9. The ECDIS stops the Backup Navigator Alarm and resets the contact signal. 90 sec. before WOL No ACK 30 sec. before WOL No ACK (1) ECCI released 30 sec. after WOL WOL (2) CCA released No ACK (3) Backup navigator alarm released Condition 2: Early course change acknowledged, actual course change not acknowledged 1. The vessel’s position is 90 seconds from the WOL. 2. The ECDIS releases the Early Course Change Indication (ECCI), which is the Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication". 3. The ECCI is acknowledged. 4. The vessel’s position is 30 seconds from the WOL. 5. The ECDIS releases the Course Change Indication (CCI), which is the Alert "151 Actual Course Change Indication". 6. The CCI is not acknowledged. 7. When the vessel passes the WOL, the ECDIS releases the Course Change Alarm (CCA), which is the Alert "152 Wheel Over Line". 8. The CCA is not acknowledged. 9. 30 seconds after the vessel passes the WOL, the ECDIS outputs the Backup Navigator Alarm (contact signal, N/O or N/C) to the BNWAS. 10. The CCA is acknowledged. 26-20 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 11. The ECDIS stops the Backup Navigator Alarm and resets the contact signal. 90 sec. before WOL ACK (1) ECCI released 30 sec. before WOL No ACK (2) CCI released 30 sec. after WOL 㪮㪦㪣 No ACK (3) CCA released (4) Backup navigator alarm released Waypoint-related indications in the Route Information box The text "GoSEA Appr. Enabled" or "GoAW Appr. Enabled" appears in the [Route Information] box until you acknowledge the Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication". When you acknowledge the waypoint approach alert, the text "GoSEA Turn Enabled" or "GoAW Turn Enabled" appears in the [Route Information] box. During a turn, the text "GoSEA Turn" or "GoAW Turn" appears in the [Route Information] box. Note: When you approach the last waypoint, the Alert "652 Last WPT Approach" appears. If you acknowledge Alert 652 when the Autopilot is in the NAVI mode, the route steering is automatically stopped and the system shows Alert "665 Auto Pilot Mode Conflict". Route steering is deactivated until the NAVI mode is selected again at the Autopilot. To return to the route steering, the ship's heading must be set toward the next waypoint and the ship must be inside the channel limits. Otherwise, an alert is given. 26-21 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.7.4 Other route steering indications and alerts Route steering indications in the Route Information box Permanent alerts appear in the [Route Information] box in red in any the steering mode. In the example below the [Off Track] value is shown in red when the vessel is outside the channel. Route steering alerts Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication" appears 90 seconds before you arrive to the wheel over line (WOL). Alert "152 Wheel Over Line" appears if (1) Alert "150 Early Course Change Indication" is not acknowledged within 30 seconds of arrival to the wheel over line, or (2) Alert "151 Actual Course Change Indication" is not acknowledged at the arrival at the wheel over point. If Alert 152 stays unacknowledged, Alert 150 is given at the next waypoint. Alert "153 Track Control Stop" appears when the heading signal is lost. Alert "156 Sensor Failure" appears when there is no gyro data or the conditions of Alert 156 have been valid for the last minute. Alert "158 Course Difference" appears when there is a large difference between the planned course and the current course. Alert "172 Off Track Alarm" appears when your vessel is off track. Alert "652 Last WPT Approach" appears when your vessel is near the last WPT in the route monitored. Alert "667 AP Receive Error" appears when the ECDIS cannot communicate with the Autopilot. Change the steering mode to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000). Alert "675 Use MAN Steering" is instruction for the user to change the steering mode to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000) or HAND. This alert is generated if there is not enough conditions to continue the TCS. 26-22 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.8 Route Steering Operations 26.8.1 How to stop or change a pre-enabled turn in route steering There are two conditions where an automatic turn in a route must be stopped or changed: • The turn cannot be done to the last value. • The turn is outside of the planned turn (too fast or too slow). How to stop a turn FAP-2000, PR-6000, PT-500A: Change the steering mode from NAVI to HAND. FAP-3000: Change the steering mode from REMOTE CONTROL to HAND. How to change a turn What to do Use different final value of set course How to execute the turn The problem is that radius control is only available in the NAVI*1 steering mode. When you change the steering mode to a mode different from NAVI*1, the ship stops following the radius. Below is what you can do: • Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2. This stops the turn completely and the current gyro heading is selected as the new set course for the Autopilot. Then, set a new final value for the set course and select an acceptable max. rudder angle to prevent too fast turning. • Turn the steering wheel to an acceptable angle to continue with a new radius (i.e. to equal previous rudder angle). Then, change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2. Continue manual steering. • Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to NFU, then use the NFU steering lever. Manually steer the ship. Compensate too fast turning As soon as you change the steering mode to something other than NAVI*1 the ship stops following the radius. Below is what you can do: • Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2. This stops the turn completely and the current gyro heading is selected as the new set course for the Autopilot. Then set a final value for the set course and select a suitable max. rudder angle to prevent too fast turning. • Set the steering wheel to a suitable angle to continue with a larger radius (i.e. smaller than previous rudder angle). Then change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to HAND. Manually steer the ship. • Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to NFU. Manually steer the ship. Compensate too slow turning As soon as you change the steering mode to something other than NAVI*1, the ship stops following the radius. Below is what you can do: • Set the steering wheel to a suitable angle to continue with a smaller radius (i.e. higher rudder angle than before). Then change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to HAND. Continue manual steering. • Change the steering mode from NAVI*1 to NFU. Manually steer the ship. *1 REMOTE CONTROL on FAP-3000 *2 HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000 26-23 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.8.2 Collision avoidance maneuver in route steering Route steering is often interrupted by a collision avoidance maneuver, but there are also several other reasons to interrupt route steering. There are several possibilities to set the collision avoidance or any other maneuver: • • • • Use the Non-Follow-Up steering lever to directly control rudder pumps. Use the Override steering. Use the Follow-Up rudder control. (Change mode from NAVI*1 to HAND.) Use the local Autopilot Heading control. (Change mode from NAVI*1 to AUTO*2) *1 REMOTE CONTROL on FAP-3000 *2 HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000 26.9 Steering Performance Below is a summary of how different environmental conditions change steering performance. 26.9.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead Environmental conditions Calm sea, no wind, no current Moderate wind and/or current High wind and/or current Heading control= AUTO COG is approx. the same as Set Course in Autopilot. Ship has a tenden- Ship follows monitored cy to drift. route. Ship is drifting. 1) Ship follows monitored route but may go outside channel limit area.* 2) Ship may have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit, however. There is no comShip follows monitored pensation for route. change. There is no com1) Ship may go outside pensation for channel limit but is “rechange. turned” to center of channel.* 2) Ship can have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit. Wind and/or current changes slowly. Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kn current perpendicular to track) Fast change of There is no comspeed (For exam- pensation for ple, speed dechange. creased from 20 to 7 kn) 26-24 Mode GoSea (FAP-2000/3000) GoAW (FAP-2000/3000) GoSea+RC (PR-6000) GoAW+RC (PR-6000) GoSea+NAVI (PT-500A) GoAW+NAVI (PT-500A) Ship follows monitored Ship follows monitored route. route accurately. Ship follows monitored route, but may need full channel limit area. Ship follows monitored route accurately. 1) Ship follows monitored route.* 2) Ship can have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit. Ship follows monitored route accurately. 1) Ship is kept within channel limit.* 2) Ship can have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit. Ship follows monitored route, but may need full channel limit area. 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS * The Track Control System can compensate drift up to 45 degrees. If the drift is larger, your ship may go outside the channel limit. 26.9.2 Expected steering performance for turns Environmental conditions Heading control= AUTO Calm sea, no wind, no current Ship does normal Autopilot turn under this condition. Ship does normal Autopilot turn under this condition. Ship does normal Autopilot turn under this condition. Moderate wind and/or current High wind and/or current Wind and/or current changes slowly. Sudden change of wind and/or current (For example sudden change from no current to 5 kn current perpendicular to track) Slow change of speed Ship does normal Autopilot turn under this condition. Ship does normal Autopilot turn under this condition. Ship does normal Autopilot turn under this condition. Fast change of Ship does normal speed (For exam- Autopilot turn under ple, speed dethis condition. creased from 20 to 7 kn) Mode GoSea (FAP-2000/3000) GoAW (FAP-2000/3000) GoSea+RC (PR-6000) GoAW+RC (PR-6000) GoSea+NAVI (PT-500A) GoAW+NAVI (PT-500A) Ship follows monitored Ship follows monitored route. route accurately. Ship follows monitored route. Ship follows monitored route accurately. 1) Ship follows monitored route, but may go outside channel limit area.* 2) Ship can have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit. Ship follows monitored route. 1) Ship follows monitored route.* 1) Ship may go outside channel limit but is “returned” to center of channel.* 2) Ship can have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit. 1) Ship is kept within channel limit.* Ship follows monitored route, but may need full channel limit area. Ship follows monitored route, but may need full channel limit area. Ship follows monitored route. 2) Ship can have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit. Ship follows monitored route accurately. 2) Ship can have a problem following monitored route inside the channel limit. Ship follows monitored route, but may need full channel limit area. * The Track Control System can compensate drift up to 45 degrees. If the drift is larger, your ship may go outside the channel limit. 26-25 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS 26.9.3 Expected steering performance under critical failure Below is a summary of the system behavior in different failures in the GoSEA or GoAW steering mode. Lost heading to Autopilot and/or ECDIS Immediately • • Within a few seconds • • • *1 26-26 Related Expected system alerts performance These alerts and warnings may be generated at the ECDIS: 1) Alert "450 Heading Sensor Not Available" 2) Alert "902 No Filter Source of COG/ SOG" 3) Alert "903 No Filter Source of Heading" The lamp*1 on the Autopilot’s Steering Control Unit (or Control Panel) lights. Alert "153 Track Con- TCS stops and trol Stop"* • If the ship is running *Transferred to BNstraight, the rudder orWAS if not acknowlder is frozen at the last edged within 30 value to approximately seconds. continue ahead. Alert "156 Sensor • If the ship is turning, the Failure" rudder order is frozen at Alert "665 Auto Pilot the last value to approxMode Conflict" imately continue the rate of turn. Operator action • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. PT-500A: EMRG ALM; PR-6000: RC, FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS Lost speed Associated alerts • Speed log data, VTG sentence lost. Alert "901 No FIlter Source of COG/SOG", Alert "902 No Filter Source of CTW/STW" given. • Alert "675 Use Man Steering" Repeated every two minutes Within 30 seconds Within 10 minutes Expected system performance Guidance for navigator • Alert "156 Sensor Failure" • Alert "153 Track Con- TCS stops and • If the ship is running trol Stop"* and Alert straight, actual heading "665 Auto Pilot Mode is used as set course. Conflict" are generated at the ECDIS. The • If the ship is turning, last-set course and ralamp*1 on the Autopidius are used to comlot’s Steering Control plete the turn. Unit lights. Operator action • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. • Change immediately to local Autopilot control. • Acknowledge alerts. • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. • Change the steering mode to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000). *Transferred to BNWAS if not acknowledged within 30 seconds. *1 PT-500A: CAUT ALM; PR-6000: RC; FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM Low speed Associated alerts • Alert "159 Low Speed Alarm". Expected system performance Operator action • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. Position discrepancy (position from only one GPS navigator is reliable) Precondition Associated alerts • If sensors in Filter calculation are NOT inside operator selected position discrepancy limit, Alert "851 Sensor Banned"* appears. * “222 Position Discrepancy” on FAP-2000. Expected system performance Operator action • Monitor situation. 26-27 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS Total lost position (position from ALL GPS navigators is unreliable) Precondition • • Within 30 seconds • • • • Repeated every two minutes Within 10 minutes Associated alerts Alert "290 EPFS1 COM Error" (example). OR The Kalman filter detects position jump, etc. Alert "156 Sensor Failure" Alert "170 Positioning System Failure". Alert "900 No Filter Source of Position". Alert "901 No Filter Source of COG/SOG". • Alert "675 Use MAN Steering" • Alert "153 Track Control Stop"* and Alert "156 Sensor Failure" are generated at the ECDIS. The lamp*1 on the Autopilot’s Steering Control Unit lights. *Transferred to BNWAS if not acknowledged within 30 seconds. *1 26-28 Expected system performance Operator action • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. • The Kalman filter is turned OFF and the system uses dead reckoning for positioning. • If you have a log or dual-axis log, then dead reckoning is based on them and the gyro. • If you have a log or dual-axis log, then dead reckoning is based on last valid speed from position sensors. Guidance for navigator • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. TCS stops and • If the ship is running straight, actual heading is used as set course. • If the ship is turning, last-set course and radius are used to complete the turn. • Change immediately to local Autopilot control. • Acknowledge alerts. • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. • Change the steering mode to AUTO (HEADING CONTROL on FAP-3000). PT-500A: EMRG ALM; PR-6000: RC; FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS Lost communication between Autopilot and ECDIS and vice versa Associated alerts • Alert "667 AP Receive Error" is generated at the ECDIS. • Alert "153 Track Control Stop"* is generated at the ECDIS. Track control is stopped and the lamp*1 on the Autopilot’s Steering Control Unit lights. Within 15 seconds After Alert "667 AP Receive Error" Expected system performance Guidance for the navigator Operator action • Acknowledge alerts. • Monitor situation. TCS stops and • Acknowledge alerts. • If the ship is running • Monitor situation. straight, actual heading • Change the steering is used as set course. mode to AUTO (HEAD• If the ship is turning, ING CONTROL on last set course and radiFAP-3000). us are used to complete the turn. *Transferred to BNWAS if not acknowledged within 30 seconds. *1 PT-500A: CAUT ALM; PR-6000: RC; FAP-2000, FAP-3000: ALARM 26-29 26. AUTOPILOT OPERATIONS This page is intentionally left blank. 26-30 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE Main Menu MENU bar (click) General Ship & Route Parameters Ship Parameters Route Parameters Instant Track * Set at installation MAX Speed (0.1 to 80 kn, 22.1) MAX Height (0.0 to 100 m, 16.1) MAX Draught (0.0 to 50 m, 20.0) Max R.O.T* WPT Approach* WPT Prewarning* Default Line Radius (0.1 to 3.0 NM, 0.8) Default CH Limit (10 to 1852 m, 185) Default Safety Margin (0 to 1000 m, 40) Delay before Initiating First Turn (30 to 600 sec, 60) Turn Radius (0.02 to 3.00 NM, 1) Channel Limit for Track Control (Auto, Manual (10 - 1852m)) Route Check Strictly Navigation Parameters (Show forwarding distances, set at installation.) TCS (Select the ECDIS unit to control Autopilot.) Sensor Cost Parameters Cost (Input values for Hour, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil) Fuel Consumption (Input values for Speed, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil) System/Local Select System Sensor Settings Sensor Type (System Sensor, Local Sensor) HDG SPD COG/ SOG POSN Local Sensor Settings HDG SPD COG/ SOG POSN Other Sensor Settings Other Sensor Data Source (Sensors, Manual) Stabilization Mode ( Bottom, Water) Sensor Type (GPS, LOG) Data Source (Sensors, Manual) Data Source (Sensors) Data Source (Sensors, Manual) Data Source (Sensors, Manual) Analog Gyro (No use) Manual Gyro Correction Stabilization Mode ( Bottom, Water) Sensor Type (GPS, LOG) Data Source (Sensors, Manual, Reference SPD, Drift) Data Source (Sensors) Data Source (Sensors, Manual) Wind Speed (kn, m/s) Reference (APPARENT (relative, ref. to heading), NORTH (true, ref. to North), THEORETICAL (true, ref. to heading) (Values for Bow, Mid and Aft) Depth Below Trans. Temperature (Temperature of water surface) Water Current (Course and speed of water current) Filter Status (Monitors sensor status and integrity.) (Con’t on next page) AP-1 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE (Con’t from previous page) DISP Basic Setting Chart Display Symbol Display Symbols (Paper Chart, Simplified) Depths (Two Color, Multi Color) Boundaries (Plain, Symbolized) Lightsectors (Limited, Full) Light Popup (OFF, ON) TM Reset (20-99%, 80) Shallow Pattern (None, Diamond) Shallow Hazard (ON, OFF) Standard (Checkbox for each of Unknown Object or Presentation; Chart Data Coverage; Standard Land Features; Water and Seabed Features; Traffic Routes; Cautionary Areas; Information Areas; Buoys and Beacons; Lights; Fog Signals; Radar; Services) Other (Checkbox for each of Information about Chart Data; Other Land Features; Soundings; Depth Contour Labels; Depth Contours, Magnetics, Currents; Seabed, Pipelines and Obstructions; Obstructions with Soundings; Service and Small Craft Facilities; Low Accuracy; Special Areas; Additional Information Available; Clearance, Bearings, Radio Channels; Other Text; Names for Position Report; Light Descriptions; Seabed; Swept Depth, Magnetics; Berth and Anchorage; Geographic Names, etc.; Land Elevation) AIO (Checkbox for Temporary Notice; Preliminary Notice; No Information) General Ship Outlines (ON, OFF) AIS Outlines (ON, OFF) True outlines shown if (Set length and beamwidth.) Velocity Vectors Ship Vectors (ON, OFF) Target Vectors (ON, OFF) Style (std ECDIS, Conventional) Time Increments Path Predictor Radar Antenna Tracking Own Ship CCRP Primary Past Tracks Secondary Pivot Style (Tick, Point) Length (1-120 min, 1) Labels (0-60 min, 0) Route Mariner Events User Events Auto Events Positions Show (Newer than 12 hours, Newer than 24 hours, Newer than 1 week, Newer than 2 weeks, Newer than 1 month, Newer than 3 months, All) Monitored Route Channel Limit Safety Margin Leg Marks (True, Relative) Wheel Over Line Planned Route Channel Limit Safety Margin Leg Marks (True, Relative) User Chart Labels Lines Clearing Lines Tidals Areas Circles Density (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%) NAVTEX* * Valid when NAVTEX receiver is activated at installation. Targets (Con’t on next page) AP-2 Color (Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown, Green) TT Size (Standard, Small) AIS ROT TAG Limit (0.0°/min to 720.0°/min, 0.0) TT Label (ON, OFF) AIS Label (ON, OFF) TT Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF) AIS Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF) Past Position TT Points (5, 10) AIS Points (5, 10) Style (Points, Points and dots) APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE (Con’t from previous page) Record Chart Alert Setting Set WARNING or CAUTION for Safety Contour*, Areas To Be Avoided, User Chart Danger, Traffic Separation Zone, Inshore Traffic Zone, Restricted Area, Caution Area, Offshore Production Area, Military Practice Area, Seaplane Landing Area, Submarine Transit Lane, Anchorage Area, Marine Farm / Aqua Culture, PSSA Area, Non-official ENC, No Vector Chart, Not Up-to-date, Permit Expired, UKC Limit) Shallow Contour (0-99 m, 10) Safety Depth (0-99 m, 20) *: Fixed at WARNING Safety Contour (0-99 m, 30) Deep Contour (0-99 m, 60) NAVI Log Voyage Target Log TT/AIS Setting Setting. 1 Shared PI Lines AIS DISP Filter Sleep All Targets Class A (ON, OFF) Class B (ON, OFF) Base Station (ON, OFF) Max Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12) Min Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0) AIS-CPA Auto Activate Max Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 0) Min Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0) Except Class B (ON, OFF) AIS Lost Target Filter Max Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12) Min Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0) Except Class B (ON, OFF) TT Lost Target Filter Max Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12) Min Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0) Own Ship (Shows own ship’s MMSI No., Name, Call Sign, Type, Description, Length, Width, Reference Bow, and Reference Port.) Voyage data NAV Tools Speed (1 to 10 kn, 5) Course (0.0 to 30.0°, 0.0) Log Interval (1 to 4 hours, 4) Distance Counter Bottom Odometer Trip Meter Water (same items as “Bottom”) Danger Target (Log Interval 1 to 100 min, 1) Setting. 2 NAV Status Limits Navigational Status (Underway using engine, At anchor, Not under command, Restricted maneuverability, Constrained by her draught, Moored, Aground, Engaged in fishing, Underway sailing, Reserved for high speed craft, Reserved for wing in ground, Reserved for future use, AIS-SART (active), Not defined) Persons (0 to 8191, 0) MAX Draught (0.0 to 25.5 m, 0.0) ETA Destination Truncate (Set fore and aft lengths of parallel lines) Monitoring (Set master and backup units) AP-3 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE Settings Menu Settings (Click) File Export (Select data to export (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data*). * Disable AMS File Import (Select data to import (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data*). to use File Maintenance (Restores last-saved route/user chart application and Route/user chart system.) Self Test (Check various components of the system.) Data Sharing (Share display brilliance setting among units) Customize Wheel rotation (Normal, Reverse) Key beep volume (0-3, 1) Alert sound volume (1-3, 3) Display Test (Display test patterns.) Keyboard Test (Test the ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit.) Screenshot (Manage screenshots.) User Default (Restore all user default settings.) CCRP AP-4 Select CCRP Display Filter (CCRP, Center of Gravity, Pivot Point, Radar Antenna, GPS Sensor, AIS Transponder, Echo Sounder, SDME Sensor) APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviations Abbreviation Meaning ACQ Acquire ACT Activate ADJ Adjustment AIS Automatic Identification System ANT Antenna Apr April ATON Aid To Navigation Aug August AUTO Automatic BB Blackbox BCR Bow Cross Range BCT Bow Cross Time BLU Blue BRG Bearing BT Bottom Tracking Caps Capital (letters) CAT Category CCRP Common Consistent Reference Point COG Course over the Ground CONFIG Configuration CORRE Correlation CPA Closest Point of Approach CPU Central Processing Unit CSE Course CU/TM Course-up/True Motion CYA CYAN Dec December DEMO Demonstration DISP Display AP-5 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviation AP-6 Meaning DR Dead Reckoning E English E East ETA Estimated Time of Arrival EXT External Feb February FILT Filter GPS Global Positioning System GRN Green GRY Gray Gyro Gyrocompass HDG Heading IHO International Hydrographic Organization IMO International Maritime Organization IND Indication INS Integrated Navigation System J Japanese Jan January Jul July Jun June kyd kiloyard L Long (pulse length) L/L Latitude/Longitude LAN Local Area Network LL Latitude, Longitude LO Low MAG Magnetic or Magenta MAN Manual Mar March MAX Maximum MID Middle min minute MIN Minimum MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviation Meaning MOB Man Overboard MON Monitor Navtex Navigational Telex NM Nautical miles NO. Number N North Nov November Oct October OP Operation OS Own Ship PC Personal Computer PERPENDIC Perpendicular PI Parallel Index (lines) POSN Position R Relative REF Reference Rel Relative RM Relative Motion RNG Range ROT Rate of Turn S South S1 (2) Short1(2) (pulse length) SAR Search And Rescue SART Search And Rescue Transponder SEL Select Sep September SM Statute Miles SOG Speed Over the Ground SPD Speed SPEC Specification STAB Stabilization STBY Stand-by SW Switch SYNC Synchronization AP-7 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviation AP-8 Meaning T True TB True Bearing TC Track Control TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach TCS Track Control System TGT Target TGT, TGTS Target, Targets TM True Motion True-G True-ground True-S True-sea TT Tracked Target or Target Tracking TTD Tracked Target Data TTG Time to go TTM Tracked Target Information TX Transmit UTC Universal Time, Coordinated VECT Vector VRM Variable Range Marker W West W/O Without WHT White WPT Waypoint WT Water Tracking YEL Yellow APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbols ECDIS symbols Symbol name and description Own ship - true scaled outline This can be displayed when based on user selection either beam width or length is more than 6 mm. Symbol graphic(s) Radar antenna position This symbol indicates location of the radar antenna. Select if position of radar antenna is displayed with symbol X by Symbol Display menu. Heading line This line originates from CCRP or Radar antenna position. CCRP: Consistent Common Reference Point Beam line This line passed through the CCRP or Radar antenna position. Velocity vector - time increments Velocity vector - stabilization indicator Ground stabilization is indicated by double arrowhead and water stabilization is indicated as single arrowhead. Past track System past track is indicated by thick line. Raw sensor primary past track is indicated by thin line. Raw sensor secondary past track is indicated by grey thin line. AP-9 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Past track - time increments Time increments are presented as single lines perpendicular to the past track. Symbol graphic(s) Past track - past positions Past positions are drawn as small filled circular symbols. Radar targets in acquisition state 5 mm in diameter Tracked radar targets TT: Std or small user selection by Symbol Display 3 mm in diameter Tracked radar targets - alternative TT: Std or small user selection by Symbol Display 1 mm in diameter Tracked radar targets - dangerous target Dangerous target symbol is red and it flash until acknowledged. 5 mm in diameter Sleeping AIS targets Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading unknown). If both heading and COG are unknown the orientation is toward top of display. Activated AIS targets Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading unknown). If both heading and COG are unknown the orientation is toward top of display. AP-10 Sleeping AIS target Sleeping AIS target with no CPA/TCPA data Activated AIS target Activated AIS target with no CPA/TCPA data APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Activated AIS targets - true scaled outline • This can be displayed when based on user selection either beam width or length is more than 7.5 mm. • AIS outline: ON/OFF Symbol graphic(s) Activated AIS targets - dangerous targets Dangerous target symbol is red and it flash until acknowledged. If both heading and COG are unknown the orientation is toward top of display. Dangerous target Dangerous target with no CPA/TCPA data Activated AIS targets - heading lines Activated AIS targets - heading lines - turn indicators AP-11 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Velocity vectors • Radar target • AIS target Velocity vectors - time increments • Radar target • AIS target Velocity vectors - path predictor AP-12 Symbol graphic(s) APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Target past positions Symbol graphic(s) AIS aid to navigation (ATON) Real ATON is without "V" and virtual ATON is with "V". An ATON in off position is yellow. AIS search and rescue transmitter -SART AP-13 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Selected targets Symbol graphic(s) Lost targets Lost target symbol is red and it flash until acknowledged. Waypoint WPT4 Next waypoint WPT4 AP-14 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Routes - Monitor Monitored route leg lines are dashed. Leg lines may indicate planned speed and bearing. Symbol graphic(s) W05a Planned Position W04 40 NM 15kn 136T 20 NM 1115/20Jan W05 Wheel over position 1115/20 Jan 15 deg 1213 Plotted positions Plotted position includes some labels. Type is DR, EP or Fix (Fix is without label). Examples of source labels are GNSS: G GPS: G DGPS: dG Loran: L etc. Line of position Abbreviation is LOP. Label TPL is used to indicate measurement transferred by dead reckoning. AP-15 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Tidal stream User defined tidal stream symbols are available as part of User Chart. Actual tidal stream use solid vector and predicted tidal stream use dashed vector. Danger highlight Route Plan, Route Monitor and own ship Chart Alarm search area use danger highlight to indicate violation against user selected dangers. Danger bearing Also called by traditional name clearing line. User defined clearing line symbols are available as part of User Chart. Event marker Event markers indicate events recorded into the Voyage record. The Man overboard event marker has the label “MOB”. User cursor Electronic bearing line (EBL) Second example show with range marker. Variable range marker (VRM) Range rings AP-16 Symbol graphic(s) APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Parallel index lines Symbol graphic(s) Symbols on operating buttons Symbol Meaning Minimize button (on InstantAccess bar) Symbol Meaning Screenshot capture Access AIS, Navtex message processing Monitor brilliance (FURUNO or Hatteland monitor only) Access user profile, common settings Color palette selection Information (show program no., operator's manual) Activate weather display Undo, redo AP-17 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE Digital Interface Input sentence ABK, ALR, CUR, DBT, DPT, DTM, ETL, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, HTD, MTW, MWV, NRX, OSD, PRC, RMC, ROT, RPM, RSA, RSD, THS, TLL, TRC, TRD, TTM, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VTG, XDR, XTE, ZDA Output sentences ABM, ACK, BBM, EVE, HTC, OSD, VBW, VSD, XTE Data reception Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in IEC 61162-2. The following parameters are used: Baud rate: 38,400 bps (HDT, THS, !AIVDM, !AIVDO, !AIABK, $AIALR). The baud rate of all other sentences is 4800 bps Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1 D0 Start bit D1 D2 D3 D4 Data bits D5 D6 D7 Stop bit Data Sentences Input sentences ABK - UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement $**ABK,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,x,x,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 1. MMSI of the addressed AIS unit (9 digits) 2. AIS channel of reception (No use) 3. Message ID (6, 8, 12, 14) 4. Message sequence number (0 - 9) 5. Type of acknowledgement (See below) 1 = message was broadcast (6 or 12), but not ACK by addressed AIS unit 2 = message could not be broadcast (quantity of encapsulated data exceeds five slots) 3 = requested broadcast of message (8, 14 or 15) has been successfully completed 4 = late reception of message (7 or 13) ACK that was addressed to this AIS unit (own ship and referenced a valid transaction 5 = message has been read and acknowledged on a display unit. AP-18 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE ALR - Set alarm state $**ALR,Hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c—c,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC (000000.00 - 235960.99) 2. Unique alarm number (identifier) at alarm source (000 - 999) 3. Alarm condition (A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded) 4. Alarm acknowledge state (A=acknowledged, V=not acknowledged) 5. Alarm description text (alphanumeric characters, max. 32) CUR - Current $**CUR,A,x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1. Validity of data (A=valid, V=not valid) 2. Data set number (0 - 9) 3. Layer number (0.0 - 3.0) 4. Current depth in meters (No use) 5. Current direction in degrees (0.00 - 360.00) 6. Direction reference in use (true or relative) 7. Current speed in knots (0.00 - 99.99) 8. Reference layer depth in meters (No use) 9. Heading (0 to 360.00) 10. Heading reference in use (true or magnetic) 11. Speed reference (B=Bottom track W=Water track P=Positioning system) DBT - Depth below transducer $**DBT,xxxx.x,f,xxxx.x,M,xxxx.x,F,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Water depth (0.00-99999.99) 2. feet 3. Water depth (0.00-99999.99) 4. Meters 5. Water depth (0.00-99999.99) 6. Fathoms DPT - Depth $**DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x,*hh 1 2 3 1. Water depth relative to the transducer, meters (0.00-99999.99) 2. Offset from transducer, meters (No use) 3. Minimum range scale in use (No use) DTM - Datum reference $**DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Local datum (W84=WGS84 W72=WGS72 S85=SGS85, P90=PE90 2. Local datum subdivision code (NULL or one character) 3. Lat offset, min (0 - 59.99999) 4. N/S 5. Lon offset, min (0 - 59.99999) 6. E/W 7. Altitude offset, meters (No use) 8. Reference datum (W84=WGS84 W72=WGS72 S85=SGS85, P90=PE90) AP-19 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE ETL - Engine telegraph operation status $**ETL,hhmmss.ss,a,xx,xx,a,x*hh 1 2 3 4 56 1. Event time (UTC) 2. Message type (O=order A=answerback) 3. Position indicator of engine telegraph 00 = Stop engine 01 = [AH] Dead Slow 02 = [AH] Slow 03 = [AH] Half 04 = Full 05 = [AH] Nav. Full 11 = [AS] Dead Slow 12 = [AS] Slow 13 = [AS] Half 14 = [AS] Fulll 15 = [AS] Crash Astern 4. Position indication of sub telegraph (000 to 100) 5. Operating location indicator (B=bridge P=port wing S=starboard wing C=engine control room E=engine side/local W=wing 6. Number of engine or propeller shaft (000 to 100) GGA - Global positioning system fix data $**GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1. UTC of position (no use) 2. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.00000) 3. N/S 4. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.00000) 5. E/W 6. GPS quality indicator (1 - 8) 7. Number of satllite in use (No use) 8. Horizontal dilution of precision (0.0 - 999.9) 9. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel (No use) 10. Unit, m (No use) 11. Geoidal separation (No use) 12. Unit, m (No use) 13. Age of differential GPS data (0 - 999) 14. Differential reference station ID (No use) GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude $**GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,a,x,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.00000) 2. N/S 3. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.00000) 4. E/W 5. UTC of position (No use) 6. Status (A=data valid V=data invalid) 7. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous D=Differential E=Estimated M=Manual input S=Simulator) AP-20 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE GNS - GNSS fix data $**GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,IIIII.III,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1. UTC of position (no use) 2. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.00000) 3. N/S 4. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.00000) 5. E/W 6. Mode indicator (P, R, D, F, A, E, M, S) N=No fix A=Autonomous D=Differential P=Precise R=Real Time Kinematic F=Float RTK E=Estimated Mode M=Manual Input Mode S=Simulator Mode 7. Total number of satellites in use (No use) 8. HDOP (0.00 - 999.99) 9. Antenna altitude, meters (-999.99 - 9999.99) 10. Geoidal separation (No use) 11. Age of differential data (0 - 99) 12. Differential reference station ID (No use) 13. Naivgational status indicator (S=Safe, C=Caution, U=Unsafe, V=Not valid) HDT - Heading, true $**HDT, xxx.x,T*hh 1 2 1. Heading, degrees (0.00 to 360.00) 2. True (T) HTD - Heading/Track control data $**HTD,A,x.x,a,a,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,A,A,A,x.x*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 141516 17 1. Override, A = in use, V = not in use 2. Commanded rudder angle, degrees 3. Commanded rudder direction, L/R = port/starboard 4. Selected steering mode 5. Turn mode R = radius controlled T = turn rate controlled N = turn is not controlled 6. Commanded rudder limit, degrees (unsigned) 7. Commanded off-heading limit, degrees (unsigned) 8. Commanded radius of turn for heading changes, n.miles 9. Commanded rate of turn to heading changes, deg/min 10. Commanded heading-to-steer, degrees 11. Commanded off-track limit, n.miles (unsigned) 12. Commanded track, degrees 13. Heading reference in use, T/M 14. Rudder status (A = within limits, V = limit reached or exceeded) 15. Off-heading status (A = within limits, V = limit reached or exceeded) 16. Off-track status (A = within limits, V = limit reached or exceeded) 17. Vessel heading, degrees MTW - Water temperature $**MTW,x.x,C 1 1. Water temperature, degrees C (-100.000 - 100.000) AP-21 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE MWV - Wind speed and angle $**MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh 1 2 3 45 1. Wind angle, degrees (0.00 - 360.00) 2. Reference (R/T) (R=Relative, T=Theoretical) 3. Wind speed (0.00 - 9999.99) 4. Wind speed units (K=km/h M=m/s N=nm) 5. Status (A) NRX - Navtex received data $**NRX,xxx,xxx,xx,aaxx,x,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,x.x,x.x, A,c--c,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1. Number of sentences (001 to 999) 2. Sentence number (001-999) 3. Sequential message ID (00 to 99) 4. Navtex message code (aaxx aa: AA to ZZ xx: 00 to 99) 5. Frequency table index (0 to 9, null) 6. UTC of receipt of message (No use) 7. Day (0 to 31, null) 8. Month (01 to 12, null) 9. Year (0000 to 9999, null) 10. Total number of characters in this series of NRX sentences (1 to 8000, null) 11. Total number of bad characters (0 to 8000, null) 12. Status indication (A=correct message, V=incorrect message; Null) 13. Message body (English alphanumeric characters) OSD - Own ship data $**OSD,x.x,A,x.x,R,x.x,R,x.x,x.x,N*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Heading, degrees true (0.00 - 359.99, null) 2. Heading status (A=data valid, V=data invalid) 3. Vessel course, degrees true (0.00 - 359.99, null) 4. Course reference (B/M/W/R/P, null) B=Bottom tracking log M=Manually entered W=Water referenced R=Radar tracking (of fixed target) P=Positioning system ground reference 5. Vessel speed (0.00 - 999.99, null) 6. Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P 7. Vessel set, degrees true, manually entered (0.00 - 359.99) 8. Vessel drift (speed), manually entered (0.00 - 99.99, null) 9. Speed units (N=Knots) AP-22 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE PRC - Propulsion remote control $**PRC,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,a,x*hh 1 2 3 4 5 678 1. Lever demand position (-100 to 100, 0=stop) 2. Lever demand status (A=data valid V=data invalid) 3. RPM demand value (-9999.9 to 9999.9) 4. RPM mode indicator (P=per cent R=Revolutions per min.) 5. Pitch demand value (-999.9 to 999.9) 6. Pitch mode indicator (P=per cent D=degrees V=data invalid) 7. Operating location indicator (B=bridge P=port wing S=starboard wing C=engine control room E=engine side/local W=Wing) 8. Number of engine or propeller shaft (00 to 99) RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT datas $**RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,ddmmyy,x.x,a,a,a*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 1. UTC of position fix (000000 - 235959) 2. Status (A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning) 3. Latitude (0000.00000 - 9000.0000) 4. N/S 5. Longitude (0000.00000 - 18000.0000) 6. E/W 7. Speed over ground, knots (0.00 - 99.94) 8. Course over ground, degrees true (0.0 - 360.0) 9. Date (010100 - 311299) 10. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W (0.00 - 180.0/NULL) 11. E/W 12. Mode indicator (A= Autonomous mode D= Differential mode S= Simulator F=Float RTK P=Precise R=Real time kinematic E=Estimated (DR) M=Manual 13. Navigational status indication (S=Safe C=Caution U=Unsafe V=Navigational status not valid) ROT - Rate of turn $**ROT,x.x,A*hh 1 2 1. Rate of turn, deg/min, "-"=bow turns to port (-9999.9 - 9999.9) 2. Status (A=data valid, V=data invalid) RPM - Revolutions $**RPM, a, x, x.x, x.x, A*hh 1 2 3 4 5 1. Source (S=shaft E=engine) 2. Engine or shaft number (00 to 99) 3. Speed, revolutions/min (-9999.99 to 9999.99) 4. Propeller pitch (-100.0 to 100.0) 5. Status (A=data invalid V=data valid) AP-23 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE RSA - Rudder sensor angle $**RSA,x.x,A,x.x,A*hhCR><LF> 1 2 3 4 1. Starboard(or single) rudder sensor data (-180 - 180.0, NULL) 2. Starboard(or single) rudder sensor status (A=Vaild N=Data invalid) 3. Port rudder sensor data (-180 - 180.0, NULL) 4. Port rudder sensor status (A=Vaild N=Data invalid) RSD - Radar system data $**RSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,N,H*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1. Origin 1 range, from own ship (0.000 - 999) (see note 2) 2. Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0 (0.0 - 359.9) (see note 2) 3. Variable range marker 1(VRM1), range (0.000 - 999) 4. Bearing line 1(EBL1), degrees from 0 (0.0 - 359.9) 5. Origin 2 range (0.000 - 999.9) (see note 2) 6. Origin 2 bearing (0.0 - 359.9)(see note 2) 7. VRM2,.9 range (0.000 - 999) 8. EBL2, degrees (0.0 - 360.0) 9. Cursor range, from own ship (0.000 - 999) 10. Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from 0 (0.0 - 359.9) 11. Range scale in use (0.0625 - 120) 12. Range units (K/N/S) 13. Display rotation (see note 1) NOTES 1 Display rotation: C=Course-up, course-over-ground up, degrees true H=Head-up, ship's heading(center-line) 0 up N=North-up, true north is 0 up 2 Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing from own ship and provide for two independent sets of variable range markers (VRM) and electronic bearing lines (EBL) originating away from own ship position. THS - True heading & status $**THS,xxx.x,a*hh 1 2 1. Heading, degrees True (0.00 to 360.00) 2. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous S=Simulator) AP-24 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE TLL - Target latitude and longitude $**TLL,xx,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 1. Target number, NULL 2. Latitude (0.0000 - 9000.0000) 3. N/S 4. Longitude (0.0000 - 18000.0000) 5. E/W 6. Target name, NULL 7. UTC of data (000000 - 235959) 8. Target status, NULL L=lost, tracked target has been lost Q=query, target in the process of acquisition T=tracking 9. Reference target=R, NULL otherwise TRC - Thruster control data $**TRC,x,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,a*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 1. Number of thruster, bow or stern (01 to 99) 2. RPM demand value (-999.9 to 999.9) 3. RPM mode indicator (P=per cent R=revolutions per min V=data invalid) 4. Pitch demand value (-180.0 to 180.0) 5. Pitch mode indicator (P=per cent D=degree V=data invalid) 6. Azimuth demand (000.0 to 359.9) 7. Operating location indicator (B=bridge P=port wing S=starboard wing C=engine control room E=engine side/local W=Wing) 8. Sentence flag status (R=Sentence is a status report of current settings (Used for a reply to a query.) C=Sentence is a configuration command to change settintgs. A sentence without “C” is not a command.) TRD - thruster data response $**TRD,x,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Number of thruster, bow or stern (01 to 99) 2. RPM response (-999.9 to 999.9) 3. RPM mode indicator (P=per cent R=revolutions per min V=data invalid) 4. Pitch response value (-999.9 to 999.9) 5. Pitch mode indicator (P=per cent D=degree V=data invalid) 6. Azimuth response (000.0 to 359.0, Null) AP-25 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE TTM - Tracked target message $**TTM,05,12.34,23.4,R,45.67,123.4,T,1.23,8.23,N,c--c,T,R,hhmmss.ss,M*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1. Target number (00 to 999) 2. Target distance from own ship (0.000 - 99.999) 3. Bearing from own ship,degrees (0.0 - 359.9) 4. True or Relative (T) 5. Target speed (0.00 - 999.99, null) 6. Target course, degrees (0.0 - 359.9, null) 7. True or Relative 8. Distance of closet point of approach (0.00 - 99.99, null) 9. Time to CPA, min., "-" increasing (-99.99 - 99.99, null) 10. Speed/distance units (N=nm) 11. Target name (null) 12. Target status (L=Lost Q=Acquiring T=Tracking) 13. Reference target (R, NULL otherwise) 14. UTC of data (null) 15. Type of acquisition (A=Automatic M=Manual ) VBW - Dual ground/water speed $**VBW,x.x,x.x,x,x.x,x.x,x,x.x,x,x.x,x,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. Longitudinal water speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999) 2. Transverse water speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999, null) 3. Status: water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid 4. Longitudinal ground speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999) 5. Transverse ground speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999, null) 6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid 7. Stern transverse water speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999) 8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid 9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots (-9999.999 - 9999.999) 10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid VDM - UAIS VHF data-link message !**VDM,x,x,x,x,s--s,x,*hh 1234 5 6 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9) 2. Message sentence number (1 to 9) 3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9, NULL) 4. AIS channel Number (A or B) 5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message (1 - 63 bytes) 6. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5) VDO - UAIS VHFG data-link own vessel report !**VDO,x,x,x,x,s--s,x,*hh 1234 5 6 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 to 9) 2. Message sentence number (1 to 9) 3. Sequential message identifier (0 to 9, NULL) 4. AIS channel Number (A or B, NULL) 5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message (1 - 63 bytes) 6. Number of fill-bits (0 to 5) AP-26 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE VDR - Set and drift $**VDR,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Direction, degrees (0.00 - 360.00, null) 2. T=True (fixed) 3. Direction, degrees (0.00 - 360.00, null) 4. M=Magnetic (fixed) 5. Current speed (0 - 99.99) 6. N=Knots (fixed) VHW - Water speed and headings $**VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Heading, degrees (0.00 - 360.00) 2. T=True (fixed) 3. Heading, degrees (0.00 - 360.00) 4. M=Magnetic (fixed) 5. Speed, knots (0.00 - 9999.99) 6. N=Knots (fixed) 7. Speed, knots (0.00 - 9999.99) 8. K=km/hr (fixed) VTG - Course over ground and ground speed $**VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a,*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Course over ground, degrees (0.00 - 360.00) 2. T=True (fixed) 3. Course over ground, degrees (No use) 4. M=Magnetic (No Use) 5. Speed over ground, knots (0.00-99.94) 6. N=Knots (fixed) 7. Speed over ground (0.00-99.94) 8. K=km/h (fixed) 9. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous, D=Differential E=Estimated (dead reckoning) M=Manual input S=Simulator P=Precision) XDR - Transducer measurements $**XDR,a,x.x,a,c,c,…………………a,x.x, a,c...c*hh 1 2 3 4 5 5 1. Transducer type, transducer no. (C, A, F, N, P, R, T, H, V) 2. Measurement data, transducer no. (Transducer no. N) 3. Units of measure, transducer no. (Transducer type, transducer no. N) #1=CC #1=AD #1=DM #1=FH #1=NN #1=PB #1=RI #1=TR #1=HP #1=VM 4. Data, varialbe number of transducers 5. Transducer “n” AP-27 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE XTE - Cross-track error, measured $**XTE,A,A,x.x,a,N,a,*hh 1 2 3 45 6 1. Status: A=data valid V=LORAN C blink or SNR warning 2. Status: V=LORAN C blink or SNR warning 3. Magnitude of cross-track error (0.0000 - 9.9999) 4. Direction to steer, L/R 5. Units, nautical miles (fixed) 6. Mode indicator (A=Autonomous mode D=Differential mode S=Simulator mode) ZDA - Time and date $**ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. UTC (000000.00 - 235960.99) 2. Day (01 - 31) 3. Month (01 -12) 4. Year (UTC, 1970 - 2037) 5. Local zone, hours (No use) 6. Loca zone, minutes (No use) Output sentences See input sentences for OSD, VBW, XTE. ABM - UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message !**ABM,x,x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,s--s,x,*hh 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 - 9) 2. Message sentence number (1 - 9) 3. Message sequence identifier (0 - 3) 4. The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message (9 digits) 5. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message (0 - 3) 6. VDL message number (6 or 12), see ITU-R M.1371 7. Encapsulated data (1 - 63 bytes) 8. Number of fill-bits (0 - 5) ACK - Acknowledge alarm $**ACK,xxx,*hh 1 1. Local alarm number (identifier) (000 - 999) BBM - UAIS broadcast binary message $**BBM,x,x,x,x,xx,s--s,x,*hh 12 3 4 5 6 7 1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message (1 - 9) 2. Sentence number (1 - 9) 3. Sequential Message identifier (0 - 9) 4. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message (0 - 3) 5. ITU-R M.1371 message ID (8 or 14) 6. Encapsulated data (1 - 63 bytes) 7. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5 AP-28 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE EVE - General event message $ **EVE,hhmmss.ss,c--c,c--c*hh 1 2 3 1. Event time (000000.00 - 235960.99) 2. Tag code used for identification of source of event (RA0001 - RA0010, EI0001 - EI0016, IN0001 - IN0016, II0001 - II0016) 3. Event description (OPERATION) HTC - Heading/Track control command $**HTC,A,x.x,a,a,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1. Override, A = in use, V = not in use 2. Commanded rudder angle, degrees 3. Commanded rudder direction, L/R = port/starboard 4. Selected steering mode 5. Turn mode R = radius controlled T = turn rate controlled N = turn is not controlled 6. Commanded rudder limit, degrees (unsigned) 7. Commanded off-heading limit, degrees (unsigned) 8. Commanded radius of turn for heading changes, n.miles 9. Commanded rate of turn to heading changes, deg/min 10. Commanded heading-to-steer, degrees 11. Commanded off-track limit, n.miles (unsigned) 12. Commanded track, degrees 13. Heading reference in use, T/M 14. Sentence status VSD - UAIS Voyage static data $**VSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,c--c,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,x.x,x.x*hh 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. Type of ship and cargo category (0 - 255) 2. Maximum present static draught (0 to 25.5 meters, null) 3. Persons on-board (0 - 8191, null) 4. Destination (1 - 20 characters, null) 5. Estimated UTC of arrival at destination (000000.00 - 235959.99) 6. Estimated day of arrival at destination (00 to 31(UTC)) 7. Estimated month of arrival at destination (00 to 12(UTC)) 8. Navigational status (0 - 15, null) 9. Regional application flags (0 - 15) AP-29 APPENDIX 3 DIGITAL INTERFACE Serial Interface TD-A TD-B LTC1535 ISOGND RD-A RD-B 110 ohm* * Set with jumper. Switchable open/close. 470 ohm RD-H PC-400 RD-C Processor Unit, Sensor Adapter: IEC 61162-2/1 input/output 470 ohm RD-H PC-400 RD-C Processor Unit, Sensor Adapter: IEC 61162-1 input 10 ohm SN65LBC172 10 ohm TD-A TD-B Processor Unit, Sensor Adapter: IEC 61162-1 output AP-30 APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING Indication color SYSTEM Sensor color GRN WHT YEL WHT HDG THS-A HDT L/L SPD GNS-A,D*,F,P,R GGA-1,2,3,4,5* GLL-A,D and (status: A)* RMC-A,D,F,P,R and (status: A)* VBW-A VHW COG/SOG Display example VTG-A,D,P All values in green. RAIM error in GBS sentence is greater than 10 m and DGPS update interval in GGA, GNS sentence is higher than 10 s. *1 Position in yellow characters. RED GRN (***.*) LOCAL MANUAL RED WHT GNS-E(”YEL*”),M,S GGA-6(”YEL*”),7,8 GLL-E(”YEL*”),M,S or (status: V) RMC-E,M,S or(status: V) ( “YEL*”) DGPS update interval in GGA, GNS sentence is higher than 30 s. THS-E,M, GNS-N, GGA(”YEL*”) S, N GLL-N, RMC-N VBW-V (Color remains yellow when switched A to V.) VTG-E,M,S VTG-N SPD, COG, SOG and POSN values and pos. source name in red. (status: V) GRN WHT YEL WHT RAIM error in GBS sentence is greater than 10 m and DGPS update interval in GGA, GNS sentence is higher than 10 s.*1 RED RED GNS-E(”YEL*”),M,S GGA-6(”YEL*”),7,8 GLL-E(”YEL*”),M,S or (status: V) RMC-E,M,S or(status: V) ( “YEL*”) DGPS update interval in GGA, GNS sentence is higher than 30 s. GRN (***.*) WHT YEL YEL (MAN) (DR) THS-A HDT GNS-A,D*,F,P,R GGA-1,2,3,4,5* GLL-A,D and (status: A)* RMC-A,D,F,P,R and (status: A) VBW-A VHW Same as corresponding indication in SYSTEM. VBW-V (Color remains yellow when switched A to V.) THS-E,M, GNS-N, GGA(”YEL*”) S, N GLL-N, RMC-N (status: V) Manual setting value Manual setting value (Dead Reckoning) VTG-A,D,P HDG value shown with asterisks. Same as corresponding indication in SYSTEM. VTG-E,M,S Same as corresponding indication in SYSTEM. VTG-N Same as corresponding indication in SYSTEM. Manual setting value HDG, SPD and POSN values and "MAN" in yellow characters. *1 Navigational status in RMC sentence shown in “C”, “U” only (IEC 61162-1 ed4). AP-31 APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING This page is intentionally left blank. AP-32 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 001 Text Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Default Caution 002 Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution 003 Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution 004 Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution 005 LCD Unit Lifetime Over Warning 006 High Temperature Inside Monitor Warning 007 Fan1 No Rotation Warning 008 Fan2 No Rotation Warning 009 Fan3 No Rotation Warning 010 Fan4 No Rotation Warning Meaning For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1(Main Monitor). Fan1 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-231: Connected to COM1(Main Monitor). Fan2 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-231: Connected to COM1(Main Monitor). Fan3 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190: Connected to COM1(Main Monitor). Fan4 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190: Connected to COM1. LCD unit operating time exceeds 50000 hours. For MU-231: Connected to COM1. LCD unit operating time exceeds 50000 hours. Internal temperature exceeds threshold. Monitor: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan1 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan2 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-231: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan3 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190: Connected to COM1 (Main Monitor). Fan4 rotation speed is below threshold. Remedy If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. LCD unit replacement is required. Contact FURUNO. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. AP-33 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 011 Text RS485 Communication Timeout Default Caution 012 No Signal Caution 013 Sentence Syntax Error Caution 014 Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution 015 Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution 016 Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution 017 Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution 018 LCD Unit Lifetime Over Warning 019 High Temperature Inside Monitor Warning 020 Fan1 No Rotation Warning 021 Fan2 No Rotation Warning AP-34 Meaning For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1. There has been no communication from processor unit through RS485 for 180 seconds. (No communication implies in completed sentence or checksum error.) For MU-190/231: Connected to COM1. There has been no signal continuously for 60 seconds. For Main monitor, connected to COM1, value of externally input sentence is out of range that defined by sentence. For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan1 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan2 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan3 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan4 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190: Connected to COM2 LCD unit operating time exceeds 50000 hours. For MU-231: Connected to COM2 LCD unit operating time exceeds 50000 hours. Internal temperature exceeds threshold. Monitor: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan1 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan2 rotation speed is below threshold. Remedy Check the connection of brightness control cable. Check the connection of video cable. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. LCD unit replacement is required. Contact FURUNO. Please turn off monitor. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 022 Text Fan3 No Rotation Default Warning 023 Fan4 No Rotation Warning 024 RS485 Communication Timeout Caution 025 No Signal Caution 026 Sentence Syntax Error Caution 027 Main Monitor COM Timeout Caution 028 Sub Monitor COM Timeout Caution 030 Sensor Adapter 1 COM Timeout Caution 031 Sensor Adapter 2 COM Timeout Caution 032 Sensor Adapter 3 COM Timeout Caution 033 Sensor Adapter 4 COM Timeout Caution Meaning For MU-231: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan3 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190: Connected to COM2 (Sub Monitor). Fan4 rotation speed is below threshold. For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2. There has been no communication from processor unit through RS485 for 180 seconds. (No communication implies incomplete sentence or checksum error.) For MU-190/231: Connected to COM2. There has been no signal continuously for 60 seconds. For Sub monitor, connected to COM2, value of externally input sentence is out of range defined by sentence. Communication with MU is interrupted. 60 seconds timeout. Communication with MU is interrupted. 60 seconds timeout. Communication error with No.1 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.1 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.2 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.2 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.3 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.3 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.4 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.4 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Remedy If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence.. Check the connection of brightness control cable. Check the connection of video cable. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. Check the connection with the monitor. Check the connection with the monitor. Check the connection with No.1 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.2 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.3 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.4 sensor adapter and network. AP-35 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 034 Text Sensor Adapter 5 COM Timeout Default Caution 035 Sensor Adapter 6 COM Timeout Caution 036 Sensor Adapter 7 COM Timeout Caution 037 Sensor Adapter 8 COM Timeout Caution 038 Sensor Adapter 9 COM Timeout Caution 039 Sensor Adapter 10 COM Timeout Caution 070 RCU 1 COM Timeout Caution 071 RCU 2 COM Timeout Caution 072 RCU 3 COM Timeout Caution 073 EC-3000 CPU Temp High Caution AP-36 Meaning Communication error with No.5 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.5 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.6 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.6 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.7 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.7 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.8 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.8 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.9 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.9 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.10 sensor adapter is detected. 30 seconds timeout. No.10 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with No.1 remote control unit is detected. 40 seconds timeout. Communication error with No.2 remote control unit is detected. 40 seconds timeout. Communication error with No.3 remote control unit is detected. 40 seconds timeout. CPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold. Remedy Check the connection with No.5 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.6 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.7 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.8 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.9 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.10 sensor adapter and network. Check the connection with No.1 remote control unit. Check the connection with No.2 remote control unit. Check the connection with No.3 remote control unit. Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few minutes, contact FURUNO. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 074 Text EC-3000 GPU Temp High Default Caution Meaning 075 EC-3000 CPU Board Temp High Caution CPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold. 076 EC-3000 Remote 1 Temp High Caution CPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold. 077 EC-3000 Remote 2 Temp High Caution CPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold. 078 EC-3000 CPU Fan Rotation Speed Lowering Caution Rotation speed of CPU fan in processor unit is below threshold. 079 EC-3000 Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution Rotation speed of fan1 in processor unit is below threshold. 080 EC-3000 Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Caution Rotation speed of fan2 in processor unit is below threshold. 082 EC-3000 CPU Fan No Rotation Warning Rotation speed of fan in processor unit is below threshold. 083 EC-3000 CPU Fan1 No Rotation Warning Rotation speed of fan1 in processor unit is below threshold. 084 EC-3000 CPU Fan2 No Rotation Warning Rotation speed of fan2 in processor unit is below threshold. 086 EC-3000 CPU board 5V Power Error Warning 5 V power voltage of CPU board in processor unit is out of threshold. 087 EC-3000 CPU board 3.3V Power Error Warning 3.3 V power voltage of CPU board in processor unit is out of threshold. 088 EC-3000 CPU board 12V Power Error Warning 12 V power voltage of CPU board in processor unit is out of threshold. CPU temperature in processor unit exceeds threshold. Remedy Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few minutes, contact FURUNO. Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few minutes, contact FURUNO. Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few minutes, contact FURUNO. Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few minutes, contact FURUNO. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. AP-37 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 089 Text EC-3000 CPU board Battery Power Error Default Caution 090 EC-3000 CPU board Core Power Error Caution 094 Sensor Adapter 11 COM Timeout Caution 095 Sensor Adapter 12 COM Timeout Caution 096 Sensor Adapter 13 COM Timeout Caution 097 Sensor Adapter 14 COM Timeout Caution 098 Sensor Adapter 15 COM Timeout Caution 099 Sensor Adapter 16 COM Timeout Caution 150 Early Course Change Indication Warning AP-38 Meaning Remedy CPU board battery voltage in processor unit is out of threshold. Turn off Processor Unit. If same error occurs after a few minutes, contact FURUNO. CPU board core voltage in Turn off Processor Unit. If processor unit is out of same error occurs after a threshold. few minutes, contact FURUNO. Communication error with Check the connection with No.11 sensor adapter is de- No.11 sensor adapter and tected. 30 seconds timeout. network. No.11 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with Check the connection with No.12 sensor adapter is de- No.12 sensor adapter and tected. 30 seconds timeout. network. No.12 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with Check the connection with No.13 sensor adapter is de- No.13 sensor adapter and tected. 30 seconds timeout. network. No.13 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with Check the connection with No.14 sensor adapter is de- No.14 sensor adapter and tected. 30 seconds timeout. network. No.14 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with Check the connection with No.15 sensor adapter is de- No.15 sensor adapter and tected. 30 seconds timeout. network. No.15 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Communication error with Check the connection with No.16 sensor adapter is de- No.16 sensor adapter and tected. 30 seconds timeout. network. No.16 sensor adapter is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Waypoint is soon being approached. Ship's position is less than set time of prewarning from WOL. Default: 90 seconds Be careful that WPT is approaching. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 151 Text Actual Course Change Indication Default Warning 152 Wheel Over Line Alarm 153 Track Control Stop Alarm 154 Position Monitor 156 Sensor Failure 158 Course Difference Warning 159 Low Speed Alarm Alarm 170 Positioning System Failure Warning 171 Crossing Safety Contour Alarm Warning Alarm Meaning Waypoint is now being approached. Alert150 is acknowledged and the ship's position is less than set time of approach alarm from WOL. Default: 30 seconds Waypoint is now being approached. When alert 150 and 151 are not acknowledged, ship crosses WOL. When alert 150 is not acknowledged, this is generated instead of alert 151. (30 seconds before WOL) Track Control is discontinued because sensors such as GYRO, GPS, LOG and Autopilot stop input during Track Control. When inputting position data from 2 GPS or more GPS, there is a difference between position data from each GPS. Sensor data related to Track Control (GYRO, GPS, LOG) is lost. Deviation between current heading and plan course is more than set value. Default: 30 degrees While carrying out TCS, ship's speed becomes less than set value. All position data has been lost for more than 30 seconds. When check area is set, ship entered in the shallower area than check area set in Safety Contour. Remedy Be careful that WPT is approaching. Be careful that ship crossed WPT. Check the connection with sensors such as GYRO, GPS and LOG, or connection with Autopilot. Check an accurate position data, GPS reception status and GPS setting. Check the connection with sensors such as GYRO, GPS and LOG. Make deviation between current heading and plan course smaller. Raise speed or stop track control. Check the connection with all GPS. Reconfirm Safety Contour setting or change the course. AP-39 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 172 Text Off Track Alarm Default Alarm 235 Echo Sounder 1 COM Error Caution 236 Echo Sounder 2 COM Error Caution 237 Echo Sounder 3 COM Error Caution 255 Gyro 1 COM Error Caution 256 Gyro 2 COM Error Caution AP-40 Meaning Remedy Deviation is big between planning course and current heading. While monitoring route, ship position deviates Channel Limit. Input of depth data from No.1 echo sounder has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1 echo sounder is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Input of depth data from No.2 echo sounder has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2 echo sounder is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Input of depth data from No.3 echo sounder has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.3 echo sounder is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.1 gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1 gyro is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.2 gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2 gyro is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Reconfirm Channel Limit or keep own ship inside of channel limit. Check the connection with No.1 echo sounder and network. Check the connection with No.2 echo sounder and network. Check the connection with No.3 echo sounder and network. Check the connection with No.1 gyro and network. Check the connection with No.2 gyro and network. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 257 Text Gyro 3 COM Error Default Caution 258 Gyro 4 COM Error Caution 259 Gyro 5 COM Error Caution 260 Backup Navigator 272 UTC Time Not Available Warning 273 Depth(Bow) Not Available Caution 274 Depth(Midship) Not Available Caution 275 Depth(Stern) Not Available Caution Alarm Meaning Remedy Data from No.3 gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.3 gyro is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.4 gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.4 gyro is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.5 gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.5 gyro is turned off, or there is a problem with network. When not acknowledging alerts related to WPT approach or track control stop alert during track control, alert is forwarded to BNWAS by this signal on 30 seconds after passing WOL. This is not shown. Time data of all available GPS sensor has been not available for more than 3 seconds. Depth data of all available depth sensor(Bow) has been not available for more than 3 seconds. Depth data of all available depth sensor(Midship) has been not available for more than 3 seconds. Depth data of all available depth sensor(Stern) has been not available for more than 3 seconds. Check the connection with No.3 gyro and network. Check the connection with No.4 gyro and network. Check the connection with No.5 gyro and network. Acknowledge 152 Wheel Over Line alert or 153 Track Control Stop. Check the connection with all GPS. Check the connection with all echo sounders. Check the connection with all echo sounders. Check the connection with all echo sounders. AP-41 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 277 Text Wind Speed/Direction Not Available Default Warning 278 STW Not Available Caution 279 COG/SOG Not Available Warning 280 SDME 1 COM Error Caution 281 SDME 2 COM Error Caution 282 SDME 3 COM Error Caution 285 Heading Magnetic Not Available Caution 290 EPFS 1 COM Error Caution AP-42 Meaning Remedy Wind speed/direction data of all available WIND sensors has been not available for more than 3 seconds. STW data of all available SDME sensors has been not available for more than 3 seconds. COG/SOG data of all available GPS sensor has been not available for more than 3 seconds. Speed data from No.1 SDME has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1 SDME is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Speed data from No.2 SDME has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2 SDME is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Speed data from No.3 SDME has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.3 SDME is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Heading data of all available magnetic gyro has been not available for more than 3 seconds. Ship position data from No.1 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time.(Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with all wind sensors. Check the connection with all SDME. Check the connection with all GPS. Check the connection with No.1 SDME and network. Check the connection with No.2 SDME and network. Check the connection with No.3 SDME and network. Check the connection with all magnetic gyro. Check the connection with No.1 GPS and network. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 291 Text EPFS 2 COM Error Default Caution 292 EPFS 3 COM Error Caution 293 EPFS 4 COM Error Caution 294 EPFS 5 COM Error Caution 295 EPFS 6 COM Error Caution 296 EPFS 7 COM Error Caution Meaning Remedy Ship position data from No.2 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Ship position data from No.3 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.3 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Ship position data from No.4 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.4 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Ship position data from No.5 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.5 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Ship position data from No.6 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.6 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Ship position data from No.7 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.7 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with No.2 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.3 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.4 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.5 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.6 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.7 GPS and network. AP-43 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 297 Text EPFS 8 COM Error Default Caution 298 EPFS 9 COM Error Caution 299 EPFS 10 COM Error Caution 300 Rudder 1 COM Error Caution 301 Rudder 2 COM Error Caution 302 Rudder 3 COM Error Caution AP-44 Meaning Remedy Ship position data from No.8 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.8 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Ship position data from No.9 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.9 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Ship position data from No.10 GPS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.10 GPS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Rudder data from No.1 rudder sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1 Rudder is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Rudder data from No.2 rudder sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2 Rudder is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Rudder data from No.3 rudder sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.3 Rudder is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with No.8 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.9 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.10 GPS and network. Check the connection with No.1 rudder sensor and network. Check the connection with No.2 rudder sensor and network. Check the connection with No.3 rudder sensor and network. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 303 Text HCS 1 COM Error Default Caution 304 HCS 2 COM Error Caution 305 VDR COM Error Caution 306 BNWAS COM Error Caution 310 Other Sensor 1 COM Error Caution 311 Other Sensor 2 COM Error Caution Meaning Remedy Data from No.1 HCS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1 HCS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.2 HCS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2 HCS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Sentence from VDR has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds VDR is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Caution Sentence from BNWAS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds BNWAS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.1 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time.(Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.1 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.2 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.2 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with No.1 HCS and network. Check the connection with No.2 HCS and network. Check the connection with VDR and network. Check the connection with BNWAS and network. Check the connection with No.1 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.2 other sensor and network. AP-45 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 312 Text Other Sensor 3 COM Error Default Caution 313 Other Sensor 4 COM Error Caution 314 Other Sensor 5 COM Error Caution 315 Other Sensor 6 COM Error Caution 316 Other Sensor 7 COM Error Caution 317 Other Sensor 8 COM Error Caution AP-46 Meaning Remedy Data from No.3 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time.(Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.3 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.4 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.4 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.5 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.5 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.6 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time.(Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.6 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.7 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.7 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.8 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time.(Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.8 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with No.3 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.4 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.5 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.6 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.7 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.8 other sensor and network. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 318 Text Other Sensor 9 COM Error Default Caution 319 Other Sensor 10 COM Error Caution 320 EC-3000 Ch.01 COM Timeout Caution 321 EC-3000 Ch.02 COM Timeout Caution 322 EC-3000 Ch.03 COM Timeout Caution 323 EC-3000 Ch.04 COM Timeout Caution 324 EC-3000 Ch.05 COM Timeout Caution 325 EC-3000 Ch.06 COM Timeout Caution Meaning Remedy Data from No.9 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.9 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.10 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.10 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Input from EC-3000 serial ch.1 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout Input from EC-3000 serial ch.2 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout Input from EC-3000 serial ch.3 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout Input from EC-3000 serial ch.4 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout Input from EC-3000 serial ch.5 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout Input from EC-3000 serial ch.6 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout Check the connection with No.9 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.10 other sensor and network. Check the connection of Ch.1. Check the connection of Ch.2. Check the connection of Ch.3. Check the connection of Ch.4. Check the connection of Ch.5. Check the connection of Ch.6. AP-47 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 326 Text EC-3000 Ch.07 COM Timeout Default Caution 327 EC-3000 Ch.08 COM Timeout Caution 330 Double Gyro Status Conflict Warning 331 Select Gyro Status Missing Warning 360 Wind Sensor 1 COM Error Caution 361 Wind Sensor 2 COM Error Caution 362 Wind Sensor 3 COM Error Caution AP-48 Meaning Input from EC-3000 serial ch.7 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout Input from EC-3000 serial ch.8 has been discontinued for more than certain time. (Set at installation) Default: No timeout When connected with Double Gyro System, instrument produced by Yokogawa Electric, two gyro has been displayed "Selected" status for 3 seconds. When connected with Double Gyro System, instrument produced by Yokogawa Electric, "Double Gyro" status cannot be acquired. Data from No.1 wind sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.1 wind sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.2 wind sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.2 wind sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.3 wind sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds No.3 wind sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Remedy Check the connection of Ch.7. Check the connection of Ch.8. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. Check the connection with No.1 wind sensor. Check the connection with No.2 wind sensor. Check the connection with No.3 wind sensor. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 370 Text Water Current COM Error Default Caution 371 Water Temp COM Error Caution 380 AIS COM Error Warning 390 NAVTEX COM Error Caution 391 ROT Gyro 1 COM Error Caution 392 ROT Gyro 2 COM Error Caution 393 ROT Gyro 3 COM Error Caution Meaning Remedy Data from water current has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds Water current sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with water current and network. Data from water temp. has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds Water temp sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from AIS has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds AIS is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from NAVTEX has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds NAVTEX is turned off, or there is a problem with network Data from No.1 ROT gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds Data from No.2 ROT gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds Data from No.3 ROT gyro has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 60 seconds Check the connection with water current and network. Check the connection with water temp and network. Check the connection with AIS and network. Check the connection with NAVTEX and network. Check the connection with No.1 ROT gyro. Check the connection with No.2 ROT gyro. Check the connection with No.3 ROT gyro. AP-49 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 400 Text Network Printer Not Available Default Caution 401 Local Printer Not Available Caution 411 Other Sensor 11 COM Error Caution 412 Other Sensor 12 COM Error Caution 413 Other Sensor 13 COM Error Caution 414 Other Sensor 14 COM Error Caution AP-50 Meaning Remedy When executing printout, network printer is not recognized, network printer connection is interrupted, or printer error such as paper shortage, paper jam and run out of ink occurs. When executing printout, local printer is not recognized, local printer connection is interrupted, or printer error such as paper shortage, paper jam and run out of ink occurs. Data from No.11 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.11 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.12 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.12 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.13 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.13 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.14 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.14 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check that the printer is connected to network or printer errors such as paper shortage, paper jam and run out of ink does not occur. Check that the printer is connected to network or printer errors such as paper shortage, paper jam and run out of ink does not occur. Check the connection with No.11 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.12 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.13 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.14 other sensor and network. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 415 Text Other Sensor 15 COM Error Default Caution 416 Other Sensor 16 COM Error Caution 417 Other Sensor 17 COM Error Caution 418 Other Sensor 18 COM Error Caution 419 Other Sensor 19 COM Error Caution Meaning Remedy Data from No.15 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.15 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.16 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.16 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.17 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.17 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.18 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.18 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.19 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.19 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with No.15 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.16 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.17 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.18 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.19 other sensor and network. AP-51 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 420 Text Other Sensor 20 COM Error Default Caution 421 Other Sensor 21 COM Error Caution 422 Other Sensor 22 COM Error Caution 423 Other Sensor 23 COM Error Caution 424 Other Sensor 24 COM Error Caution AP-52 Meaning Remedy Data from No.20 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.20 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.21 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.21 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.22 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.22 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.23 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.23 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.24 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.24 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with No.20 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.21 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.22 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.23 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.24 other sensor and network. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 425 Text Other Sensor 25 COM Error Default Caution 426 Other Sensor 26 COM Error Caution 427 Other Sensor 27 COM Error Caution 428 Other Sensor 28 COM Error Caution 429 Other Sensor 29 COM Error Caution Meaning Remedy Data from No.25 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.25 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.26 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.26 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.27 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.27 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.28 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.28 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Data from No.29 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.29 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Check the connection with No.25 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.26 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.27 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.28 other sensor and network. Check the connection with No.29 other sensor and network. AP-53 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 430 Text Other Sensor 30 COM Error Default Caution 450 Heading Sensor Not Available Warning 451 Gyro CORR. Source Change Caution 453 SDME Sensor Not Available Warning 469 WGS84 Not Used Warning 470 Datum Change Caution 472 Position Source Change Warning 473 Heading Source Change Warning 474 COG/SOG Source Change Warning 475 CTW/STW Source Change Warning 485 Depth Limit AP-54 Alarm Meaning Remedy Data from No.30 other sensor has been discontinued for more than set time. (Set at installation) Default: 180 seconds No.30 other sensor is turned off, or there is a problem with network. Heading data of all available gyro has been not available for more than 2 seconds. Heading sensor used in system is changed. Speed data from all available SDME has been not available for more than 3 seconds. WGS84 is not used for datum of EPSF or cannot be acquired. Acquisition timing: Once in 60 seconds or when position sensor is changed. Current datum of EPSF is changed. Acquisition timing: Once in 60 seconds or when position sensor is changed. Position sensor used in system (distributed by own ship's information management) is changed. Heading sensor used in system (distributed by own ship's information management) is changed. COG/SOG sensor used in system (distributed by own ship's information management) is changed. CTW/STW sensor used in system (distributed by own ship's information management) is changed. Seabed has been less than set depth for more than 3 seconds. Check the connection with No.30 other sensor and network. Check the connection with all gyro. Check the connection with all SDME. Check the operator's manual of GPS. Check the operator's manual of GPS. - - - - Be careful of risk of grounding. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 495 Text Anchor Watch Error Default Warning 526 TT CPA/TCPA 527 TT Lost Warning 528 REF Target Lost Warning 529 AIS New Target Warning System detected the new AIS target. 530 AIS Target Display 95% Caution 95% of maximum number of target which can be displayed is used. 531 AIS Target Display 100% Warning 100% of maximum number of target which can be displayed is used. 532 AIS Target Capacity 95% Caution 95% of memory capacity for AIS targets is filled. 533 AIS Target Capacity 100% Warning 100% of memory capacity for AIS targets is filled. 534 AIS Target Activate 95% Caution 95% of capacity for active AIS is used. 535 AIS Target Activate 100% Warning 100% of capacity for active AIS is used. 536 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm Alarm Meaning While anchor watch alert function is enabled, ship's position has been outside of alarm area centering certain position for more than 3 seconds. CPA(Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA(Time to CPA) of TT is within the set range. Target has been not detected 5 times successively. Tracked target is lost. REF target is lost and cannot be tracked. CPA and TCPA of AIS activating target is below the value set in menu. Remedy Be careful of dragging anchor. Be careful of the risk of collision with other ships. TT is lost. Check the lost target. REF target is lost. Check the lost target. AIS target entered into AZ. The number of AIS target became 95% of that can be displayed. Change the display number using filter function. The number of AIS target became 100% of that can be displayed. Change the display number using filter function. Memory for AIS targets is filled 95%. Cancel unnecessary targets. Memory for AIS targets is filled 100%. Cancel unnecessary targets. The number of active AIS target became 95% of its limit. Change the unnecessary targets to sleep mode. The number of active AIS target became 100% of its limit. Change the unnecessary targets to sleep mode. Be careful of the risk of collision with other ships. AP-55 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 537 Text AIS Lost Default Warning 539 AIS Message Received AIS Message Transmit Error AIS Transmitting Caution 541 542 Caution Caution 543 No CPA/TCPA for AIS Warning 620 User Chart Danger Area Warning 621 Traffic Separation Zone Warning 622 Inshore Traffic Zone Warning 623 Restricted Area Warning 624 Caution Area Warning 625 Offshore Production Area Warning AP-56 Meaning AIS data has not been received for certain time (shorter time between 6 minutes and 5 report interval). Lost target. Dangerous AIS target has not been received for certain time (shorter time between 6 minutes and 5 report interval). AIS message is received. Remedy AIS target is lost. Check the lost target. - AIS message transmission Check the connection with is failed. AIS. AIS transponder is transmit- ting. Ship's SOG/COG data is not available, and L/L of own ship and AIS are not available. System cannot calculate CPA/TCPA for AIS. When User Chart Danger Area is set to Warning/ Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Traffic Separation Zone is set to Warning/ Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Inshore Traffic Zone is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Restricted Area is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Caution Area is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Offshore Production Area is set to Warning/ Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. Check the connection with GPS. Check that grounding speed is available. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 626 Text Military Practice Area Default Warning 627 Seaplane Landing Area Warning 628 Submarine Transit Lane Warning 629 Anchorage Area Warning 630 Marine Farm / Aquaculture Warning 631 PSSA Area Warning 632 Areas to be Avoided Warning 633 Buoy Warning 634 UKC Limit Warning 635 Non-official ENC Warning 636 No Vector Chart Warning 637 Not Up-to-date Warning Meaning When Military Protection Area is set to Warning/ Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Seaplane Landing Area is set to Warning/ Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Submarine Transit Lane is set to Warning/ Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Anchorage Area is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Marine Farm/ Aquaculture is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When PSSA Area is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Areas to be Avoided is set to Alarm in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When Buoy is set to Alarm in chart alert, ship entered in check area. Measured depth from echo sounder is less than set UKC limit value. When No Official Data is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, ship entered in check area. When No Vector Chart is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, chart except vector chart is in check area. When Not Up to Date is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, chart except vector chart is in check area. Remedy Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful that measured depth is less than UKC limit. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. AP-57 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 638 Text Permit Expired Default Warning 640 Chart align: Over 30 min Caution 652 Last WPT Approach Alarm 665 Autopilot Mode Conflict Alarm 667 AP Receive Error Caution 675 Use MAN Steering Warning 690 TC Start Timeout Alarm 691 RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE Alarm 692 RM Stop - Disconnect Sensors Alarm 693 RM Stop - Other Causes Alarm 820 NAVTEX Message Received AP-58 Caution Meaning When Permit Expired is set to Warning/Caution in chart alert, Own ship position has been offset for more than 30 minutes. Ship will reach last waypoint in 30 seconds. In communication between AP, TCS mode of ECDIS and AP are different. Communication between AP and ECDIS is discontinued. All GPS signals are lost during track control, and track control has been continued for 10 minutes in DR. Alarm generates every 2 minutes. Operation to start track control in autopilot is not performed in 30 seconds after performing the operation to start track control in ECDIS. *Currently not used because TCS start operation is caused by autopilot. Route monitoring is stopped because distance from route is more than set value of Max XTE. Error occurs inside of route monitoring function. Required data for route monitoring such as position, SOG/COG cannot be acquired. NAVTEX message is received. Remedy Be careful of the object mentioned left, on ship's direction. Reset offset. Be careful that last waypoint is approaching. Check the mode in autopilot. Check the connection with autopilot. Switch autopilot mode to manual or auto. Perform operation to start track control again. Start route monitoring after approaching the monitoring route. If the error frequently occurs, contact FURUNO and inform frequency of occurrence. Check the connection with GYRO, GPS and SDME. - APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 851 Text EPFS 1 Sensor Banned Default Caution Meaning Remedy Own ship position data from No.1 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. 852 EPFS 2 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.2 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. 853 EPFS 3 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.3 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. 854 EPFS 4 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.4 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. 855 EPFS 5 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.5GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. AP-59 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 856 Text EPFS 6 Sensor Banned Default Caution 857 EPFS 7 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.7 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. 858 EPFS 8 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.8 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. 859 EPFS 9 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.9 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. 860 EPFS 10 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship position data from No.10 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. AP-60 Meaning Remedy Own ship position data from No.6 GPS is determined abnormal by integrity check. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 861 Text SDME 1 Sensor Banned Default Caution Meaning 862 SDME 2 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship speed data from No.2 SDME is determined abnormal by integrity check. 863 SDME 3 Sensor Banned Caution Own ship speed data from No.3 SDME is determined abnormal by integrity check. 871 Gyro 1 Sensor Banned Caution Heading data from No.1 Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. 872 Gyro 2 Sensor Banned Caution Heading data from No.2 Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. Own ship speed data from No.1 SDME is determined abnormal by integrity check. Remedy Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. AP-61 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 873 Text Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Default Caution 874 Gyro 4 Sensor Banned Caution Heading data from No.4 Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. 875 Gyro 5 Sensor Banned Caution Heading data from No.5 Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. 881 ROT Gyro 1 Sensor Banned Caution Heading data from No.1 ROT Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. 882 ROT Gyro 2 Sensor Banned Caution Heading data from No.2 ROT Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. AP-62 Meaning Heading data from No.3 Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. Remedy Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST No. 883 Text ROT Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Default Caution Meaning 891 Water Current Sensor Banned Caution Data from water current is determined abnormal by integrity check. *Currently not generated because integrity check is not performed for Current. 900 No Filter Source of Position Warning 901 No Filter Source of COG/SOG Warning 902 No Filter Source of CTW/STW Warning 903 No Filter Source of Heading Warning 904 No Filter Source of ROT Warning No valid position sensor is available for filter. (Banned or connection error) No valid COG/SOG sensor is available for filter. (Banned or connection error) No valid CTW/STW sensor is available for filter. (Banned or connection error) No valid heading sensor is available for filter. (Banned or connection error) No valid position sensor is available for filter. (Banned or connection error) Heading data from No.3 ROT Gyro is determined abnormal by integrity check. Remedy Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Reset the filter to confirm that it isn't a temporal error value. If the data is normal, it is reusable. However, if it's continually removed, there is a possibility that correct data is not received from sensor. In this case, contact FURUNO. Check the connection with all GPS. Check the connection with all GPS. Check the connection with all GPS. Check the connection with all GPS. Check the connection with all GPS. AP-63 APPENDIX 5 ALERT LIST This page is intentionally left blank. AP-64 FURUNO FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB SPECIFICATIONS OF Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB 1 1.1 1.5 MONITOR UNIT Display type MU-190 (FMD-3200) 19-inch color LCD, 1,280 x 1,024 pixel (SXGA) MU-231 (FMD-3300) 23.1-inch color LCD, 1,600 x 1,200 pixel (UXGA) HD26T21 MMD-MA4-FAGA (FMD-3300) 25.54-inch color LCD, 1,920 x 1,200 pixel (WUXGA) FMD-3200-BB Commercial monitor (user supply) Brilliance MU-190: 450 cd/m2 typical, MU-231: 400 cd/m2 typical HD26T21 MMD-MA4-FAGA: 350 cd/m2 typical Viewable distance MU-190: 1.02 m nominal, MU-231: 1.20 m nominal Video interface DVI-D: DVI-standard, VESA-DDC2B Brilliance control RS-485, serial data control (DDC sentence) 2. 2.1 2.2 PROCESSOR UNIT Display mode Chart materials 1.2 1.3 1.4 HU/NU/CU/RU (True/Relative motion) IMO/IHO S57-3 ENC or C-MAP CM-93/3 vectorized material BA ARCS rasterized material 2.3 Own ship’s indication Own ship’s mark/track and numeral position in lat/lon, speed, course and heading 2.4 Target tracking (TT) Range, bearing, speed, course, CPA/TCPA Target information from AIS 2.5 Other information Waypoint, Route monitoring and several alarms 2.6 Display features Chart zoom-in/out, Cursor (EBL, VRM, parallel index lines), Scroll, Symbol select, Palette select, One touch activation, Electric chart information auto-update 2.7 Position calculation Navigation by result of positioning found with external sensor Dead reckoning with gyro and log Highly accurate position, speed and heading from Kalman filter 2.8 Route planning Planning by rhumb line, great circle, Chart alarm, SAR composition, Optimize 2.9 Route monitoring Off-track display, Waypoint arrival alarm, Shallow depth alarm Route creation; route data may be transferred to radar 2.10 User chart creation 1000 points max. (200 points x 5 files) 2.11 Notes Create and display notes data; transferred to radar 2.12 AIS safety message Receive, create and transmit safety messages View and modify own ship information stored in AIS transponder 2.13 NAVTEX message Receive and display NAVTEX messages 2.14 MOB (Man Overboard) Position and other data at time of man overboard are recorded MOB mark is displayed on the screen SP - 1 E4473S01H-M FURUNO FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB 2.15 Manual update User selects symbols 2.16 Other functions Radar overlay, Playback log 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 INTELLIGENT HUB (OPTION) Number of ports 8 ports (10/100/1000BASE-T) Swiching method Store and forward, non-blocking L2 switching Capacitance of switching 16 Gbps Flow Control Full-Duplex (IEEE802.3x flow-controlled at automatic mode) Ring aggregation 8 group max. Spanning tree STP(IEEE802.1D), RSTP(IEEE802.1w), MST(IEEE802.1s) IGMP snooping IGMP v1, v2, v3 Operation control PING, SNMPv1, v2c, v3 VLAN Port-base VLAN, IEEE802.1Q Tag VLAN supported, VLAN ID：1 to 4094, VLAN registration：128 group 3.10 Multiple VLAN Communication between isolated ports is disabled 3.11 Cast control Broadcast, Multicast suppression 4 4.4 INTERFACE Serial I/O Input 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2 ports, IEC61162-1: 5 ports) ABK, ALR, CUR, DBT, DPT, DTM, ETL, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, HTD, MTW, MWV, NRX, OSD, PRC, RMC, ROR, ROT, RPM, RSA, RSD, THS, TRC, TRD, TTM, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VTG, XDR, ZDA Output ABM, ACK, BBM, DDC, EVE, HTC, OSD, VBW, VSD, XTE 4.5 Digital input 1 channel: contact signal, 100 ohm max. or 24VDC input 4.6 Alarm output 6 channels: contact signal, load current 250 mA Normal close: 2, Normal open: 2, System fail: 1, Power fail: 1 4.7 DVI output 2 ports: DVI-D (DVI1/2), 1 port: DVI-I or RGB (DVI3) 4.8 USB 4 ports (3 ports for control units) 4.9 LAN 3 ports: Ethernet 1000Base-T for network equipment, sensor adapter and spare 4.10 Sensor adapter (option) 5 5.1 5.2 MC-3000S (serial) 8 ports: I/O, IEC61162-1/2: 4 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports MC-3010A (analog) 3 ports: Input, -10 to +10V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA MC-3020D (digital-in) 8 ports: relay contact, logics set from program MC-3030D (digital-out) 8 ports: relay contact, normal open and normal close available POWER SUPPLY Monitor unit MU-190 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz MU-231 100-230 VAC: 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz HD26T21 MMD-MA4-FAGA 115/230 VAC: 1.1-0.5 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC: 5.2 A Processor unit 100-115/220-230 VAC: 1.5-0.7 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz SP - 2 E4473S01H-M FURUNO 5.3 FMD-3200/3300/3200-BB Sensor adapter (option) 24 VDC: 1.4 A (for 11 units), Input to MC-3000S, the sources of other sensor adapters are fed from MC-3000S 5.4 HUB (HUB-3000, HUB-100, option) 100-230 VAC: 0.1 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION Ambient temperature -15°C to +55°C Relative humidity 95% or less at 40°C Degree of protection Monitor unit IP22 HUB IP22 (HUB-3000), IPX0 (HUB-100) Others IP20 (IP22 by specified mounting method, option) Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 COATING COLOR Monitor unit Processor/control unit Sensor adapter HUB Console N2.5 (fixed) N3.0 (fixed) N3.0 N2.5 (HUB-3000), N3.0 (HUB-100) 2.5GY5/1.5 (standard) SP - 3 E4473S01H-M This page is intentionally left blank. SP-4 INDEX A Abbreviations ..........................................AP-5 ACTIVE ALERT window........................ 25-10 AIO chart cells ................................................ 5-9 chart object information ......................... 5-10 displaying ................................................ 5-8 information to display ............................ 5-11 AIO page ................................................... 4-4 AIS automatic activation of sleeping targets 14-8 CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 14-6 deleting received and sent safety messages ................................ 15-3 filtering targets....................................... 14-6 lost target alarm .................................... 14-9 Lost target alarm filter ......................... 14-10 own ship data ...................................... 14-13 past positions ...................................... 14-13 received and sent safety messages ...... 15-2 sending safety messages...................... 15-1 showing, hiding targets ......................... 14-5 sleeping activated targets ..................... 14-9 symbols ................................................. 14-2 target data ................................ 14-11, 14-12 Vector length ....................................... 14-10 voyage data........................................... 14-4 Alert box ......................................... 2-12, 20-2 Alert list ................................................... 20-6 ALERT LIST window ............................. 25-13 Alert log ................................................... 20-8 ALERT LOG window ............................. 25-12 Alert parameters page............................... 9-7 Alerts acknowledging ...................................... 20-6 alert list .................................................. 20-6 alert log ................................................. 20-8 buzzer silencing .................................... 20-5 buzzer stop button................................. 20-4 definition ................................................ 20-1 list of ...................................................... 20-9 message format .................................... 20-3 AMS ACK sentence ....................................... 25-3 ACTIVE ALERT window...................... 25-10 alert acknowledgement ......................... 25-3 alert categories...................................... 25-2 alert definition ........................................ 25-1 alert icons .............................................. 25-8 ALERT LIST window ........................... 25-13 ALERT LOG window ........................... 25-12 alert priorities......................................... 25-1 alert transfer to BNWAS ........................ 25-5 ALR sentence........................................ 25-3 buzzer silencing..................................... 25-3 buzzer, IEC 61924-2 mode ................... 25-7 buzzer, legacy mode ............................. 25-6 buzzer, silencing (temporarily) .............. 25-6 category and alert acknowledgement.... 25-3 description ............................................. 25-1 display priority order .............................. 25-7 mode selection ...................................... 25-9 priority change....................................... 25-6 Anchor watch .......................................... 12-7 Approved until date ................................... 5-5 ARCS charts catalog of chart cells.............................. 3-18 chart cell grouping ................................. 3-20 chart installation ...................................... 3-6 chart legend............................................. 6-1 datum ...................................................... 6-5 deleting.................................................. 3-24 details ...................................................... 6-2 export list of ........................................... 3-14 install/update history.............................. 3-17 license backup....................................... 3-15 license deletion........................................ 3-8 license display ....................................... 3-15 license installation ................................... 3-5 license installation, automatic.................. 3-5 license restoring .................................... 3-15 notes........................................................ 6-4 permanent warnings................................ 6-5 permit status.......................................... 3-16 preferences for inset................................ 6-3 SDD......................................................... 6-4 subscriptions ........................................... 6-6 T&P notices ............................................. 6-2 warnings .................................................. 6-3 Area report ............................................ 10-12 Autopilot activating, deactivating TCS................ 26-16 Autopilot FAP-2000 control panel.......................................... 26-2 Autopilot FAP-3000 control panel.......................................... 26-4 Autopilot operations alerts when approaching a waypoint ... 26-20 collision avoidance .............................. 26-24 ECDIS unit to control autopilot ............ 26-15 messages when preconditions not met ............................................. 26-19 preconditions not met .......................... 26-18 route information box................ 26-14, 26-17 route steering alerts............................. 26-22 route steering indications ......... 26-17, 26-22 steering modes, FAP-2000.................. 26-10 steering modes, PR-6000, PT-500A ... 26-11 IN-1 INDEX steering performance, going ahead .....26-24 steering performance, GPS navigator unreliable...........................26-27 steering performance, lost communication ..................................26-29 steering performance, lost heading......26-26 steering performance, lost speed.........26-27 steering performance, low speed .........26-27 steering performance, total lost position..............................................26-28 steering performance, turns .................26-25 TCS buttons .........................................26-14 track control status window ..................26-14 turns, stopping, changing .....................26-23 waypoint-related indications.................26-21 Autopilot PR-6000 FU override unit......................................26-7 HCS unit.................................................26-5 override NFU controller ..........................26-8 steering control unit................................26-5 Autopilot PT-500A steering control unit................................26-9 B Basic setting page......................................4-3 BRILL control ..................................... 1-6, 1-7 Buzzer stop button ...................................20-4 C CCRP page ............................................23-14 CCRS .......................................................18-1 Chart alerts introduction...............................................8-1 objects used in .........................................8-3 own ship check.........................................8-4 route monitoring .......................................8-7 route planning ..........................................8-5 Chart cells AIO ...........................................................5-9 catalog of................................................3-18 deleting...................................................3-21 editing.....................................................3-20 grouping .................................................3-20 status......................................................3-21 Chart database button .............................4-10 Chart legend C-MAP......................................................7-3 S57 (ENC)................................................5-2 Chart scale ...............................................2-16 Chart synchronization select units to synchronize .....................3-28 synchronization status............................3-29 Chart usage log........................................19-8 Charts approved until date...................................5-4 cell deleting ............................................3-21 cell editing ..............................................3-20 display date ..............................................5-4 Check area page.............................. 8-4, 12-5 IN-2 Check results page ....................................9-8 Circle report............................................10-12 Clearing line report.................................10-11 C-MAP charts cartographic services ...............................7-1 catalog of chart cells ..............................3-18 chart cell grouping..................................3-20 chart cell status ......................................3-21 chart legend .............................................7-3 database deletion...................................3-13 database installation ..............................3-10 deleting...................................................3-24 eToken registration ..................................3-9 export list of............................................3-14 install/update history ..............................3-17 installing from CD ROM ...........................3-6 license installation ..................................3-11 opening ..................................................3-22 permit status...........................................3-16 subscription services................................7-2 update file, applying ..................... 3-12, 3-13 update file, generating, ordering ............3-12 C-MAP DL charts enabling..................................................3-14 update file, generating, ordering ............3-13 COG/SOG page .......................................18-4 Color differentiation test (S57 ENC charts) ...................................24-6 Consummable parts .................................24-5 Context-sensitive menus..........................2-13 Cost parameters.......................................21-3 CPA/TCPA alarm AIS .........................................................14-6 TT...........................................................13-3 Cursor position box ..................................2-18 Customize page .......................................23-7 D Danger targets log conditions for logging ...........................19-10 viewing ...................................................19-9 Data sentences input ....................................................AP-18 output ..................................................AP-28 Data sharing.............................................23-6 Deep contour..............................................4-1 Depth sensor..........................................18-13 Details log ................................................19-5 Display date ...............................................5-5 Display test page......................................23-8 Divider activating ..............................................12-10 limitations .............................................12-11 E EBL bearing reference ...................................2-21 context-sensitive menu ..........................2-22 hiding......................................................2-21 INDEX measuring bearing with ......................... 2-21 showing ................................................. 2-21 EBL, VRM boxes..................................... 2-13 ECDIS Control Unit ................................... 1-3 ECDIS modes ......................................... 2-16 ECDIS system information ...................... 1-15 ENC charts AIO display .............................................. 5-8 approved until date.................................. 5-5 catalog of chart cells ............................. 3-18 chart cell grouping ................................. 3-20 chart cell status ..................................... 3-21 chart installation ...................................... 3-3 chart legend ..................................... 5-2, 7-3 chart update approval ............................. 5-4 color differentiation test ......................... 24-6 deleting.................................................. 3-24 display date ............................................. 5-5 ENC coverage indication....................... 3-25 ENC list export ...................................... 3-15 ENC permit display ............................... 3-15 export list of ........................................... 3-14 install/update history ............................. 3-17 installing from medium ............................ 3-6 license backup ...................................... 3-15 license deletion ....................................... 3-8 license installation, automatic ................. 3-2 license installation, manual ..................... 3-3 license restore ....................................... 3-16 manual updates..................................... 3-25 opening ................................................. 3-22 permanent warnings................................ 5-3 permit status.......................................... 3-16 presentation library.................................. 5-6 publishers notes .................................... 3-24 reconverting .......................................... 3-30 symbols used in ...................................... 5-6 F File import page ...................................... 23-3 File maintenance page............................ 23-4 Filter status.............................................. 18-9 Full user chart report ............................. 10-10 Full WPT report ....................................... 9-23 Fuse replacement ................................... 24-2 G General page ............................................ 4-5 H Heading input .......................................... 1-11 I Instant access bar ..................................... 2-6 Instant track back to track .......................................... 11-7 button label.......................................... 11-13 details .................................................. 11-10 messages .............................................. 11-9 monitoring ........................................... 11-10 parameters ............................................ 21-4 returning to monitored route ................ 11-12 safe off track.......................................... 11-6 stopping monitoring ............................. 11-11 K Keyboard test page ................................. 23-9 L Label report ........................................... 10-12 Line report ............................................. 10-11 Log playback ......................................... 19-11 Lost target alarm AIS......................................................... 14-9 TT .......................................................... 13-3 M Mains switch.............................................. 1-2 Maintenance............................................ 24-1 Manual updates deleting update symbols........................ 3-27 inserting new update symbols ............... 3-26 modifying existing update symbols........ 3-27 Mariner page ............................................. 4-8 Menu tree ................................................AP-1 Mini conning display................................ 22-9 MOB button ............................................. 1-12 MOB position........................................... 1-12 N Navigation data ....................................... 18-7 Navtex deleting messages ................................ 15-5 receiving messages............................... 15-4 O Odometer resetting ................................. 2-29 Operator s manual................................. 1-15 Optimize page .................................. 9-6, 9-16 Other page ................................................ 4-4 Other sensors page................................. 18-4 Overlay/NAV Tools box anchor watch ......................................... 12-7 check area page.................................... 12-5 PI (parallel index) page ......................... 12-1 predictor ................................................ 12-6 ring ........................................................ 12-5 UKC....................................................... 12-8 Overlay/Nav Tools box ............................ 2-12 Own ship functions box ........................... 2-10 P Palette (color) ............................................ 1-6 Palette button ............................................ 1-6 Parallel index lines activating, deactivating .......................... 12-2 bearing reference .................................. 12-2 interval................................................... 12-3 length adjustment .................................. 12-4 mode ..................................................... 12-2 number of lines to display...................... 12-2 IN-3 INDEX orientation ..............................................12-3 resetting .................................................12-3 Passage plan report .................................9-24 Permanent warning box ...........................2-12 Permanent warnings ARCS charts ............................................6-5 ENC charts...............................................5-3 Permit status ............................................3-16 PI (parallel index) page ............................12-1 Play back log..........................................19-11 Position alignment..............................................18-11 reference ................................................18-6 Position events.........................................19-2 POSN page ..............................................18-4 Power key (control unit) .............................1-2 Power switch (processor unit) ....................1-2 Predictor...................................................12-6 Presentation library ....................................5-6 Presentation mode ...................................2-17 Printing cell status list..........................................3-23 chart list..................................................3-22 S57 chart object information ....................5-6 Processor unit EC-3000 .............................1-1 Public key (ENC charts) .............................3-1 Publishers notes ......................................3-24 R Radar overlay errors in ........................................ 16-3, 16-4 introduction.............................................16-1 setting up................................................16-2 Recording chart usage log.......................................19-8 danger targets log ..................................19-9 details log ...............................................19-5 user events.............................................19-1 voyage log..............................................19-6 Reports area ......................................................10-12 circle.....................................................10-12 clearing line ..........................................10-11 full user chart........................................10-10 Full WPT ................................................9-23 label......................................................10-12 passage plan..........................................9-24 tidal.......................................................10-10 WPT table ..............................................9-22 Ring page.................................................12-5 Route bank...............................................9-14 Route information box ..............................2-11 Route page ................................................4-8 Routes adding waypoints at end of route .............9-9 changing waypoint position ......................9-9 creating new.............................................9-2 deleting...................................................9-20 deleting waypoints..................................9-10 IN-4 exporting FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII data.....9-20 exporting FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 data.....9-19 full WPT report .......................................9-23 importing csv, ASCII data.......................9-19 importing FEA-2x07 data .......................9-18 importing FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 data.....9-18 inserting waypoint ..................................9-10 optimizing ...............................................9-16 overview in planning.................................9-1 passage plan report ...............................9-24 route bank ..............................................9-14 SAR........................................................9-11 selecting for monitoring ..........................11-1 selecting route components to display ...11-3 stopping monitoring................................11-3 switching monitored to planning.............11-5 user chart information in route monitoring ..................................11-5 user chart page (route planning) ..............9-5 Waypoints page (monitoring) .................11-4 waypoints page (route planning) ..............9-4 WPT table ..............................................9-22 S S57 charts printing chart object information ...............5-6 Safety contour .................................... 4-1, 8-2 Safety depth ...............................................4-1 SAR route.................................................9-11 Screenshots capturing ................................................1-13 deleting.................................................23-12 exporting ..............................................23-12 Screenshots page ..................................23-11 Self test page ...........................................23-5 Sensor information box ..............................2-9 Sensor set (system, local)..........................1-8 Sensors menu ..........................................18-2 Settings menu ..........................................1-14 accessing ...............................................23-1 CCRP ...................................................23-14 customize page ......................................23-7 file export page.......................................23-2 file import page.......................................23-3 file maintenance page ............................23-4 keyboard test page.................................23-9 screenshots page.................................23-11 self test page..........................................23-5 user default page .................................23-13 Shallow contour..........................................4-1 Ship and route parameters.......................21-1 SPD page.................................................18-3 Speed input ................................................1-9 Split screen ..............................................1-16 Standard page............................................4-4 Status bar...................................................2-4 Symbols (ECDIS) ....................................AP-9 INDEX T T&P notices............................................... 6-2 Targets page ............................................. 4-9 Tidal report ............................................ 10-10 Time ........................................................ 1-13 Tips ......................................................... 1-16 Trackball control unit ................................. 1-5 Trackball maintenance ............................ 24-3 Tracking page ........................................... 4-7 trip meter resetting .................................. 2-29 Troubleshooting ...................................... 24-4 True motion reset .................................... 2-19 TT CPA, TCPA settings .............................. 13-3 dangerous target alarm ......................... 13-3 lost target alarm .................................... 13-3 lost target alarm filter............................. 13-4 past positions, attributes ....................... 13-7 past positions, plot interval, reference... 13-7 showing, hiding ..................................... 13-1 symbol color .......................................... 13-2 symbol size ........................................... 13-2 symbols and their attributes .................. 13-2 target data ............................................. 13-6 vector length.......................................... 13-4 U UKC page setting.................................................... 12-8 UKC window.......................................... 12-9 UKC window............................................ 12-9 Undo................................................. 9-4, 10-5 User chart page route monitoring .................................... 11-5 route planning ......................................... 9-5 User charts area report........................................... 10-12 circle report ......................................... 10-12 clearing line report............................... 10-11 creating ................................................. 10-2 deleting.................................................. 10-9 deleting objects from ............................. 10-8 editing objects on .................................. 10-7 full report ............................................. 10-10 importing ............................................... 10-6 information in route monitoring.............. 11-5 line report ............................................ 10-11 notes ..................................................... 10-4 selecting objects to display ................... 10-8 tidal report ........................................... 10-10 User default page.................................. 23-13 User events ............................................. 19-1 User profile.............................................. 1-14 VRM hiding..................................................... 2-21 measuring range with ............................ 2-21 showing ................................................. 2-21 W Waypoints page route monitoring .................................... 11-4 route planning.......................................... 9-4 Weather overlay activating ............................................... 17-1 cloud coverage display.......................... 17-6 deactivating ........................................... 17-2 file playback........................................... 17-2 file selection........................................... 17-2 ocean current display ............................ 17-7 operability .............................................. 17-8 precipitation rate display........................ 17-6 setup...................................................... 17-3 temperature display............................... 17-6 viewability .............................................. 17-8 waves display ........................................ 17-7 Weather Overlay Control dialog box ..... 17-2 Weather Overlay dialog box .................. 17-2 weather spot information ....................... 17-8 wind display........................................... 17-5 Wind sensor .......................................... 18-12 WPT table report .................. 9-22, 9-23, 9-24 V Vector length AIS ...................................................... 14-10 TT .......................................................... 13-4 Voyage log .............................................. 19-7 IN-5
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res Create Date : 2014:11:27 14:21:53Z Creator : FrameMaker 11.0.2 Modify Date : 2015:02:09 15:13:22+09:00 Has XFA : No Language : en XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 11.0.2 Metadata Date : 2015:02:09 15:13:22+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : untitled Producer : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.10 (Windows) Document ID : uuid:faf74df3-6798-4fff-bead-dc516507e9f4 Instance ID : uuid:bafdfc66-4702-47b8-bc7b-3745551e8353 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 432EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools